Perle Systems Server 5500161 40 User Manual
IOLAN  
SDS/SCS/STS/MDC  
User’s Guide  
Version 4.0  
Part #5500161-40  
February 2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table of Contents  
Preface ...............................................................................25  
About This Book ........................................................................ 25  
Intended Audience..................................................................... 25  
Documentation........................................................................... 25  
Typeface Conventions............................................................... 26  
Online Help................................................................................. 26  
Chapter 1 Introduction......................................................27  
About the IOLAN........................................................................ 27  
IOLAN Family Models................................................................ 27  
IOLAN Features.......................................................................... 28  
Hardware ................................................................................................. 28  
Software .................................................................................................. 29  
Accessing the IOLAN......................................................................... 29  
General Features ............................................................................... 29  
Advanced Features............................................................................ 30  
Security ................................................................................................... 30  
Chapter 2 Hardware and Connectivity ............................31  
Introduction................................................................................ 31  
IOLAN Components................................................................... 31  
What’s Included...................................................................................... 31  
What You Need to Supply...................................................................... 31  
Available Accessories............................................................................ 32  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Power Supply Specifications ....................................................32  
Desktop Models ......................................................................................32  
Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Models ................................................... 32  
I/O Models .......................................................................................... 32  
Rack Mount Models (except Electric Utility models)...........................33  
DC Power Requirements.................................................................... 33  
AC Power Requirements.................................................................... 33  
Medical Unit Models ...............................................................................33  
Electric Utility models ............................................................................33  
Power Options.................................................................................... 33  
DC Power Requirements.................................................................... 33  
AC Power Requirements.................................................................... 33  
............................................................................................................ 34  
Getting to Know Your IOLAN ....................................................34  
Overview..................................................................................................34  
1-Port........................................................................................................35  
2-Port........................................................................................................36  
4-Port........................................................................................................36  
I/O .............................................................................................................37  
Top View............................................................................................. 37  
End View ............................................................................................ 37  
Rack Mount..............................................................................................38  
Console Port/LED View...................................................................... 38  
Serial/Ethernet View........................................................................... 38  
Medical Unit.............................................................................................39  
Top View............................................................................................. 39  
Serial View.......................................................................................... 39  
Power/Ethernet View.......................................................................... 39  
Electric Utility models ............................................................................40  
Front (LED/Console port)View............................................................ 40  
Back (Serial/Ethernet/power) View..................................................... 40  
Console/Serial Switch ............................................................................41  
Console Mode .................................................................................... 41  
Serial Mode ........................................................................................ 41  
Dedicated Console Port .........................................................................42  
4
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Powering Up the IOLAN ............................................................ 42  
Desktop/Rack Mount Models (excluding Electric Utility models)...... 42  
Medical Unit Models............................................................................... 43  
I/O Models ............................................................................................... 43  
DC Power Models (excluding Electric Utility models) ........................ 44  
Disconnecting 48V Power Supplies from the IOLAN ......................... 45  
Electric Utility Models ............................................................................ 46  
Wiring................................................................................................. 46  
Wiring up an HV unit .......................................................................... 47  
Wiring up a DHV unit.......................................................................... 48  
Wiring up a the Fail-Safe Relay ......................................................... 49  
Chapter 3 Configuration Methods ...................................51  
Introduction................................................................................ 51  
Configuration Methods Overview............................................. 52  
Configures an IP Address...................................................................... 52  
Requires a Configured IP Address ....................................................... 52  
Easy Config Wizard ................................................................... 53  
DeviceManager........................................................................... 54  
Overview.................................................................................................. 54  
Access Platforms ................................................................................... 54  
Features................................................................................................... 54  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using DeviceManager ................................ 54  
Using DeviceManager ............................................................................ 56  
Navigating the Options....................................................................... 56  
Downloading the Configuration.......................................................... 57  
WebManager............................................................................... 57  
Overview.................................................................................................. 57  
Access Platforms ................................................................................... 57  
Features................................................................................................... 57  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using WebManager.....................................58  
Using WebManager.................................................................................59  
Command Line Interface............................................................60  
Overview..................................................................................................60  
Access Platforms....................................................................................60  
Features...................................................................................................60  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using the CLI...............................................60  
Through the Network.......................................................................... 60  
Through the Serial Port ...................................................................... 61  
Using the CLI...........................................................................................61  
Menu ............................................................................................61  
Overview..................................................................................................61  
Access Platforms....................................................................................61  
Features...................................................................................................61  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using the Menu ...........................................61  
Using the Menu .......................................................................................62  
DHCP/BOOTP..............................................................................63  
Overview..................................................................................................63  
Features...................................................................................................63  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using DHCP/BOOTP ...................................63  
Using DHCP/BOOTP...............................................................................63  
DHCP/BOOTP Parameters .....................................................................64  
SNMP ...........................................................................................65  
Overview..................................................................................................65  
Access Platforms....................................................................................65  
Features...................................................................................................65  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using SNMP.................................................65  
Using the SNMP MIB...............................................................................66  
IOLAN+ Interface ........................................................................67  
Overview..................................................................................................67  
Access Platforms....................................................................................67  
Connecting to the IOLAN to Use the IOLAN+ Interface ......................67  
Using the IOLAN+ Interface ...................................................................67  
6
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Changes to the IOLAN+ Interface ......................................................... 68  
Chapter 4 Getting Started.................................................73  
Introduction................................................................................ 73  
Easy Configuration Wizard ....................................................... 74  
Setting Up the Network ............................................................. 75  
Using DeviceManager ............................................................................ 75  
Using WebManager ................................................................................ 76  
Using a Direct Serial Connection to Specify an IP Address............... 76  
Using a Direct Serial Connection to Enable BOOTP/DHCP .............. 77  
Using ARP-Ping...................................................................................... 78  
For an IPv6 Network............................................................................... 78  
Setting Up the Serial Port(s) ..................................................... 79  
Setting Up Users........................................................................ 81  
Chapter 5 Using DeviceManager and WebManager.......83  
Introduction................................................................................ 83  
Navigating DeviceManager/WebManager................................ 84  
DeviceManager ....................................................................................... 84  
WebManager ........................................................................................... 85  
EasyPort Web ......................................................................................... 85  
Using DeviceManager to Connect to the IOLAN..................... 86  
Starting a New Session.......................................................................... 86  
Assigning a Temporary IP Address to a New IOLAN.......................... 87  
Adding/Deleting IOLANs Manually ....................................................... 88  
Logging in to the IOLAN ........................................................................ 88  
Using WebManager to Connect to the IOLAN......................... 89  
Logging into the IOLAN ......................................................................... 89  
Configuration Files .................................................................... 89  
Creating a New IOLAN Configuration in DeviceManager ................... 89  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Opening an Existing Configuration File ...............................................90  
Importing an Existing Configuration File .............................................90  
Managing the IOLAN ..................................................................90  
Chapter 6 Network Settings .............................................91  
Introduction.................................................................................91  
IP Settings...................................................................................92  
IPv4 Settings ...........................................................................................92  
Overview............................................................................................. 92  
Field Descriptions............................................................................... 92  
IPv6 Settings ...........................................................................................93  
Overview............................................................................................. 93  
Field Descriptions............................................................................... 93  
Adding/Editing a Custom IPv6 Address.............................................. 95  
Advanced.................................................................................................96  
Overview............................................................................................. 96  
Field Descriptions............................................................................... 96  
Advanced ....................................................................................98  
Host Table................................................................................................98  
Overview............................................................................................. 98  
Functionality ....................................................................................... 98  
Field Descriptions............................................................................... 98  
Adding/Editing a Host ............................................................................99  
Route List ..............................................................................................100  
Overview........................................................................................... 100  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 100  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 100  
Adding/Editing Routes .........................................................................101  
DNS/WINS..............................................................................................102  
Overview........................................................................................... 102  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 102  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 102  
Editing/Adding DNS/WINS Servers.................................................. 103  
RIP..........................................................................................................103  
Overview........................................................................................... 103  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 103  
8
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 104  
Dynamic DNS........................................................................................ 105  
Overview .......................................................................................... 105  
Functionality..................................................................................... 105  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 105  
Account Settings .............................................................................. 106  
Cipher Suite Field Descriptions........................................................ 107  
Adding/Editing a Cipher Suite .......................................................... 108  
Validation Criteria Field Descriptions ............................................... 109  
IPv6 Tunnels ......................................................................................... 110  
Overview .......................................................................................... 110  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 110  
Adding/Editing an IPv6 Tunnel......................................................... 111  
Chapter 7 Configuring Serial Ports ...............................113  
Introduction.............................................................................. 113  
Serial Ports............................................................................... 113  
Overview................................................................................................ 113  
Functionality ......................................................................................... 113  
Editing a Serial Port ......................................................................... 114  
Copying a Serial Port ....................................................................... 115  
Resetting a Serial Port ..................................................................... 116  
Serial Port Profiles................................................................... 116  
Common Tabs....................................................................................... 116  
Overview .......................................................................................... 116  
Hardware Tab Field Descriptions..................................................... 117  
Email Alert Tab Field Descriptions................................................... 119  
Packet Forwarding Tab Field Descriptions ...................................... 120  
SSL/TLS Settings Tab Field Descriptions........................................ 123  
Cipher Suite Field Descriptions........................................................ 124  
Adding/Editing a Cipher Suite .......................................................... 125  
Validation Criteria Field Descriptions ............................................... 126  
Console Management Profile .............................................................. 127  
Overview .......................................................................................... 127  
Functionality..................................................................................... 127  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 127  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions .................................................... 128  
TruePort Profile .................................................................................... 130  
Overview .......................................................................................... 130  
Functionality..................................................................................... 130  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 131  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Adding/Editing Additional TruePort Hosts ........................................ 132  
Adding/Editing a Multihost Entry....................................................... 132  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions..................................................... 134  
TCP Sockets Profile..............................................................................136  
Overview........................................................................................... 136  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 136  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 136  
Adding/Editing Additional Hosts ....................................................... 138  
Adding/Editing a Multihost Entry....................................................... 138  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions..................................................... 140  
UDP Sockets Profile .............................................................................142  
Overview........................................................................................... 142  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 142  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 143  
Terminal Profile.....................................................................................144  
Overview........................................................................................... 144  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 145  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 146  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions..................................................... 148  
User Service Settings...........................................................................150  
Login Settings................................................................................... 150  
Telnet Settings.................................................................................. 151  
Rlogin Settings ................................................................................. 152  
SSH Settings .................................................................................... 153  
SLIP Settings.................................................................................... 154  
PPP Settings .................................................................................... 156  
Printer Profile ........................................................................................161  
Overview........................................................................................... 161  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 161  
Serial Tunneling Profile........................................................................162  
Overview........................................................................................... 162  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 162  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 163  
Virtual Modem Profile...........................................................................164  
Overview........................................................................................... 164  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 164  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 165  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions..................................................... 166  
Phone Number to Host Mapping ...................................................... 168  
VModem Phone Number Entry......................................................... 169  
10  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Control Signal I/O Profile..................................................................... 169  
Overview .......................................................................................... 169  
Functionality..................................................................................... 169  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 170  
Input Signal Field Descriptions......................................................... 170  
Output Signal Field Descriptions...................................................... 172  
Modbus Gateway Profile...................................................................... 173  
Overview .......................................................................................... 173  
Functionality..................................................................................... 173  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 174  
Advanced Field Descriptions............................................................ 175  
Modbus Slave IP Settings Field Descriptions .................................. 176  
Adding/Editing Modbus Slave IP Settings........................................ 177  
Modbus Slave Advanced Settings Field Descriptions...................... 178  
Power Management Profile.................................................................. 179  
Overview .......................................................................................... 179  
Functionality..................................................................................... 179  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 180  
Editing Power Management Plug Settings Field Descriptions ......... 180  
Remote Access (PPP) Profile.............................................................. 181  
Overview .......................................................................................... 181  
Functionality..................................................................................... 181  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 182  
Authentication Tab Field Descriptions.............................................. 184  
Dynamic DNS Field Descriptions..................................................... 186  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions .................................................... 187  
Remote Access (SLIP) Profile ............................................................. 190  
Overview .......................................................................................... 190  
General Tab Field Descriptions........................................................ 190  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions .................................................... 191  
Custom Application Profile ................................................................. 193  
Overview .......................................................................................... 193  
Functionality..................................................................................... 193  
General Tab Field Description ......................................................... 193  
Port Buffering........................................................................... 194  
Overview................................................................................................ 194  
Functionality ......................................................................................... 194  
Local Port Buffering.......................................................................... 194  
Remote Port Buffers......................................................................... 195  
Field Definitions.................................................................................... 195  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Advanced ..................................................................................197  
Advanced Serial Settings Tab .............................................................197  
Overview........................................................................................... 197  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 197  
Modems Tab..........................................................................................199  
Overview........................................................................................... 199  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 199  
Adding/Editing a Modem .................................................................. 199  
TruePort Baud Rate Tab.......................................................................200  
Overview........................................................................................... 200  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 200  
Field Definitions................................................................................ 200  
Chapter 8 Configuring Users .........................................201  
Introduction...............................................................................201  
User Settings ............................................................................202  
Overview................................................................................................202  
Functionality..........................................................................................202  
Adding/Editing Users...............................................................203  
General Tab ...........................................................................................203  
Overview........................................................................................... 203  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 203  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 203  
Services Tab..........................................................................................205  
Overview........................................................................................... 205  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 205  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 205  
Advanced Tab .......................................................................................207  
Overview........................................................................................... 207  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 207  
Sessions Tab.........................................................................................209  
Overview........................................................................................... 209  
Functionality ..................................................................................... 209  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 210  
Serial Port Access Tab.........................................................................211  
Overview........................................................................................... 211  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 211  
12  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 9 Configuring Security .....................................213  
Introduction.............................................................................. 213  
Authentication.......................................................................... 213  
Authentication ...................................................................................... 214  
Local ...................................................................................................... 215  
Overview .......................................................................................... 215  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 215  
RADIUS.................................................................................................. 216  
Overview .......................................................................................... 216  
General Field Descriptions............................................................... 216  
Attributes Field Descriptions ............................................................ 217  
Kerberos................................................................................................ 218  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 218  
LDAP...................................................................................................... 219  
Overview .......................................................................................... 219  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 219  
TACACS+ .............................................................................................. 220  
Overview .......................................................................................... 220  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 220  
SecurID.................................................................................................. 221  
Overview .......................................................................................... 221  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 221  
NIS.......................................................................................................... 222  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 222  
SSH............................................................................................ 223  
Overview................................................................................................ 223  
Functionality ......................................................................................... 223  
Users Logging into the IOLAN Using SSH....................................... 223  
Users Passing Through the IOLAN Using SSH (Dir/Sil) .................. 224  
Field Descriptions ................................................................................ 225  
SSL/TLS .................................................................................... 226  
Overview................................................................................................ 226  
Functionality ......................................................................................... 226  
Field Descriptions ................................................................................ 227  
Cipher Suite Field Descriptions........................................................ 228  
Adding/Editing a Cipher ................................................................... 229  
Validation Criteria Field Descriptions ............................................... 230  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
VPN ............................................................................................231  
Overview................................................................................................231  
Functionality..........................................................................................231  
IKE Phase 1 Proposals..................................................................... 232  
ESP Phase 2 Proposals ................................................................... 232  
IPsec.......................................................................................................232  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 232  
Adding/Editing the IPsec Tunnel ...................................................... 233  
Shared Secret Field Description....................................................... 235  
Remote Validation Criteria Field Descriptions.................................. 236  
L2TP/IPsec.............................................................................................237  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 237  
Exceptions.............................................................................................238  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 238  
Adding/Editing a VPN Exception ...................................................... 239  
Advanced...............................................................................................239  
Field Description............................................................................... 239  
Services.....................................................................................240  
Overview................................................................................................240  
Functionality..........................................................................................240  
Field Descriptions.................................................................................240  
Keys and Certificates...............................................................242  
Chapter 10 Configuring I/O Interfaces...........................245  
Introduction...............................................................................245  
Settings .....................................................................................246  
Overview................................................................................................246  
I/O Access Functionality ......................................................................246  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 246  
Advanced Slave Modbus Settings.................................................... 247  
Failsafe Timer Functionality ................................................................249  
Overview........................................................................................... 249  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 249  
UDP Functionality.................................................................................250  
Overview........................................................................................... 250  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 250  
14  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
I/O UDP Settings.............................................................................. 251  
Temperature Functionality .................................................................. 252  
Overview .......................................................................................... 252  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 252  
Channels................................................................................... 253  
Analog ................................................................................................... 253  
Overview .......................................................................................... 253  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 254  
Digital Input........................................................................................... 255  
Overview .......................................................................................... 255  
Functionality..................................................................................... 255  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 256  
Digital Output........................................................................................ 258  
Overview .......................................................................................... 258  
Functionality..................................................................................... 258  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 259  
Relay...................................................................................................... 261  
Overview .......................................................................................... 261  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 262  
Digital I/O Extension............................................................................. 263  
Overview .......................................................................................... 263  
Functionality..................................................................................... 264  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 265  
Adding/Editing Additional Hosts....................................................... 267  
Adding/Editing a Multihost Entry ...................................................... 267  
Temperature.......................................................................................... 269  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 270  
Alarm Settings ...................................................................................... 271  
Basic Analog Alarm Settings............................................................ 271  
Advanced Analog Alarm Settings..................................................... 272  
I/O UDP...................................................................................... 274  
UDP Unicast Format............................................................................. 274  
UDP Broadcast Packet .................................................................... 274  
Analog Section............................................................................... 275  
Digital/Relay Section...................................................................... 276  
Serial Pin Signal Section............................................................... 276  
UDP Unicast Example .......................................................................... 277  
I/O Modbus Slave..................................................................... 277  
Modbus Serial Application Connected to the Serial Port................. 277  
Modbus Serial Application Connected to the Network..................... 277  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Modbus TCP Application .....................................................................278  
Modbus I/O Access ..................................................................278  
Function Codes.....................................................................................278  
I/O Coil/Register Descriptions .............................................................279  
Serial Port Coil/Register Descriptions................................................280  
A4/T4 Registers.....................................................................................280  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers ...........................................................................281  
D4/D2R2 Registers................................................................................282  
Serial Pin Signals..................................................................................282  
TruePort I/O...............................................................................283  
TruePort/Modbus Combination ...........................................................283  
API Over TruePort Only........................................................................284  
Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort.............................................285  
Introduction...........................................................................................285  
Setup......................................................................................................285  
Format of API Commands....................................................................286  
Get Commands .....................................................................................286  
Command Format............................................................................. 286  
Response Format............................................................................. 286  
Set Commands......................................................................................287  
Command Format............................................................................. 287  
Successful Response Format........................................................... 288  
Unsuccessful Response Format....................................................... 288  
Error Codes ...........................................................................................289  
I/O SNMP Traps.........................................................................289  
Chapter 11 Configuring Clustering................................291  
Introduction...............................................................................291  
Clustering Slave List................................................................291  
Overview................................................................................................291  
Adding Clustering Slaves ....................................................................292  
Overview........................................................................................... 292  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 292  
Advanced Clustering Slave Options...................................................293  
16  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Overview .......................................................................................... 293  
Editing Clustering Slave Settings..................................................... 293  
Chapter 12 Configuring the Option Card ......................295  
Introduction.............................................................................. 295  
Option Card Settings............................................................... 295  
Overview................................................................................................ 295  
Functionality ......................................................................................... 295  
Configuring the IOLAN Modem Card ..................................... 295  
Configuring a Wireless WAN Card......................................... 296  
Overview................................................................................................ 296  
Field Descriptions ................................................................................ 296  
Chapter 13 Configuring the System ..............................299  
Introduction.............................................................................. 299  
Alerts......................................................................................... 299  
Email Alerts........................................................................................... 299  
Overview .......................................................................................... 299  
Functionality..................................................................................... 299  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 300  
Syslog.................................................................................................... 301  
Overview .......................................................................................... 301  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 301  
Management............................................................................. 302  
SNMP ..................................................................................................... 302  
Overview .......................................................................................... 302  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 302  
Time ....................................................................................................... 304  
Overview .......................................................................................... 304  
Functionality..................................................................................... 304  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Network Time Tab Field Descriptions............................................... 305  
Time Zone/Summer Time Tab Field Descriptions............................ 306  
Custom App/Plugin...............................................................................307  
Overview........................................................................................... 307  
Field Description............................................................................... 307  
Advanced...............................................................................................308  
Overview........................................................................................... 308  
Login Tab Field Descriptions............................................................ 308  
Bootup Files Tab Field Descriptions................................................. 309  
Message of the Day (MOTD) Tab Field Descriptions....................... 310  
TFTP Tab Field Descriptions............................................................ 311  
Console Port Tab Field Descriptions................................................ 311  
Chapter 14 Controlling the RPS, I/O Channels, and IPsec Tunnels  
313  
Introduction...............................................................................313  
RPS Control ..............................................................................313  
Overview................................................................................................313  
Field Descriptions.................................................................................313  
Plug Control ..........................................................................................314  
Overview........................................................................................... 314  
Field Descriptions............................................................................. 314  
Serial Port Power Control........................................................315  
Overview................................................................................................315  
Field Descriptions.................................................................................315  
Power Plug Status............................................................................ 315  
I/O Channels..............................................................................316  
Overview................................................................................................316  
IPsec Tunnel Control................................................................317  
Chapter 15 System Administration................................319  
Introduction...............................................................................319  
Managing Configuration Files.................................................319  
Saving Configuration Files ..................................................................319  
Downloading Configuration Files........................................................320  
18  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Downloading Configuration Files to Multiple IOLANs...................... 321  
Uploading Configuration Files ............................................................ 322  
Specifying a Custom Factory Default Configuration ........................ 322  
Resetting the IOLAN to the Default Configuration............................ 323  
Downloading IOLAN Firmware ............................................... 323  
Calibrating I/O .......................................................................... 323  
Calibrating Analog Input...................................................................... 323  
Calibrating Voltage........................................................................... 324  
Calibrating Current........................................................................... 324  
Calibrating Temperature Input ............................................................ 324  
Calibrating Thermocouple................................................................ 324  
Calibrating RTD................................................................................ 324  
Calibrating Analog Channels .............................................................. 325  
Resetting Calibration Data................................................................... 325  
Setting the IOLAN’s Date and Time........................................ 326  
Rebooting the IOLAN............................................................... 326  
Resetting the IOLAN to Factory Defaults .............................. 326  
Resetting the SecurID Node Secret........................................ 327  
Language Support ................................................................... 327  
Loading a Supplied Language ............................................................ 327  
Translation Guidance........................................................................... 328  
Software Upgrades and Language Files ............................................ 328  
Downloading Terminal Definitions......................................... 329  
Creating Terminal Definition Files ...................................................... 329  
Resetting Configuration Parameters ..................................... 330  
Lost Admin Password ............................................................. 331  
Chapter 16 Applications .................................................333  
Introduction.............................................................................. 333  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Configuring Modbus ................................................................333  
Overview................................................................................................333  
Configuring a Master Gateway......................................................... 333  
Configuring a Slave Gateway........................................................... 333  
Modbus Gateway Settings ...................................................................334  
Modbus Master Gateway.................................................................. 334  
Modbus Slave Gateway.................................................................... 334  
Modbus Serial Port Settings................................................................335  
Modbus Master Settings................................................................... 335  
Modbus Slave Settings..................................................................... 336  
Configuring PPP Dial On Demand ..........................................337  
Setting Up Printers...................................................................338  
Remote Printing Using LPD.................................................................338  
Remote Printing Using RCP.................................................................339  
Remote Printing Using Host-Based Print Handling Software ..........339  
Configuring a Virtual Private Network....................................340  
IOLAN-to-Host/Network........................................................................340  
Network-to-Network..............................................................................342  
Host-to-Host ..........................................................................................343  
VPN Client-to-Network..........................................................................345  
Appendix A RADIUS and TACACS+ ..............................347  
Introduction...............................................................................347  
RADIUS......................................................................................347  
Supported RADIUS Parameters...........................................................347  
Accounting Message............................................................................350  
Mapped RADIUS Parameters to IOLAN Parameters..........................351  
Perle RADIUS Dictionary Example......................................................352  
TACACS+...................................................................................354  
Accessing the IOLAN Through a Serial Port Users...........................354  
Accessing the IOLAN Through a Serial Port User Example Settings356  
20  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Accessing the IOLAN from the Network Users ................................. 357  
Accessing the IOLAN from the Network User Example Settings .... 358  
Appendix B SSL/TLS Ciphers ........................................359  
Introduction.............................................................................. 359  
Valid SSL/TLS Ciphers ............................................................ 359  
Appendix C Virtual Modem AT Commands ..................361  
Virtual Modem Initialization Commands................................ 361  
Appendix D Pinouts and Cabling Diagrams .................363  
Serial Pinouts........................................................................... 363  
DB25 Male ............................................................................................. 363  
DB25 Female......................................................................................... 364  
RJ45....................................................................................................... 365  
RJ45 (for desktop and rack mount models) ..................................... 366  
RJ45 (for SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C models)................... 367  
RJ45 (for SDS32C/SDS16C/SDS8C Electric Utility models)........... 368  
RJ45 (for medical unit models) ........................................................ 369  
DB9 Male (Serial Only) ......................................................................... 369  
DB9 Male I/O.......................................................................................... 370  
Power Over Ethernet Pinouts ................................................. 370  
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams ...................................................... 371  
Terminal DB25 Connector ................................................................... 371  
DB25 Male ....................................................................................... 371  
DB25 Female ................................................................................... 371  
RJ45................................................................................................. 372  
DB9 Male ......................................................................................... 373  
Modem DB25 Connector...................................................................... 374  
DB25 Male ....................................................................................... 374  
RJ45................................................................................................. 374  
DB9 Male ......................................................................................... 375  
Appendix E Setting Jumpers .........................................377  
Introduction.............................................................................. 377  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1-Port IOLAN DB25 Male/Female.........................................................377  
1-Port IOLAN RJ45................................................................................378  
1-Port IOLAN RJ45 P (Power Over Ethernet) .....................................378  
1-Port IOLAN DB9 .................................................................................379  
2-Port IOLAN SDS1M (Modem)............................................................379  
2-Port IOLAN .........................................................................................380  
2-Port IOLAN RJ45 P (Power Over Ethernet) .....................................380  
4-Port Desktop IOLAN ..........................................................................381  
Digital I/O Module..................................................................................382  
Analog Input Module ............................................................................383  
Appendix F I/O Wiring Diagrams ...................................385  
Wiring I/O Diagrams .................................................................385  
Digital I/O ...............................................................................................385  
Digital Input Wet Contact.................................................................. 385  
Digital Input Dry Contact................................................................... 385  
Digital Output Sink............................................................................ 386  
Digital Output Source ....................................................................... 386  
Analog Input..........................................................................................387  
Current.............................................................................................. 387  
Voltage ............................................................................................. 387  
Temperature Input ................................................................................388  
Thermocouple................................................................................... 388  
RTD 2-Wire....................................................................................... 388  
RTD 3-Wire....................................................................................... 388  
RTD 4-Wire....................................................................................... 389  
Relay Output..........................................................................................389  
Normally Open Contact .................................................................... 389  
Normally Closed Contact.................................................................. 389  
Appendix G Utilities ........................................................391  
Introduction...............................................................................391  
TruePort.....................................................................................391  
22  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
API I/O Access Over TruePort ................................................ 392  
API Request Format ............................................................................. 392  
API Response Format .......................................................................... 392  
Error Codes...................................................................................... 393  
Decoder..................................................................................... 393  
Appendix H Accessories ................................................395  
Introduction.............................................................................. 395  
Installing a Perle PCI Card ...................................................... 395  
Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable).................................................... 398  
RJ45F to DB25M DTE Crossover Adapter.......................................... 398  
RJ45F to DB25M DCE Modem Adapter .............................................. 399  
RJ45F to DB25F DTE Crossover Adapter .......................................... 400  
RJ45F to DB9M DTE Crossover Adapter............................................ 401  
RJ45F to DB9F DTE Crossover Adapter ............................................ 402  
Sun/Cisco RJ45M Connector Cable for Rack Mount Models........... 402  
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)403  
RJ45F to DB25M DTE Crossover Adapter.......................................... 403  
RJ45F to DB25M DCE Modem Adapter .............................................. 404  
RJ45F to DB25F DTE Crossover Adapter .......................................... 405  
RJ45F to DB9M DTE Crossover Adapter............................................ 406  
RJ45F to DB9F DTE Crossover Adapter ............................................ 407  
Sun/Cisco Roll-Over Adapter for Rack Mount Models...................... 407  
Appendix I Troubleshooting...........................................409  
Introduction.............................................................................. 409  
Hardware Troubleshooting ..................................................... 409  
Power/Ready LED Labels .................................................................... 410  
Communication Issues............................................................ 410  
DeviceManager Problems ....................................................... 410  
Host Problems.......................................................................... 411  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
RADIUS Authentication Problems ..........................................411  
Login Problems ........................................................................412  
Problems with Terminals.........................................................412  
Unknown IP Address................................................................413  
DHCP/BOOTP Problems ..........................................................413  
Callback Problems ...................................................................413  
Language Problems .................................................................413  
Modem Problems......................................................................414  
PPP Problems...........................................................................414  
Printing Problems.....................................................................414  
Long Reboot Cycle...................................................................414  
SSL/TLS.....................................................................................415  
I/O Models .................................................................................415  
IPv6 Issues................................................................................416  
Contacting Technical Support ................................................417  
Making a Technical Support Query.....................................................417  
Who To Contact................................................................................ 417  
Have Your Product Information Ready............................................. 417  
Making a support query via the Perle web page .............................. 417  
Repair Procedure..................................................................................418  
Feedback on this Manual .....................................................................418  
Glossary...........................................................................419  
Index.................................................................................421  
24  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
About This Book  
This guide provides the information you need to:  
z
z
configure the IOLAN  
incorporate the IOLAN into your production environment  
Intended Audience  
This guide is for administrators who will be configuring the IOLAN.  
Some prerequisite knowledge is needed to understand the concepts and examples in this guide:  
z
z
If you are using an external authentication application(s), working knowledge of the  
authentication application(s).  
Knowledge of TFTP, the transfer protocol the IOLAN uses.  
Documentation  
The following documentation is included on the IOLAN installation CD:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
IOLAN 1-Port Quick Start Guide  
IOLAN 2-4-Port Quick Start Guide  
IOLAN Rack Mount Quick Start Guide  
IOLAN I/O Quick Start Guide  
IOLAN Electric Utility Terminal Server Quick Start Guide  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC Command Line Reference Guide  
IOLAN MDC Hardware Installation Guide  
TruePort User’s Guide  
TruePort Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows NT  
Online Help in the DeviceManager (automatically installed with the DeviceManager application)  
Link to knowledge base  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Typeface Conventions  
Typeface Conventions  
Most text is presented in the typeface used in this paragraph. Other typefaces are used to help you  
identify certain types of information. The other typefaces are:  
Typeface Example  
Usage  
At the C: prompt, type:  
add host  
This typeface is used for code examples and system-  
generated output. It can represent a line you type in, or a  
piece of your code, or an example of output.  
Set the value to TRUE.  
The typeface used for TRUEis also used when referring to  
an actual value or identifier that you should use or that is  
used in a code example.  
subscribe project subject  
The italicized portion of these examples shows the  
typeface used for variables that are placeholders for  
values you specify. This is found in regular text and in  
code examples as shown. Instead of entering project,  
you enter your own value, such as stock_trader, and  
for yourcode, enter the name of your program.  
run yourcode.exec  
File, Save  
This typeface and comma indicates a path you should  
follow through the menus. In this example, you select  
Save from the File menu.  
IOLAN User’s Guide  
This typeface indicates a book or document title.  
See About the IOLAN on page 27 for  
more information.  
This indicates a cross-reference to another chapter or  
section that you can click on to jump to that section.  
Online Help  
Online help is provided in the DeviceManager. You can click on the What’s This button (  
or  
)
and then click on a field to get field-level help. Or, you can press the F1 key to get window-level  
help. You can also get the User’s Guide online by selecting Help, Help Topics.  
26  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction  
Chapter  
1
1
About the IOLAN  
The IOLAN is an Ethernet communications/terminal server that allows serial devices to be connected  
directly to LANs. The IOLAN can connect to a wide range of devices including:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Terminals for multi-user UNIX systems  
Data acquisition equipment (manufacturing, laboratory, scanners, etc.)  
Retail point-of-sale equipment (bar coding, registers, etc.)  
PCs using terminal emulation or SLIP/PPP  
Modems for remote access and Internet access  
ISDN adapters for branch remote access and Internet access  
All types of serial printers  
The performance and flexibility of the IOLAN allows you to use a wide range of high speed devices  
in complex application environments. The IOLAN products will work in any server environment  
running TCP/UDP/IP.  
IOLAN Family Models  
The IOLAN comes in several different models to meet your network needs:  
z
DS—Offered as a 1-port unit (DB25M, DB25F, RJ45, and DB9M interfaces available), this  
model provides general IOLAN functionality and supports software configurable serial interface  
protocols EIA-232/422/485.  
z
z
TS—This model is available with two serial ports (RJ45 only) and supports EIA-232 only. The  
TS model is similar to the DS model supporting only general IOLAN functionality.  
SDS—This model is available in both desktop and rack mount configurations. Both models  
support software configurable serial interface protocols EIA-232/422/485. The SDS model has  
the advanced secure IOLAN feature set in addition to the general IOLAN functionality.  
z
z
z
STS—This model comes in one desktop model and several rack mount configurations. All  
models support EIA-232 only. The STS model has the advanced secure IOLAN feature set in  
addition to the general IOLAN functionality.  
SCS—This model comes in several rack mount configurations. All models support EIA-232  
only and have an internal PCI card interface. The SCS model has the advanced secure IOLAN  
feature set in addition to the general IOLAN functionality.  
MDC—Offered as a 4-port and 8-port unit (RJ45 only), this model is a medical unit compliant  
with IEC 60601-1 and has galvanically isolated EIA-232 serial ports. The MDC model has the  
advanced secure IOLAN feature set in addition to the general IOLAN functionality.  
See Hardware on page 28 for information about the hardware specifications for your IOLAN model.  
See Software on page 29 for a list of the basic and advanced software features.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IOLAN Features  
IOLAN Features  
The IOLAN is a communications server used for making serial network connections. It attaches to  
your TCP/IP network and allows serial devices such as modems, terminals, or printers to access the  
LAN. It also allows LAN devices to access devices or equipment attached to IOLAN serial ports.  
This section highlights the hardware and software components you can expect to find in your IOLAN  
model.  
Hardware  
Hardware Features  
IOLAN Models  
Desktop  
Rack Mount  
Medical  
unit  
DB25F  
DB25M  
RJ45  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Serial Connectors  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
DB9M  
RJ45  
z
z
Galvanically Isolated  
Serial Ports  
z
z
EIA-232  
EIA-422  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Serial Interface  
EIA-485  
DB25F  
DB25M  
Serial Power In Pin  
Serial Power Out Pin  
RJ45  
z
z
DB25F  
DB25M  
RJ45  
z
z
z
z
Auto Sensing  
Ethernet Interface  
10/100  
z
z
z
z
z
z
10/100/1000  
PCI Interface  
I/O Interface  
Power over Ethernet  
External AC  
Internal AC  
DC  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Power Supply  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Dedicated Console Port  
28  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IOLAN Features  
Software  
This section describes the supported software features available.  
Accessing the IOLAN  
All IOLAN models can be accessed through any of the following methods:  
z
Easy Config Wizard, an easy configuration wizard that allows you to quickly setup the IOLAN  
in a Windows environment  
z
DeviceManager, a fully functional Windows 98/NT/2000/ME/Server 2003/XP/Server 2008/Vista  
configuration/management tool  
z
z
z
z
z
z
WebManager, a web browser (HTTP/HTTPS) option for configuring/managing the IOLAN  
Menu, a window-oriented menu interface for configuration and user access  
CLI, a Command Line Interface option for configuration/management and user access  
SNMP, allowing remote configuration via SNMP as well as statistics gathering  
DHCP/BOOTP, a method of automatically updating the IOLAN  
IOLAN+ interface, for IOLAN+ users, IOLAN models with 16 ports or fewer can be configured  
using the IOLAN+ menu  
General Features  
Basic IOLAN software features are available on all IOLAN models.  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
IPv6 support.  
Support for TCP/IP and UDP protocols including telnet and raw connections.  
Printer support via LPD and RCP.  
Virtual modem emulation.  
‘Fixed tty’ support for several operating systems using Perle’s TruePort utility.  
DHCP/BOOTP for automated network-based setup.  
Dynamic statistics and line status information for fast problem diagnosis.  
Multisession support when accessing the IOLAN from either the serial port or the network.  
Modbus master/slave/gateway support.  
An SDK for custom programs and plugin support.  
I/O interface on the IOLAN I/O models (Analog, Temperature, Digital, and Relay).  
Ability to disable services (for example, Telnet, TruePort, Syslog, SNMP, Modbus, HTTP) for  
additional security.  
Introduction 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IOLAN Features  
Advanced Features  
Advanced IOLAN software features can be found on all IOLAN models except DS and TS models.  
z
External authentication using any of the following systems:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
RADIUS  
Kerberos  
TACACS+  
NIS  
SecurID  
LDAP  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Support for TCP/IP and UDP protocols.  
Dynamic DNS with DYNDNS.org.  
Domain Name Server (DNS) support.  
®
WINS support for Windows environments.  
Remote access support including PPP, SLIP, and SLIP with VJ Compression.  
Ability to remotely manage the Perle Remote Power Switch (RPS).  
Ability to cluster several IOLANs.  
Email alert notification.  
PPP authentication via PAP or CHAP.  
SSH connections (supported ciphers are Blowfish, 3DES, AES, CAST128, and Arcfour).  
SSL/TLS connections.  
Logging via Syslog.  
RIP authentication (via password or MD5).  
SNTP (versions 1, 2, 3, and 4 are supported).  
Security  
The IOLAN security features can include (depending on your IOLAN model):  
z
z
z
z
Supervisory and serial port password protection.  
Ability to set serial port access rights.  
Ability to assign users access level rights to control their access.  
Trusted host filtering (IP filtering), allowing only those hosts that have been configured in the  
IOLAN access to the IOLAN.  
z
z
z
z
Idle port timers, which close a connection that has not been active for a specified period of time.  
Ability to individually disable network services that won’t be used by the IOLAN.  
SSH client/server connections (SSH 1 and SSH 2).  
SSL/TLS client/server data encryption (TLSv1 and SSLv2).  
30  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Hardware and  
Connectivity  
Chapter  
2
2
Introduction  
This chapter describes how to physically set up your IOLAN unit. It includes an overview of the  
IOLAN hardware components and how to power up the IOLAN to make sure it works correctly.  
IOLAN Components  
What’s Included  
The following components are included with your product:  
z
z
IOLAN unit  
External power supply (1-, 2-, and 4-port desktop models only)  
SDS P (Power Over Ethernet) models and I/O models do not have an external power  
supply.  
z
Quick Start Guide (all IOLAN models except medical unit models). Soft copy exists on the  
CDROM.  
z
z
z
Warranty card  
A CD-ROM containing documentation, firmware, configuration software, TruePort, etc.  
All IOLAN models (except medical unit models) that have an RJ45 serial connector(s) come  
with an RJ45JDB9F adapter  
Added components for rack mount models:  
z
z
z
3’ CAT5 RJ45 Administration cable  
Rack mounting kit  
(SCS models only) IOLAN Cable Starter Kit (see Appendix H, Accessories on page 395 for  
pinout diagrams).  
Added components for medical unit models:  
z
z
z
multi-function wall plate and associated mounting kit  
IOLAN MDC Hardware Installation Guide (a soft copy also exists on the CDROM)  
IOLAN MDC & Philips DeviceLink II System Integration Guide  
What You Need to Supply  
Before you can begin, you need to have the following:  
z
z
z
A serial cable(s) to connect serial devices to your IOLAN unit  
An Ethernet CAT5 10/100/1000BASE-T cable to connect the IOLAN unit to the network  
Connection to power (Only applies to DC, I/O and Electric Utility models)  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Power Supply Specifications  
Available Accessories  
The following accessories are available for purchase for the various IOLAN models (except medical  
unit models):  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
DIN Rail Mounting Kit (35mm) for the desktop models and Electric Utility models.  
IOLAN modem card for SCS rack mount models  
PCI adapter card for SCS rack mount models (for wireless WAN cards)  
3 meter RJ45M-RJ45M 8-wire Sun/Cisco modular cable  
RJ45 to DB25 DTE Male adapter  
RJ45 to DB25 DCE Male adapter  
RJ45 to DB25 DTE Female adapter  
RJ45 to DB9 Male DTE adapter  
RJ45 to DB9 Female DTE adapter  
Contact your distributor for details.  
Power Supply Specifications  
Desktop Models  
If you are providing a power supply for a desktop IOLAN model, your power supply must meet the  
following requirements:  
z
z
Output between 9-30V DC.  
DC barrel connector: The cable attached to the power supply should be about 20AWG, length 6  
feet approx. The barrel dimensions of the cable-plug are OD=5.5, ID=2.1, and length= 9.5mm,  
with a straight barrel, and positive polarity on the inside and negative polarity on the outside.  
z
Power can also be provided by:  
z
z
z
z
Serial Port 1, pin 1 on the DS/SDS1 models  
Serial Port 2, pin 1 on the SDS2 model  
Serial Port 4, pin 1 on the SDS4/SCS4 models  
Ethernet on the P series models (Power over Ethernet)  
Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Models  
The 1-port/4-port SDS P models can be powered by either the external DC power supply (included)  
or PoE or both. The 2-port SDS P does not accommodate an external power supply and can be  
powered only through PoE.  
The IOLAN SDS P model is considered a Powered Device (PD) and can only accept power from an  
IEEE 802.3AF compliant Power Source Equipment (PSE) device. The IOLAN PoE can receive up to  
13W of power using one of the following methods to connect to a PSE:  
z
z
Using the two unused twisted pair wires (10/100Mb only).  
Using the two data pairs or “phantom power” method (100Mb).  
I/O Models  
The power supply for a desktop IOLAN I/O model must meet the following requirement:  
z
Output between 9-30V DC and a minimum of 600mA current.  
The maximum load for the Relay channel is 1A @ 30VDC or 0.5A @ 120VAC.  
32  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Power Supply Specifications  
Rack Mount Models (except Electric Utility models)  
DC Power Requirements  
The IOLAN DC is supplied with an integral Terminal Connections block to facilitate connection to a  
DC source(s). The DC supply(s) should have adequate over-current protection within the closed rack  
system and comply with local or national standards applicable to the installation territory. You need  
wire gauge 20 to 22 AWG to connect the IOLAN rack mount unit to the power source.  
The equipment must be grounded for safety and to ensure ESD protection for correct  
operation and protection of the internal circuitry.  
AC Power Requirements  
AC power rack mount units come with standard power cords, specific to your country, that should be  
used to power the IOLAN unit.  
Medical Unit Models  
The MDC model comes with standard power cords, specific to your country, that should be used to  
power the IOLAN unit.  
Electric Utility models  
Power Options  
The Electrical Utility series of IOLAN units can be purchased with two different power source  
options;  
HV -  
Single High Voltage power input with nominal AC range of 100V-240V (50-60Hz) or  
nominal DC range of 125V-250V.  
DHV - Dual Redundant High Voltage power inputs with nominal AC range of 100V-240V (50-  
60Hz) or nominal DC range of 125V-250V. Either power source can be used to supply  
power to the unit. When both power inputs are live, the unit operates in a load sharing  
fashion. Note that the power input pairs are electrically isolated from each other. This means  
that when using both power inputs either input can be in either the AC or DC range.  
DC Power Requirements  
The IOLAN can be powered via a DC source. The following are the ranges for the DC voltage  
supported by the unit;  
Minimum: 88 VDC  
Nominal: 125 -250 VDC  
Maximum: 300 VDC  
The DC supply(s) should have adequate over-current protection within the closed rack system and  
comply with local or national standards applicable to the installation territory. You need wire gauge  
14 to 18AWG to connect the IOLAN rack mount unit to the power source.  
Note:  
The equipment must be grounded for safety and to ensure ESD protection for correct  
operation and protection of the internal circuitry.  
AC Power Requirements  
The IOLAN can be powered via an AC source. The following are the ranges for the AC voltage  
supported by the unit;  
Minimum: 85 VAC  
Nominal: 100 -240 VAC  
Maximum: 265VAC  
You need wire gauge 14 to 18AWG to connect the IOLAN rack mount unit to the power source.  
Hardware and Connectivity 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
This section describes the hardware components found on your IOLAN unit.  
Overview  
All IOLANs have the same basic hardware components to allow you to connect to serial devices,  
connect to the network, monitor LAN and serial activity, and manage the unit. Below is a list of these  
components:  
z
z
Serial Port(s)—Connector(s) that will be used to connect to a serial device.  
Activity—This LED blinks to indicate LAN activity. (For medical unit models, the LED is  
indicated by the  
symbol.)  
z
z
Link10/100—This LED indicates the Ethernet connection speed for desktop models only:  
–
–
–
Green—10 Mbits  
Amber—100 Mbits  
Off—no LAN connection  
Link10/100/1000—This LED indicates the Ethernet connection speed for rack mount models  
only:  
–
–
–
Green—10/100 Mbits  
Amber—1000 Mbits  
Off—no LAN connection  
34  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
z
Power/Ready —This LED can cycle through several colors (amber, green, red) during a boot  
process, but should complete with a solid green light. The label of the LED, and whether or not  
the LED blinks green after power depends on the IOLAN, as shown in the table below. You can  
learn more about the Power/Ready LED in Hardware Troubleshooting on page 409.  
IOLAN Model LED Label  
Green light  
Desktop  
Power/Ready Solid — Indicates the IOLAN has completed the power up  
cycle.  
Blinks — After power up, a blinking green light indicates  
that the console switch is in the on position.  
Rack mount  
Medical unit  
System Ready Solid — Indicates the IOLAN has completed the power up  
cycle.  
Solid — Indicates the IOLAN has completed the power up  
cycle.  
z
z
External Power Supply—For all IOLAN models, this can be an external AC power supply, DC  
terminal, or power cord, depending on the model.  
Console/Serial Switch—Found on desktop models only (rack mount models have a dedicated  
console port), this switch determines whether port 1 functions as a serial port or a console port. If  
you have an extended temperature or I/O model, you will see two console switches.  
Console/Serial Switch 1 is used to determine the console/serial setting for Port 1 and the  
Console/Serial Switch 2 is not used.  
z
z
Reset—The inset RESET button will reboot all IOLAN desktop and rack mount models if  
pushed in and released quickly. It will reset the IOLAN to factory defaults if pushed in and held  
for more than three seconds. (The RESET button is not available on medical unit models.)  
Serial Activity—All IOLAN models (except medical unit models) have an LED that blinks for  
serial activity.  
z
z
Tx—Blinks with transmit serial activity. There is a Tx LED for each serial port.  
Rx—Blinks with receive serial activity. There is an Rx LED for each serial port.  
z
Ethernet—The Ethernet connector. SCS models have dual Ethernet.  
1-Port  
This section describes the components found on the IOLAN 1-port models.  
Console/Serial  
Switch  
Reset  
External Power Supply  
Ethernet  
Power/Ready  
Link/10/100  
Activity (LAN)  
Serial Activity  
Serial Port  
Hardware and Connectivity 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
The 1-port IOLAN has one serial connection that is one of the following connectors: DB25 male,  
DB25 female, RJ45, or DB9 male.  
2-Port  
This section describes the components found on the IOLAN 2-port models.  
Console/Serial  
Reset  
Switch  
External Power Supply  
Ethernet  
Power/Ready  
Link/10/100  
Activity (LAN)  
Serial Activity  
Serial Ports  
The 2-port IOLAN has two RJ45 serial connections. The 2-port IOLAN can support an 8-pin  
connector if there is no requirement for power in (pin 1) or power out (pin 10) pins. The 2-Port P  
model (Power over Ethernet) does not come with an external power supply connector.  
4-Port  
This section describes the components found on the IOLAN 4-port models.  
Console/Serial  
Reset  
Switch  
External Power Supply  
Ethernet  
Power/Ready  
Link/10/100  
Activity (LAN)  
Serial Activity  
Serial Ports  
36  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
The 4-port IOLAN model has four RJ45 serial connections.  
I/O  
This sections describes the basic components found on the IOLAN I/O models.  
Top View  
The following image shows a typical IOLAN I/O model. Your I/O model may have I/O connectors in  
slightly different positions.  
External Power Supply  
Power/Ready  
Link/10/100  
Activity (LAN)  
Serial Activity  
End View  
The IOLAN I/O model shown is an A4D2. Different IOLAN I/O models have different I/O connector  
configurations.  
I/O connectors  
I/O connectors  
External Power Supply  
Reset  
Console/Serial  
Switch  
Serial Port  
Ethernet  
All IOLAN I/O models have a DB9M serial connector.  
Hardware and Connectivity 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
Rack Mount  
This section describes the basic components of all rack mount IOLAN models. This example uses the  
IOLAN SCS with dual Ethernet and dual AC power.  
Console Port/LED View  
Server LEDs  
Power ON/OFF  
Serial Activity  
Console Port  
Serial/Ethernet View  
Serial Ports  
Dual Ethernet  
Dual AC Power  
PCI Card Faceplate  
(SCS models only)  
Reset  
38  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
Medical Unit  
This section describes the basic components found on the IOLAN medical unit models.  
Top View  
Power  
LAN Activity  
Serial View  
Serial Ports  
Power/Ethernet View  
Power ON/OFF  
AC Power  
Ethernet  
Hardware and Connectivity 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
Electric Utility models  
This section describes the basic components of the Electric Utility models. This example uses the  
SDS32C DHV model.  
Front (LED/Console port)View  
Server LEDs  
Serial Activity  
Console Port  
Back (Serial/Ethernet/power) View  
Serial ports  
Ethernet port  
Reset switch Power/relay  
40  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting to Know Your IOLAN  
Console/Serial Switch  
Located at the back of the desktop IOLAN models is a switch that controls whether serial port 1 is in  
Console or Serial mode.  
The SDS T (Extended Temperature) models have two switches, Switch 1 is used for  
Console/Serial mode and Switch 2 is unused.  
Look at your model to verify the direction of the ON switch position. ON indicates that serial port 1  
is in Console mode; otherwise serial port 1 is in Serial mode.  
Console Mode  
Console mode is used when you have a direct connection between a serial device (like a terminal or a  
PC) and the IOLAN, accessed by the Admin user to configure/manage the IOLAN. Console mode  
automatically sets serial port settings as:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Serial Interface to EIA-232  
Speed to 9600  
Flow Control to No  
Bits to 8  
Stop Bits to 1  
Parity to None  
Console mode also displays extra system messages.  
Serial port 1 will ignore any Serial Port settings when in Console mode, so you need to turn Console  
mode off to use serial port 1 in your network.  
When the console switch is in the on position, the Power/Ready LED will blink green.  
Serial Mode  
Serial mode is used when the IOLAN acts as a communications server, or anytime you are not  
connecting directly to the IOLAN to configure it. You can connect directly to the IOLAN in Serial  
mode, but the IOLAN will not display all the messages/information you will get in Console mode.  
Hardware and Connectivity 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Powering Up the IOLAN  
Dedicated Console Port  
The rack mount IOLAN models have a dedicated Console port, located on the LED side of the  
IOLAN. You can use the supplied Administration cable (with the supplied RJ45JDB9F adapter if  
needed) to connect a terminal to the Console/Admin port to view diagnostic information and/or  
configure the IOLAN using the Menu or Command Line Interface (CLI). You can configure the baud  
rate and flow control of the dedicated Console port.  
Powering Up the IOLAN  
Desktop/Rack Mount Models (excluding Electric Utility models)  
To power up the desktop or rack mount IOLAN, perform the following steps:  
1. Rack mount models only: Using the rack mount brackets included with your IOLAN, you can  
rack mount the IOLAN from the front or the back of the chassis, depending on your  
environment. Make sure you don’t block the IOLAN’s side air vents. Each IOLAN is 1U in  
height, and does not require any extra space between units; therefore, you can rack mount up to  
five IOLANs in a 5U rack.  
2. Plug the external power supply into the IOLAN and then into the electrical outlet. Connect it to  
the PSE if you have a P series (Power over Ethernet) model.  
3. Rack mount models only: Power on the IOLAN unit using the Power ON/OFF switch.  
4. You will see the LEDs blink for several seconds and then remain a solid green, indicating that it  
is ready to configure/use.  
Before you start to configure the IOLAN, you should set the desktop IOLAN jumpers if you want to  
terminate the line or use the power in pin feature (instead of an external power supply, if your  
desktop IOLAN model supports it).  
In some circumstances, the setting of jumpers may be required:  
z
z
z
IOLAN DS and SDS models where EIA-422/485 line termination is required.  
IOLAN I/O models with Digital I/O for setting the channels as input or output.  
IOLAN I/O models with Analog I/O for setting Voltage/Current.  
See Appendix E, Setting Jumpers on page 377 to see how to set the jumpers for your IOLAN  
desktop model.  
42  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Powering Up the IOLAN  
Medical Unit Models  
To power up the medical unit IOLAN, perform the following steps:  
1. You can attach the multi-function wall plate included with your medical unit IOLAN to the wall,  
then mount the IOLAN on the wall plate. Alternatively, you can mount the IOLAN on a tabletop  
or any suitable horizontal surface. See the IOLAN MDC Hardware Installation Guide for more  
information on how to mount the medical unit IOLAN.  
2. Plug a power cable into the left side (power/Ethernet panel) of the IOLAN unit and then into the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Power on the IOLAN unit using the Power ON/OFF switch.  
4. You will see the LEDs blink for several seconds and then remain a solid green, indicating that it  
is ready to configure/use.  
I/O Models  
To power up the IOLAN, perform the following steps:  
1. Unplug the power plugable terminal block from the IOLAN.  
2. Loosen the screws and then insert your positive (+) wire into the left terminal and screw it down.  
Insert the negative (-) wire into the right terminal and screw it down as shown below:  
9-30 VDC  
-
+
Right  
Left  
3. Plug the power terminal block back into the IOLAN.  
4. Plug the power supply into the electrical outlet.  
5. You will see the LEDs blink for several seconds and then remain a solid green, indicating that it  
is ready to configure/use.  
Before you start to configure the IOLAN, you should set the IOLAN jumpers for Digital I/O (see  
Digital I/O Module on page 382) or Analog Input (Analog Input Module on page 383) channels.  
Hardware and Connectivity 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Powering Up the IOLAN  
DC Power Models (excluding Electric Utility models)  
To power up the IOLAN with DC power requirements, perform the following steps:  
1. Verify that the power switch on the IOLAN unit and the power source is in the Off position.  
2. Connect the primary and secondary DC input using the following specifications:  
a. Use wire gauge 20 to 22 AWG.  
b. Strip insulation 7mm from wire ends. (If using stranded wire, twist all strands together to  
ensure all wire strands are used for the connection.)  
c. Connect supply with reference to the terminal block diagram and electrical specifications:  
Earthing wire  
Secondary Supply: Negative (-) wire  
Secondary Supply: Positive (+) wire  
Primary Supply: Negative (-) wire  
Primary Supply: Positive (+) wire  
DC Power Supply  
When connecting only a single power supply source, ensure the connection is the  
primary supply and the secondary terminals are left unconnected.  
Primary Supply:  
Positive (+) wire to Circuit 1, terminal marked +  
Negative (-) wire to Circuit 1, terminal marked -  
Secondary (back-up) Supply:  
Positive (+) wire to Circuit 2, terminal marked +  
Negative (-) wire to Circuit 2, terminal marked -  
Note:  
When connecting dual power supply sources, the IOLAN supports a common  
positive (+) circuit arrangement ONLY.  
Earthing Wire:  
Ground wire to terminal marked with circular earthing symbol.  
Screws:  
Tighten terminal connector block screws to 7 lbs-inches torque.  
3. Switch On the power supplies.  
4. Switch On the IOLAN. (The power LEDS 1 and 2 will indicate the status of the power source at  
the respective input. If both the primary and secondary power source are available, both LED 1  
and LED 2 will be luminated indicated power detected from each input.)  
44  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Powering Up the IOLAN  
Disconnecting 48V Power Supplies from the IOLAN  
To disconnect the power supply(s) from the IOLAN, do the following:  
1. Switch off the IOLAN.  
2. Switch off the power source(s).  
3. Disconnect all DC power input cables from the IOLAN terminal connector block.  
4. Remove any attached devices to the serial or Ethernet port(s).  
Your IOLAN is ready to be moved.  
Hardware and Connectivity 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Powering Up the IOLAN  
Electric Utility Models  
To power up the IOLAN, Electric Utility models, perform the following steps:  
1.  
Ensure that the power supply side of the connection is been powered down before  
attempting to connect the wires on the IOLAN side.  
2.  
3.  
Connect the power as outlined in the “wiring” section below which matches your model.  
Enable power to unit. Unit should now power up.  
Wiring  
WARNING  
This unit should be installed in a restricted access location where access can only be  
gained by service personnel or users who have been instructed about the reasons for the  
restrictions applied to the location and about any precautions that shall be taken; and  
access is through the use of a tool or lock and key, or other means of security, and is  
controlled by the authority responsible for the location.  
All equipment must be installed according to the applicable country wiring codes.  
Note:  
The Electric Utility series of IOLAN units do not have a power switch, and an  
appropriately rated circuit breaker must be installed externally to the unit. If two power  
sources are used, each source must have a circuit breaker. As a safety precaution you  
should not rely upon the unit's front panel LEDs as a power indicator.  
For power and relay wiring, the use of ring terminals size #6 (M3.5) is recommended using stranded  
wire size AWG 18-14. Tighten all screws to a torque of 12 Lb-in (1.36 Nm).  
Grounding  
The Electric Utility series of IOLAN units have a chassis ground screw. This connection must be  
connected to "Equipment Ground" for DC installations or "Safety Ground" for AC installations. A  
second “earth ground” connection is provided for secondary grounding. This should only be used in  
conjunction with the grounding screw provided on the terminal connector.  
For “ground” the use of ring terminal size #8 (M4) is recommended using stranded wire size AWG 18-  
14. Tighten screw to a torque of 12 Lb-in (1.36 Nm).  
Note:  
For your safety, before attempting to connect or modify any of the electrical connections  
to the unit, please be sure all wiring is disconnected from any live power source. Power  
should only be applied when you are sure that the wiring is correct and any safety covers  
are properly installed.  
46  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Powering Up the IOLAN  
Wiring up an HV unit  
Terminal # Description  
Usage  
1
Normally Open Normally Open is a fail-safe relay connection. Use this with the  
Common terminal to act as switch contacts that remain open when  
the unit is powered off or in a failure state.  
2
3
Common  
Common is a fail-safe relay connection. Use this terminal in  
conjunction with the Normally Open or Normally Closed terminals.  
Normally  
Closed  
Normally Closed is a fail-safe relay connection. Use this with the  
Common terminal to act as switch contacts that remain closed  
when the unit is powered off or in a failure state.  
4
5
6
E
+ / L  
- / N  
+ / L is connected to the positive (+) input for DC sources or to the  
Live input for AC sources. Use with partner terminal -/N.  
- / N is connected to the negative (-) input for DC sources or to the  
Neutral input for AC sources. Use with partner terminal +/L.  
Chassis Ground Chassis Ground must be connected to "Equipment Ground" for DC  
installations or "Safety Ground" for AC installations.  
Earth Ground  
Earth Ground is a connection to the chassis that can be used for  
earth bonding.  
NOTES:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
For terminal# 1 through 6, the use of ring terminals size #6 (M3.5) is recommended using stranded wire size AWG  
18-14. Tighten all screws to a torque of 12 Lb-in (1.36 Nm).  
For terminal# E, the use of ring terminal size #8 (M4) is recommended using stranded wire size AWG 18-14.  
Tighten screw to a torque of 12 Lb-in (1.36 Nm).  
Use the “Chassis Ground” terminal connection for grounding the unit. “Earth Ground” should be used as secondary  
grounding source only.  
Be sure to replace the clear plastic electrical safety shield before applying power to the unit.  
Hardware and Connectivity 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Powering Up the IOLAN  
Wiring up a DHV unit  
Terminal # Description  
Usage  
1
Normally Open Normally Open is a fail-safe relay connection. Use this with the  
Common terminal to act as switch contacts that remain open when  
the unit is powered off or in a failure state.  
2
3
Common  
Common is a fail-safe relay connection. Use this terminal in  
conjunction with the Normally Open or Normally Closed terminals.  
Normally  
Closed  
Normally Closed is a fail-safe relay connection. Use this with the  
Common terminal to act as switch contacts that remain closed  
when the unit is powered off or in a failure state.  
4
5
Chassis Ground Chassis Ground must be connected to "Equipment Ground" for DC  
installations or "Safety Ground" for AC installations.  
+ / L (source 1) + / L (Source 1) is connected to the positive (+) input for DC  
sources or to the Live input for AC sources. Use with partner  
terminal -/N(Source 1).  
6
7
8
E
- / N(source 1) - / N (Source 1) is connected to the negative (-) input for DC  
sources or to the Neutral input for AC sources. Use with partner  
terminal +/L(Source 1).  
+ / L (source 2) + / L (Source 2) is connected to the positive (+) input for DC  
sources or to the Live input for AC sources. Use with partner  
terminal -/N(Source 2).  
- / N(source 2) - / N (Source 2) is connected to the negative (-) input for DC  
sources or to the Neutral input for AC sources. Use with partner  
terminal +/L(Source 2).  
Earth Ground  
Earth Ground is a connection to the chassis that can be used for  
earth bonding.  
NOTES:  
48  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Powering Up the IOLAN  
1. For terminal# 1 through 8, the use of ring terminals size #6 (M3.5) is recommended using stranded wire size AWG  
18-14. Tighten all screws to a torque of 12 Lb-in (1.36 Nm).  
2. For terminal# E, the use of ring terminal size #8 (M4) is recommended using stranded wire size AWG 18-14. Tighten  
screw to a torque of 12 Lb-in (1.36 Nm).  
3.  
Use the “Chassis Ground” terminal connection for grounding the unit. “Earth Ground” should be used as secondary  
grounding source only.  
4. Be sure to replace the clear plastic electrical safety shield before applying power to the unit.  
Wiring up a the Fail-Safe Relay  
The Electric Utility series of IOLAN units are also fashioned with a Fail-Safe Relay. The relay is engaged  
after the unit is powered up and the software has loaded properly. Should a failure occur, the relay will be  
disengaged until the unit returns to a normal state of operation. A failure is defined as a condition which  
causes the unit to stop running.  
A SPDT set of contacts are provided to the user. These three contact connections are known as "Common",  
"Normally Open" and "Normally Closed", and are electrically isolated to the relay. The contacts are rated for  
voltages up to 30V DC /AC with a maximum current of 3A.  
Hardware and Connectivity 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Powering Up the IOLAN  
50  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Methods  
Chapter  
3
3
Introduction  
This chapter provides information about the different methods you can use to configure the IOLAN.  
Before you can configure the IOLAN, you must assign an IP address to the IOLAN. See the Chapter  
4, Getting Started on page 73 to find out how to assign an IP address to the IOLAN.  
Once an IP address is assigned to the IOLAN, you can use any of the configuration methods to:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Configure users.  
Configure IOLAN server parameters.  
Configure serial port parameters.  
Configure network parameters.  
Configure time parameters.  
Reboot the IOLAN.  
Manage the Perle Remote Power Switch (when applicable).  
Manage I/O channels (when applicable).  
View statistics while connected to the IOLAN.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuration Methods Overview  
Configuration Methods Overview  
Some of the IOLAN configuration methods have the capability of configuring an IP address, which is  
the first required configuration step for a new IOLAN. Once the IOLAN has been assigned an IP  
address, any of the configuration methods can be used to configure the IOLAN.  
Configures an IP Address  
Following is a list of methods for setting the IOLAN IP address and a short explanation of when you  
would want to use that method:  
z
Easy Config Wizard—The Easy Config Wizard is available from the CD ROM included with  
your IOLAN. You can use the Easy Config Wizard to set the IOLAN’s IP address and configure  
serial ports. This configuration method would typically be used when:  
z
z
z
z
All ports are to have the same configuration.  
Only the most commonly used profiles are required.  
Straightforward application with no advanced functionality required.  
Easy Config is installed on a Windows-based PC with local network access to the IOLAN.  
z
DeviceManager—Use this method when you can connect the IOLAN to the network and access  
the IOLAN from a Windows PC. The DeviceManager is a Windows-based application that can  
®
be used for IOLAN configuration and management. The DeviceManager can be used to assign  
an IP address and perform the complete configuration and management of the IOLAN.  
z
z
Direct Connection—Use this method when you can connect to the IOLAN from a serial  
terminal or from a computer running terminal emulation software over a serial port. Using this  
method, you will need to configure and/or manage the IOLAN using either the Menu or CLI.  
DHCP/BOOTP—Use this method when you have a BOOTP or DHCP server running and you  
can connect the IOLAN to your network. The IOLAN will automatically obtain an IP address  
from a local network DHCP/BOOTP server when this service is enabled (it is disabled by  
default). You can also configure certain IOLAN parameters that will be passed from the  
DHCP/BOOTP server to the IOLAN when it boots up. Other configurators such as  
DeviceManager, CLI, or Menu can be used to set this option, and obtain the initial IP address.  
z
z
ARP-Ping—Use this method when you can connect the IOLAN to the network and want to  
assign a temporary IP address to the IOLAN by specifying an ARP entry from your PC and then  
pinging it.  
IPv6 Network—When the IOLAN is connected to an IPv6 network, its local link address is  
determined using stateless auto configuration.  
Once an IP address has been assigned to the IOLAN, in most cases, you can continue to use the same  
method if it is a configurator or you can switch to any other configuration method.  
Requires a Configured IP Address  
The following configuration methods require that an IP address already be assigned to the IOLAN.  
z
z
WebManager—WebManager is a fully functional, browser-based configuration method.  
IOLAN+ Interface—The IOLAN+ interface is available on IOLAN models that are 1-16 ports  
(this is not supported on DS1, TS2, and medical unit models) and uses the interface that is  
available on the IOLAN+ product line.  
52  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Easy Config Wizard  
Easy Config Wizard  
The Easy Config Wizard is a configuration wizard that will configure all the serial ports on your  
IOLAN to one of the following:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Console Management  
TruePort (Virtual COM Port)  
TCP Sockets (Raw TCP)  
Terminal  
Printer (not supported on DS1/TS2 models)  
Serial Tunneling  
You can launch the Easy Config Wizard from the Perle website or from the installation CD-ROM.  
The Easy Config Wizard has been designed to walk you through the configuration process for any of  
the available configuration options shown on the Welcome window.  
Configuration Methods 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DeviceManager  
DeviceManager  
Overview  
The DeviceManager is a Windows-based application that can be used to connect to the IOLAN to  
actively manage and configure it or can create new IOLAN configurations offline. See Chapter 5,  
Using DeviceManager and WebManager on page 83 for information on configuring/managing the  
IOLAN with DeviceManager.  
Access Platforms  
The DeviceManager can be run from Windows 98/NT/2000/ME/Server 2003/XP/Server 2008/Vista.  
DeviceManager can be installed from the product CD-ROM or downloaded from the Perle website.  
Unless the IOLAN has already been configured with a Gateway, DeviceManager can only access  
IOLANs in the local subnet. The DeviceManager can be accessed by only the admin user.  
Features  
DeviceManager supports the following features:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
The ability to download the same configuration file to several IOLANs in one operation.  
The ability to save a configuration file locally in text format, in addition to the binary format.  
The ability to create a configuration file without being connected to the IOLAN.  
The ability to open a session to the IOLAN and download a (saved) configuration file to it.  
The ability to download/upload keys/certificates to/from the IOLAN.  
The ability to download custom files, such as new terminal definitions and a custom language  
files to the IOLAN.  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using DeviceManager  
Before you can use DeviceManager, you need to install it on your Windows operating system from  
the IOLAN CD-ROM or you can download it from the Perle website. After the DeviceManager  
application is installed, click Start, All Programs, Perle, DeviceManager, DeviceManager to start  
the application. When you launch the DeviceManager, it will scan the network for IOLANs:  
54  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DeviceManager  
All discovered IOLANs will be displayed on the list along with their name and IP address. When a  
new IOLAN is discovered on the network, that has not yet been assigned an IP address, it will be  
displayed with an IP Address of Not Configured. To configure the IP address, click on the IOLAN  
and then click the Assign IP button.  
Choose the method you want to use to assign an IP address to the IOLAN:  
z
z
Type in the IP address that you want to assign to this IOLAN.  
Enable the Have the IOLAN automatically get a temporary IP Address option. This will turn  
on DHCP/BOOTP, so the IOLAN will attempt to get its IP address from your DHCP/BOOTP  
server. If you don’t have a DHCP/BOOTP server, DeviceManager will temporarily assign an IP  
address in the range of 169.254.0.1-169.254.255.255that will be used only for the duration  
of the DeviceManager/IOLAN communication.  
After you configure the IP address, click the Assign IP button.  
The refreshed list will now display the assigned IP address for the new IOLAN. To connect to the  
IOLAN, click the IOLAN entry and click OK. You will be asked to supply the Admin password (the  
factory default password is superuser).  
If you have a successful connection, the DeviceManager will retrieve the configuration and then  
display the IOLAN’s System Information and you can begin configuring the IOLAN.  
The DeviceManager does not automatically update the IOLAN’s configuration. You must  
download the configuration changes to the IOLAN and then reboot the IOLAN to make the  
configuration changes take effect.  
Configuration Methods 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DeviceManager  
Using DeviceManager  
After you have successfully connected to the IOLAN, DeviceManager displays the following  
window:  
Menu/Quick Access Buttons  
Navigation  
Tree  
Display Area  
Download Button  
Navigating the Options  
The left-hand navigation tree allows you to quickly and easily navigate the various Configuration and  
Statistics pages of DeviceManager. Further navigation is available in the form of buttons and tabs in  
the display area of DeviceManager, depending on where you are in the navigation tree, as shown in  
the below.  
Notice that when you expand a parent node in the tree (e.g., Serial), the tree displays the same  
options that appear as buttons in the display area, as shown below. This gives you the choice of using  
the navigation tree or buttons to navigate the options.  
56  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
WebManager  
Downloading the Configuration  
When you have completed all your configuration changes, click the Download All Changes button  
to download the configuration to the IOLAN. You must reboot the IOLAN for your configuration  
changes to take effect.  
WebManager  
Overview  
The WebManager is a web browser-based method of configuring/managing the IOLAN. It follows  
the same design as the DeviceManager, so it is easy to switch between the WebManager and  
DeviceManager when configuring your IOLAN. See Chapter 5, Using DeviceManager and  
WebManager on page 83 for information on configuring/managing the IOLAN with DeviceManager.  
Access Platforms  
You can access the IOLAN through WebManager from any system that can run a web browser.  
WebManager can be accessed by the admin user or any user who has Admin Level privileges.  
Features  
WebManager supports the following features:  
z
z
z
z
The ability to open a session to the IOLAN and download a (saved) configuration file to it.  
The ability to save a configuration file locally in text format, in addition to the binary format.  
The ability to download/upload keys/certificates to/from the IOLAN.  
The ability to download custom files, such as new terminal definitions and a custom language  
files to the IOLAN.  
z
From WebManager, you can launch EasyPort Web, which can be used to:  
z
z
access clustered IOLANs  
access ports configured with the Console Server profile and launch an SSH or Telnet session  
to those console ports  
z
exercise power management capability (when using the Perle Remote Power Switch)  
Configuration Methods 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
WebManager  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using WebManager  
Before you can connect to the IOLAN using WebManager, the IOLAN must already be configured  
with a known IP address; see Setting Up the Network on page 75 to configure an IP address on your  
IOLAN.  
To connect to the IOLAN through the WebManager:  
1. Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the IOLAN that you want to  
manage/configure and press Enter; for example: http://123.123.123.123.  
2. If you successfully connect to the IOLAN, a login screen will appear.  
3. If you are accessing the IOLAN in non-secure HTTP, just type in the Admin password (the  
factory default password is superuser) If the IOLAN has already been configured for secure  
access mode (HTTPS), select the For a Secure Login Click Here link and then type in the  
Admin password.  
The secure HTTP (HTTPS) mode requires that the SSL Passphrase is already defined  
in the IOLAN configuration and the SSL/TLS certificate/private key and CA list must  
have already been downloaded to the IOLAN; see Keys and Certificates on page 242 for  
more information.  
58  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WebManager  
Using WebManager  
After you have successfully logged into WebManager, you will see the following:  
Navigation  
Tree  
System  
Information  
You navigate through the different configuration windows by selecting an option in the left-hand  
navigation tree. When you click on an option that is under a folder, more navigation options are  
displayed:  
Navigation Tabs  
The Network folder contains two configuration options, IP Address and Advanced. Notice that  
when the IP Address option is selected, there are more navigation options in the form of the tabs, IP  
Settings and Advanced.  
Remember that in the WebManager, it is necessary to press the Apply button to save your changes.  
Configuration Methods 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
Command Line Interface  
Overview  
The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a command line option for IOLAN configuration/management.  
See the Command Line Interface Reference Guide for a full breakdown of all the CLI commands and  
their functionality.  
Access Platforms  
The CLI is accessed by any application that supports a Telnet or SSH session to the IOLAN’s IP  
address, such as Putty, SecureCRT, or from a command prompt. You can also access the CLI from a  
dumb terminal or PC connected to a serial port.  
Features  
The CLI supports the following features:  
z
z
z
z
You can access the IOLAN from any application that supports Telnet or SSH.  
The ability to clear the ARP table (cache).  
The ability to save a configuration file locally in text format, in addition to the binary format.  
For existing IOLAN+ customers, the native IOLAN+ CLI to be used by entering the iolan+  
command. See your IOLAN User’s Guide for information on using the IOLAN+ CLI.  
The IOLAN+ CLI is not supported on IOLAN models with more than 16 ports or the  
DS1/TS2 and medical unit models.  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using the CLI  
There are two ways you can access the IOLAN, through the network (Ethernet connection) or  
through the serial connection. If you are accessing the IOLAN through the network, the IOLAN must  
already have a known IP address configured; see Using a Direct Serial Connection to Specify an IP  
Address on page 76 for information on configuring an IP address.  
Through the Network  
To connect to the IOLAN through the network to configure/manage it using the CLI, do the  
following:  
1. Start a Telnet or SSH session to the IOLAN’s IP address; for example:  
telnet 10.10.201.100  
2. You will get a Login: prompt. You can login as the admin user or as a user with Admin Level  
rights. If the login is successful, you will get a prompt that displays the IOLAN model and  
number of ports:  
Login: admin  
Password:  
SDS2#  
You will see a prompt that displays the model and number of the IOLAN. You are now ready to  
start configuring/managing your IOLAN using the CLI.  
60  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Menu  
Through the Serial Port  
To connect to the IOLAN through the serial port to configure/manage it using the CLI (or Menu), see  
Using a Direct Serial Connection to Specify an IP Address on page 76.  
After you have established a connection to the IOLAN, you will get a Login: prompt. You can login  
as the admin user or as a user with Admin Level rights. If the login is successful, you will get a  
prompt that displays the IOLAN model and number of ports:  
Login: admin  
Password:  
SDS2#  
You will see a prompt that displays the model and number of the IOLAN. You are now ready to start  
configuring/managing your IOLAN using the CLI  
Using the CLI  
After you have successfully logged in, you can start configuring/managing the IOLAN by typing in  
commands at the prompt. If you are not sure what commands are available, you can type a ?  
(question mark) at any time during a command to see your options.  
See the Command Line Interface Reference Guide for more information about the CLI.  
Menu  
Overview  
The Menu is a graphical representation of the CLI. You can look up Menu parameter explanations in  
the Command Line Interface Reference Guide. The only operations that the Menu does not support  
are the downloading and uploading of files to/from the IOLAN.  
Access Platforms  
The Menu is accessed by any application that supports a Telnet or SSH session to the IOLAN’s  
IP address, such as Putty, SecureCRT, or from a command prompt. You can also access the Menu  
from a dumb terminal or PC connected to a serial port.  
Features  
The Menu supports the following features:  
z
z
You can access the IOLAN from any application that supports Telnet or SSH.  
For existing IOLAN+ customers, the native IOLAN+ menu interface can be used by entering the  
iolan+command to display and use the native IOLAN+ menu interface. See your IOLAN  
User’s Guide for information on using the IOLAN+ interface. See IOLAN+ Interface on page  
67 for more information about IOLAN+ interface.  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using the Menu  
To connect the IOLAN using the Menu, follow the directions for Connecting to the IOLAN Using  
the CLI on page 60.  
Configuration Methods 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Menu  
Using the Menu  
After you have successfully logged in, type screen at the prompt and press Enter. You will be asked  
to enter a terminal type, and then you will see the following Menu:  
To navigate through the Menu options, do the following:  
1. Highlight a Menu option by using the keyboard up and down arrows to navigate the list.  
2. When the Menu item you want to access is highlighted, press the Enter key to either get to the  
next list of options or to get the configuration screen, depending on what you select.  
3. When you are done configuring parameters in a screen, press the Enter key and then the Enter  
key again to Accept and exit the form.  
4. If you want to discard your changes, press the Esc key to exit a screen, at which point you will  
be prompted with Changes will be lost, proceed? (y/n), type yto discard your changes or nto  
return to the screen so you can press Enter to submit your changes.  
5. If there are a number of predefined options available for a field, you can scroll through those  
items by pressing the Space Bar or you can type l(lowercase L) to get a list of options, use the  
up/down arrows to highlight the option you want, and then press Enter to select it.  
62  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DHCP/BOOTP  
DHCP/BOOTP  
Overview  
Several IOLAN parameters can be configured through a DHCP/BOOTP server during the IOLAN  
bootup. This is particularly useful for configuring multiple IOLANs.  
Not all configuration parameters are supported in the DHCP/BOOTP configuration (see  
DHCP/BOOTP Parameters on page 64 for supported configuration parameters), so you will need to  
use another configuration method, such as DeviceManager, WebManager or CLI, to complete the  
configuration.  
Features  
DHCP/BOOTP supports the following features:  
z
z
DHCP/BOOTP can supply the IOLAN’s IP address.  
The DHCP/BOOTP server can configure certain server and user configuration parameters when  
the IOLAN is booted.  
z
z
z
The DHCP/BOOTP server can auto-configure the IOLAN with basic setup information (IP  
address, subnet/prefix bits, etc.).  
The DHCP/BOOTP server can download a new version of firmware when the IOLAN is  
rebooted.  
The DHCP/BOOTP server can download a full configuration file when the IOLAN is rebooted.  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using DHCP/BOOTP  
The IOLAN will automatically request an IP address from the DCHP/BOOTP server when the  
Obtain IP address automatically using DHCP/BOOTP parameter is enabled. To enable the Obtain  
IP address automatically using DHCP/BOOTP parameter, follow the directions in Using a Direct  
Serial Connection to Enable BOOTP/DHCP on page 77.  
Using DHCP/BOOTP  
To use DHCP/BOOTP, edit the bootp file with IOLAN configuration parameters. You can use  
DHCP/BOOTP to perform the following actions on a single or multiple IOLANs on bootup:  
z
z
z
z
auto-configure with minimal information; for example, only an IP address  
auto-configure with basic setup information (IP address, subnet/prefix bits, etc.)  
download a new version of firmware  
download a full configuration file  
DHCP/BOOTP is particularly useful for multiple installations: you can do all the IOLANs’  
configuration in one DHCP/BOOTP file, rather than configure each IOLAN manually. Another  
advantage of DHCP/BOOTP is that you can connect the IOLAN to the network, turn on its power  
and let autoconfiguration take place. All the configuration is carried out for you during the  
DHCP/BOOTP process.  
Configuration Methods 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DHCP/BOOTP  
DHCP/BOOTP Parameters  
The following parameters can be set in the DHCP/BOOTP bootp file:  
z
z
z
z
SW_FILE—The full path, pre-fixed by hostname/IP address (IPv4 or IPv6), and file name of the  
firmware update.  
CONFIG_FILE—The full path, pre-fixed by hostname/IP address (IPv4 or IPv6), and file name  
of the configuration file.  
GUI_ACCESS—Access to the IOLAN from the HTTP or HTTPS WebManager. Values are on  
or off.  
AUTH_TYPE—The authentication method(s) employed by the IOLAN for all users. You can  
specify the primary and secondary authentication servers, separated by a comma. This uses the  
following numeric values for the authentication methods.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0—None (only valid for secondary authentication)  
1—Local  
2—RADIUS  
3—Kerberos  
4—LDAP  
5—TACACS+  
6—SECURID  
7—NIS  
z
z
z
z
SECURITY—Restricts IOLAN access to devices listed in the IOLAN’s host table. Values are  
yesor no.  
TFTP_RETRY—The number of TFTP retries before aborting. This is a numeric value, for  
example, 5.  
TFTP_TMOUT—The time, in seconds, before retrying a TFTP download/upload. This is a  
numeric value, for example, 3.  
CUSTOM_LANG—The full path, pre-fixed by a hostname/IP address (IPv4 or IPv6), and file  
name of a translated language file. For example,  
192.101.34.211 /accounting/Iolan_ds_german.txt.  
z
EXTRA_TERM1—(EXTRA_TERM2, EXTRA_TERM3) The full path, pre-fixed by a  
hostname/IP address (IPv4 or IPv6), and file name of a termcap file for a specific terminal type.  
64  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SNMP  
SNMP  
Overview  
The IOLAN supports configuration and management through SNMP. SNMP Management tools  
(SNMP client/MIB browser software) can be used to set IOLAN configuration parameters and/or  
view IOLAN statistics.  
Before you can configure/manage the IOLAN using SNMP, you need to set the IOLAN IP address  
and configure a read-write user for SNMP version 3 or a community for SNMP version 1 or 2. You  
can use DeviceManager, CLI, or the Menu to set the IP address and user/community (don’t forget to  
reboot the IOLAN before connecting with the SNMP manager to make your changes take effect).  
Access Platforms  
You can access the IOLAN SNMP MIB from any system that runs your SNMP client/MIB browser  
software.  
Features  
SNMP supports the following features:  
z
z
You can configure SNMP traps.  
Since not all versions of SNMP support secure communication, password parameters must be set  
using another configuration method.  
Connecting to the IOLAN Using SNMP  
Before you can connect to the IOLAN through an SNMP Management tool or MIB browser, you  
need to set the following components through another configuration method.  
1. Configure a known IP address on the IOLAN.  
2. Configure a read-write user for SNMP version 3 or a community for SNMP version 1 or 2 on the  
IOLAN.  
3. Reboot the IOLAN to make sure the changes take effect.  
To connect to the IOLAN through an SNMP Management tool or MIB browser, do the following:  
1. Load the perle-sds.MIBfile from the IOLAN CD-ROM or Perle website into your SNMP  
manager (this MIB works for all SDS, SCS, STS, and MDC models).  
You need to have the following MIBs installed in your SNMP manager (these are  
usually part of the standard SNMP client/MIB browser):  
z
z
z
SNMPv2-SMI  
SNMPv2-TC  
IPV6-TC  
2. Verify that the read-write user for SNMP version 3 or a community for SNMP version 1 or 2  
match the configuration on the IOLAN.  
3. Type in the IOLAN’s IP address and connect to the IOLAN.  
You are now ready to start configuring the IOLAN using SNMP.  
Configuration Methods 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
SNMP  
Using the SNMP MIB  
After you have successfully connected to the IOLAN through your SNMP Management tool or MIB  
browser, expand the PERLE-IOLAN-SDS-MIB folder to see the IOLAN’s parameter folders. Below is  
an example of the configurable parameters under the ServicesInfo folder.  
The first variable in each folder is the Status variable, for example, serviceStatus. When you  
perform a GETon this variable, one of the following values will be returned:  
z
z
1—Indicates that the container folder is active with no changes.  
2—Indicates that the container folder is active with change(s).  
Once you have completed setting the variables in a folder, you will want to submit your changes to  
the IOLAN. To do this, set the Status variable to 4. If you want to discard the changes, set the Status  
variable to 6.  
z
z
4—Indicates that the changes in the container folder are to be submitted to the IOLAN.  
6—Indicates that the changes in the container folder are to be discarded.  
If you want to save all the changes that have been submitted to the IOLAN, you need to expand the  
adminInfo container folder and SETthe adminFunction to 1 to write to FLASH. To make the  
configuration changes take effect, SETthe adminFunction to 3 to reboot the IOLAN.  
66  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IOLAN+ Interface  
IOLAN+ Interface  
Overview  
For environments that have both IOLAN and IOLAN+ models or for users who prefer to configure  
using the IOLAN+ Menu or CLI, the IOLAN+ user interface is available. The IOLAN+ interface is  
supported on all IOLAN SDS, SCS, and STS models up to and including 16 serial ports.  
Access Platforms  
The Menu is accessed by any application that supports a Telnet or SSH session to the IOLAN’s  
IP address, such as Putty, SecureCRT, or from a command prompt. You can also access the Menu  
from a dumb terminal or PC connected to a serial port.  
Connecting to the IOLAN to Use the IOLAN+ Interface  
To connect the IOLAN to using the IOLAN+ interface, follow the directions for Connecting to the  
IOLAN Using the CLI on page 60.  
Using the IOLAN+ Interface  
After you have successfully logged in to the IOLAN, you can type iolan+at the CLI command  
prompt to access the IOLAN+ configuration menu (you must have User Level Normal or Admin).  
The IOLAN and the IOLAN+ admin user share the same password. The default admin  
password is superuser(not iolan).  
If you choose to use the IOLAN+ configuration interface, you should always configure the IOLAN  
using the IOLAN+ interface. The IOLAN/IOLAN+ fields do not map directly between the two  
interfaces. If you configure a field in the IOLAN configuration interface to a value that is invalid in  
the IOLAN+ interface and then attempt to use the IOLAN+ interface, the invalid field value will  
show up as ****** (all asterisks), although the IOLAN will interpret the value as valid.  
Configuration Methods 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IOLAN+ Interface  
Changes to the IOLAN+ Interface  
You should be aware that the following IOLAN+ configuration fields are no longer supported:  
z
You no longer have the option of selecting access, Authentication/Logging. Also, kill, reboot,  
and stats are not available.  
z
When you select port, the following fields are not available on the Port Setup Menu:  
** Administrator **  
Hardware  
PORT SETUP MENU  
Flow ctrl  
REMOTE-ADMIN  
Keys  
Speed  
[9600 ]  
Flow ctrl  
[None  
]
Hot [^A] Intr [^C]  
Quit [^]] Kill [^\]  
Del [^H] Sess N/A  
Echo [^E]  
Parity  
[None ]  
[8]  
Input Flow [Enabled ]  
Output Flow [Enabled ]  
Bit  
Stop  
Break  
[1 ]  
[Disabled] IP Addresses  
Monitor DSR  
Monitor DCD  
Interface  
[No ]  
[No ]  
Src [  
Dst [  
]
]
Mask [  
]
[EIA-232]  
Access  
Access  
User  
Name [abcd  
Options  
Keepalive  
[Local ]  
N/A  
]
[No ]  
N/A  
UDP Retries  
Terminal type [dumb ]  
Rlogin/Telnet  
Debug options  
Retry Interval  
Authentication  
Mode  
N/A  
N/A  
TERM [  
]
[5]  
[CLI ]  
[No ]  
N/A  
Video pages  
CLI/Menu  
Map CR to CR LF [No ]  
[Raw ]  
Hex data  
Secure  
MOTD  
N/A  
N/A  
Connection [None  
Host [  
]
Reset Term  
]
]
[Yes ]  
Remote Port  
Local Port  
[0  
[10001]  
________________________________________________________________________________  
z
User, Name—only when using LPD/LPR, Name no longer is used as the queue name  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Options, Rlogin/Telnet  
Options, Debug options  
Options, Hex data  
Options, Secure  
Keys, Sess  
Access, UDP Retries  
Access, Retry Interval  
Access, Authentication  
68  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IOLAN+ Interface  
z
When you select line, Access, the following fields are not available on the Access Menu:  
** Administrator **  
TTY Name  
ACCESS MENU  
REMOTE-ADMIN  
Access  
Authentication Mode  
UDP Retries Interval  
1 [abcd  
] [Local ] N/A  
] [Local ] N/A  
[Raw ]  
[Raw ]  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
2 [abcdef  
________________________________________________________________________________  
z
Authentication  
UDP Retries  
Interval  
z
z
z
When you select line, Options, the following fields are not available on the Options Menu:  
** Administrator **  
TTY Opt CR  
OPTIONS MENU  
REMOTE-ADMIN  
HEX  
Rlogin/Telnet Keepalive  
1
2
N/A [No ] N/A  
N/A [No ] N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
[No ]  
[No ]  
________________________________________________________________________________  
z
Opt  
z
z
HEX  
Rlogin/Telnet  
Configuration Methods 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IOLAN+ Interface  
z
When you select access, Remote access sites., the following fields are not available on the  
Remote Access Systems Screen:  
** Administrator **  
REMOTE ACCESS SYSTEMS SCREEN  
REMOTE-ADMIN  
Sitename  
User name  
Password  
[
[
[
]
]
]
Device type (  
)
Service type N/A  
Inactivity  
N/A  
Phone number [  
Login-script N/A  
]
________________________________________________________________________________  
z
Service type  
Inactivity  
z
z
Login-script  
z
When you select access, Remote site devices., the following fields are not available on the  
Remote Site Device Screen:  
** Administrator **  
REMOTE SITE DEVICES SCREEN  
]
REMOTE-ADMIN  
Type  
[
IP Addresses  
Src Addr  
Dst Addr  
N/A  
N/A  
Modem  
Config  
[
N/A  
N/A  
]
Dial Comm  
Hang Up  
PPP Configuration  
Dialer Configuration  
Dial Timeout [45]  
Dial Retries [2 ]  
Restart timer [3 ]  
Max Retries  
Inactivity  
[10]  
[0  
]
________________________________________________________________________________  
z
IP Address, Src Address  
IP Address, Dst Address  
Modem, Dial Comm  
Modem, Hang Up  
z
z
z
70  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IOLAN+ Interface  
When you select server, the following fields are not available on the Server Configuration menu:  
** Administrator **  
SERVER CONFIGURATION  
REMOTE-ADMIN  
N/A  
Name  
IP address  
Subnet mask  
[wchiewsds2  
[172.16.22.7  
[255.255.0.0  
]
Debug mode  
]
]
Ethernet address (00:80:d4:88:88:88)  
Ethernet speed [AUTO  
]
]
Language  
Identification  
Lock  
[English ]  
[
[Disabled]  
Password limit  
CR to initiate  
SNAP encoding  
Boot host  
[3 ]  
N/A  
N/A  
[
] Boot diagnostics  
N/A  
N/A  
Boot file  
[
]
Init file  
MOTD file  
Domain name  
Name server  
WINS server  
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]
]
NS Port  
[
________________________________________________________________________________  
z
Debug mode  
CR to initiate  
SNAP encoding  
Boot diagnostics  
NS Port  
z
z
z
z
A new parameter was added, Interface, to the to Port Setup Menu, to specify whether you are setting  
up the serial line as a EIA-232 or EIA-422 line.  
Configuration Methods 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IOLAN+ Interface  
72  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Chapter  
4
4
Introduction  
There are several different configuration methods available to configure the IOLAN (see Chapter 3,  
Configuration Methods on page 51 for more information). This chapter describes the three main  
minimal configuration requirements for the IOLAN through either Easy Config Wizard (cannot  
configure users using this method), DeviceManager, or WebManager:  
If you are setting up the IOLAN medical unit (MDC) model, you must first install the latest  
firmware to take advantage of the full feature set available with the MDC model. The latest  
firmware can be found either on the CD-ROM that came with the IOLAN or on the Perle  
website, www.perle.com/downloads(when you access the webpage, select your specific  
IOLAN model). See Downloading IOLAN Firmware on page 323 for information on how  
to download the latest IOLAN firmware.  
1. Setting up the network—This minimally consists of configuring an IP address or enabling  
DHCP/BOOTP. Once the IOLAN has an IP address, you can use any configuration method.  
2. Setting up the serial ports—You will want to select the serial port profile that matches the serial  
port requirement/scenario for your serial device.  
3. Setting up users—This is an optional step, which is only required when your implementation  
requires users to access the IOLAN and you are not using external authentication.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Easy Configuration Wizard  
Easy Configuration Wizard  
The Easy Config Wizard quickly sets up the IOLAN’s network configuration and all serial ports to  
one of the following:  
z
z
z
Console Management—Allows users on the network to connect to a serial device that is  
connected to a serial port on the IOLAN.  
TruePort (Virtual COM Port)—Allows a networked system to communicate with your serial  
device through a virtual COM or TTY port, using the Perle TruePort software.  
TCP Sockets (Raw TCP)—Allows hosts on the network to communicate with a serial device  
that requires raw data throughput (such as a printer or card reader) connected to the IOLAN  
serial port.  
z
Terminal—Allows a terminal device to connect to a specified host on the network through a  
serial port on the IOLAN.  
z
z
Printer—Allows hosts on the network to talk to a printer using LPD connected to the IOLAN.  
Serial Tunneling—Allows IOLANs on the network to establish a virtual link between their  
serial ports. Typically, one IOLAN’s serial port is configured as a Tunnel Server and the other  
IOLAN’s serial port is configured as a Tunnel Client.  
74  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up the Network  
Setting Up the Network  
The most important part of setting up the network is assigning an IP address to the IOLAN, whether  
this is a static IP address or enabling a DHCP/BOOTP-assigned IP address. You should also assign a  
name to the IOLAN, to make it easier to recognize. This section deals primarily with setting the IP  
address.  
Using DeviceManager  
To use the DeviceManager, you must first install it on a Windows operating system. The  
DeviceManager is able to automatically discover all IOLANs on your local network, even if they  
have not yet been assigned an IP address. If routers on the network have been setup to propagate  
multicasts, DeviceManager will also be able to discover IOLANs in other networks. The  
DeviceManager installation wizard can be found on the CD-ROM included in the IOLAN package.  
1. Connect the IOLAN to the network.  
2. Power on the IOLAN.  
3. From the CD-ROM that was included in the IOLAN packaging, select the DeviceManager link.  
4. Click on the link under Location and click Open to automatically start the DeviceManager  
installation.  
5. Install the DeviceManager by following the installation wizard. On the last window, check the  
Yes, I want to launch DeviceManager now. box and click the Finish button.  
6. When you launch the DeviceManager, it will automatically scan the local network and display  
any IOLANs that it can find.  
7. Any IOLAN that does not have an IP address will be displayed as Not Configured, with the  
Model and MAC Address to identify the IOLAN. Highlight the IOLAN that you want to assign  
an IP address to and click the Assign IP button.  
8. Choose the method you want to use to assign an IP address to the IOLAN:  
z
z
Type in the IP address that you want to assign to this IOLAN.  
Enable the Have the IOLAN automatically get a temporary IP address option. This will  
turn on DHCP/BOOTP, so the IOLAN will attempt to get its IP address from your  
DHCP/BOOTP server. If you don’t have a DHCP/BOOTP server, DeviceManager will  
temporarily assign an IP address in the range of 169.254.0.1-169.254.255.255that will  
be used only for the duration of the DeviceManager/IOLAN communication.  
Click the Assign IP button.  
9. You are now ready to configure the IOLAN. Double-click the IOLAN you just configured IP  
address for to open a configuration session. Type superuser(the factory default Admin user  
password) in the Login window and click OK.  
10. Expand the Server Configuration folder and select Server. Verify the IP address configuration.  
You should also enter a name in the Server Name field to make the IOLAN easily identifiable.  
11. To make your edits take effect, you need to download the new configuration file and then reboot  
the IOLAN. Download the configuration file to the IOLAN by selecting Tools, Download  
Configuration to Unit or click the Download All Changes button.  
12. Reboot the IOLAN by selecting Tools, Reboot Server or click the Reboot IOLAN button.  
For more information on configuring the IOLAN using DeviceManager, see Chapter 5, Using  
DeviceManager and WebManager on page 83.  
Getting Started 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting Up the Network  
Using WebManager  
To use the WebManager as your configurator, you must first assign an IP address to the IOLAN. You  
can use the Easy Config Wizard to assign an IP address to the IOLAN or any of the other methods  
described in this section. Once the IP address is assigned to the IOLAN, simply type the IP address  
into the Address field of your web browser and press the Enter key.  
Using a Direct Serial Connection to Specify an IP Address  
You can connect to the IOLAN’s serial console port using a PC with a terminal emulation package,  
such as HyperTerminal or a terminal.  
This procedure does not apply to IOLAN medical unit models.  
1. Connect the IOLAN to your PC or dumb terminal. Make sure the DIP switch is in Console mode  
(for desktop models, this sets the IOLAN serial port 1 to EIA-232) or that you are connected to  
the dedicated Console port (for rack mount models). When connecting a terminal or PC directly  
(without modems), the EIA-232 signals need to be crossed over (‘null modem’ cable). See  
Appendix D, EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams on page 371 for cabling diagrams.  
2. Using a PC emulation application, such as HyperTerminal, or from a dumb terminal, set the Port  
settings to 9600 Baud, 8 Data bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bits, and No Hardware Flow control to  
connect to the IOLAN. You can change these settings for future connections on the rack mount  
models (the IOLAN must be rebooted for these changes to take place).  
3. When prompted, type adminfor the User and superuserfor the Password. You should now see  
the a prompt that displays the model type and port number; for example, SCS16#.  
4. You are now logged into the IOLAN and can set the IP address by typing from the command line  
using the Command Line Interface (CLI).  
For single Ethernet connection models, type:  
set server internet <ipv4address>  
For dual Ethernet connection (SCS) models, type:  
set server internet eth1 <ipv4address>  
Where ipv4address is the IP Address being assigned to the IOLAN.  
5. Type the following command:  
save  
6. If you are going to use another configuration method, such as WebManager or DeviceManager,  
unplug a desktop IOLAN or turn Off a rack mount IOLAN. On a desktop IOLAN, change the  
DIP switch to Off Serial (DIP switch in the up position) and connect it to your serial device. Plug  
the IOLAN back in, automatically rebooting the IOLAN in the process.  
7. If you want to complete the configuration using a direct connection, see Command Line  
Interface on page 60 and/or Menu on page 61. After you complete configuring the IOLAN,  
unplug the IOLAN. If this is a desktop model, change the IOLAN DIP switch to Off Serial (DIP  
switch in the up position) and connect it to your serial device. Plug the IOLAN back in,  
automatically rebooting the IOLAN in the process.  
76  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting Up the Network  
Using a Direct Serial Connection to Enable BOOTP/DHCP  
If you are using BOOTP, you need to add an entry in the BOOTP server for the IOLAN that  
associates the MAC address (found on the back of the IOLAN) and the IP address that you want to  
assign to the IOLAN. After you have made the MAC address/IP address association for BOOTP, use  
the following directions for BOOTP or DHCP.  
You can connect to the IOLAN using a PC with a terminal emulation package, such as  
HyperTerminal or a dumb terminal.  
This procedure does not apply to IOLAN medical unit models.  
1. Connect the IOLAN to your PC or dumb terminal. Make sure the DIP switch is in Console mode  
(for desktop models, this sets the IOLAN serial port to EIA-232) or that you are connected to the  
dedicated Console port (for rack mount models). When connecting a terminal or PC directly  
(without modems), the EIA-232 signals need to be crossed over (‘null modem’ cable). See  
Appendix D, EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams on page 371 for cabling diagrams.  
2. Using a PC emulation application, such as HyperTerminal, or from a dumb terminal, set the Port  
settings to 9600 Baud, 8 Data bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bits, and No Hardware Flow control to  
connect to the IOLAN. You can change these settings for future connections on the rack mount  
models (the IOLAN must be rebooted for these changes to take place).  
3. When prompted, type adminfor the User and superuserfor the Password. You should now see  
the a prompt that displays the model type and port number; for example, SCS16#.  
4. You are now logged into the IOLAN and can set the IP address by typing from the command line  
using the Command Line Interface (CLI). Type the following command:  
set server internet dhcp/bootp on  
5. Type the following command:  
save  
6. Type the following command:  
reboot  
7. When the IOLAN reboots, it will automatically poll for an IP address from the DHCP/BOOTP  
server. If the IOLAN has dual Ethernet, each Ethernet connection will automatically be assigned  
an IP address, you can access the IOLAN through either IP address.  
8. To view the DHCP/BOOTP assigned IP address, type the following command:  
show interface ethernet  
If for some reason it cannot obtain an IP address from your DHCP/BOOTP server, you will have to  
either reconnect to the IOLAN on the console port and reboot it or push the RESET button to access  
the IOLAN.  
You are now ready to configure the IOLAN. See Chapter 3, Configuration Methods on page 51 for  
information on the different IOLAN configuration methods.  
Getting Started 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting Up the Network  
Using ARP-Ping  
You can use the ARP-Ping (Address Resolution Protocol) method to temporarily assign an IP address  
and connect to your IOLAN to assign a permanent IP address. To use ARP-Ping to temporarily assign  
an IP address:  
1. From a local UNIX/Linux host, type the following at the system command shell prompt:  
arp -s a.b.c.d aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff  
®
On a Windows 98 or newer system, type the following at the command prompt:  
arp -s a.b.c.d aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff  
(where a.b.c.dis the IPv4 address you want to temporarily assign to the IOLAN, and  
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ffis the Ethernet (MAC) address of IOLAN (found on the back of the unit).  
®
2. Whether you use UNIX or Windows , you are now ready to ping to the IOLAN. Here is a UNIX  
example of the sequence to use:  
arp -s 192.168.209.8 00:80:d4:00:33:4e  
ping 192.168.209.8  
From the ping command issued in step 2, the IOLAN will pickup and use the IP address entered into  
the ARP table in step 1. You are now ready to configure the IOLAN. See Chapter 3, Configuration  
Methods on page 51 for information on the different IOLAN configuration methods.  
For an IPv6 Network  
The IOLAN has a factory default link local IPv6 address based upon its MAC Address. For example,  
the link local address is:  
IOLAN MAC Address: 00-80-D4-AB-CD-EF  
Link Local Address: fe80::0280:D4ff:feAB:CDEF  
By default, the IOLAN will listen for IPV6 router advertisements to obtain additional IPV6  
addresses. No configuration is required, however, you can manually configure IPV6 addresses and  
network settings; see Chapter 6, Network Settings on page 91 for more information on IPv6  
configuration options.  
You are now ready to configure the IOLAN. See Chapter 3, Configuration Methods on page 51 for  
information on the different IOLAN configuration methods.  
78  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting Up the Serial Port(s)  
Setting Up the Serial Port(s)  
The DeviceManager and WebManager have the following serial port profiles that will simplify serial  
port setup:  
z
z
z
Console Management—The Console Management profile configures a serial port to provide  
network access to a console or administrative port. This profile sets up a serial port to support a  
TCP socket that listens for a Telnet or SSH connection from the network.  
TruePort—The TruePort profile configures a serial port to connect network servers or  
workstations running the TruePort software to a serial device as a virtual COM port. This profile  
is ideal for connecting multiple serial ports to a network system or server.  
TCP Sockets—The TCP Sockets profile configures a serial port to allow a serial device to  
communicate over a TCP network. The TCP connection can be configured to be initiated from  
the network, a serial device connected to the serial port, or both. This is sometimes referred to as  
a raw connection or a TCP raw connection.  
z
z
UDP Sockets—The UDP Sockets profile configures a serial port to allow communication  
between the network and serial devices connected to the IOLAN using the UDP protocol.  
Terminal—The Terminal profile configures a serial port to allow network access from a terminal  
connected to the IOLAN’s serial port. This profile is used to access predefined hosts on the  
network from the terminal.  
z
z
Printer—The Printer profile configures a serial port to support a serial printer that can be  
accessed by the network.  
Serial Tunneling—The Serial Tunneling profile configures a serial port to establish a virtual link  
over the network to a serial port on another IOLAN. Both IOLAN serial ports must be  
configured for Serial Tunneling (typically one serial port is configured as a Tunnel Server and  
the other serial port as a Tunnel Client).  
Getting Started 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up the Serial Port(s)  
z
Virtual Modem—The Virtual Modem (Vmodem) profile configures a serial port to simulate a  
modem. When the serial device connected to the IOLAN initiates a modem connection, the  
IOLAN starts up a TCP connection to another IOLAN configured with a Virtual Modem serial  
port or to a host running a TCP application.  
z
z
z
Control Signal I/O—The Control Signal I/O profile enables the use of the EIA-232 serial port  
signal pins to be used as assigned Digital Inputs or Digital Outputs.  
Modbus Gateway—The Modbus Gateway profile configures a serial port to act as a Modbus  
Master Gateway or a Modbus Slave Gateway.  
Power Management—The Power Management profile configures a serial port to communicate  
with a Remote Power Switch’s (RPS) administration port. This allows network access to the RPS  
and permits access to statistics and control of the RPS’s power plugs.  
z
z
z
Remote Access (PPP)—The Remote Access (PPP) profile configures a serial port to allow a  
remote user to establish a PPP connection to the IOLAN’s serial port. This is typically used with  
a modem for dial-in or dial-out access to the network.  
Remote Access (SLIP)—The Remote Access (SLIP) profile configures a serial port to allow a  
remote user to establish a SLIP connection to the IOLAN’s serial port. This is typically used with  
a modem for dial-in or dial-out access to the network.  
Custom Application/Plugin—The Custom Application/Plugin profile configures a serial port to  
run a custom application or IOLAN plugin. After you download the custom application files and  
specify the application name and any parameters you want to pass to it, the IOLAN will execute  
the application when the serial port is started.  
Each serial port profile contains all the parameters that are required to completely configure the serial  
port scenario represented by the profile.  
To select a serial port profile in the DeviceManager, connect through the DeviceManager to the  
IOLAN you are configuring and select Serial, Serial Ports in the navigation pane. Highlight the  
serial port you want to configure and then click Edit.  
When the default serial port profile Terminal displays, click the Change Profile button and select the  
appropriate profile for the serial port. See Chapter 7, Configuring Serial Ports on page 113 for more  
information on the serial port profiles and their configuration parameters.  
80  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Users  
Setting Up Users  
When you have a user who is accessing a device connected to a serial port from the network or who  
is accessing the network from a device connected to a serial port through the IOLAN, you can create  
a user account and configure the user’s access privileges. Notice that there is a Default user; the  
Default user’s parameters are inherited by users logging into the IOLAN who are being authenticated  
by an external authentication method (see Authentication on page 213 for more information) or are  
accessing the IOLAN as a Guest (see Local on page 215 for more information).  
To add a user account, click on the Users page in the navigation pane.  
Click the Add button to create a user account.  
To quickly add a user, fill out the field in the General tab and click OK.  
See Chapter 8, Configuring Users on page 201 for more information about the other user parameters  
you can configure.  
Getting Started 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Users  
82  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using DeviceManager  
and WebManager  
Chapter  
5
5
Introduction  
The DeviceManager and WebManager IOLAN managers have been designed to be very similar to  
use. DeviceManager is a Windows-based application and WebManager is a browser-based  
application. Both options use the IOLAN’s IP address to access the IOLAN; the DeviceManager can  
be used to assign an IP address to a new IOLAN and the WebManager requires that the IOLAN  
already have an IP address before it can be used to configure the IOLAN.  
When using WebManager, you are required to click the Apply button each time you make a change to  
a configuration window/tab. In DeviceManager, you must download your configuration changes to  
the IOLAN either periodically or after you are done with the configuration changes. From both  
managers you must reboot the IOLAN in order for you configuration changes to take effect.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Navigating DeviceManager/WebManager  
Navigating DeviceManager/WebManager  
The DeviceManager and WebManager have very similar navigation methods. The left-hand side of  
the manager is the navigation tree and the center is the configuration area. The DeviceManager has  
menu and quick access buttons, whereas the WebManager has system information and some  
navigation options on the far right-hand side.  
DeviceManager  
The DeviceManager has a navigation tree that you can use to access the available Configuration and  
Statistics pages in the display area. When you select an option in the navigation tree, you can often  
navigate the tabs or buttons in the display area to access the various configuration and statistics  
options. See Using DeviceManager on page 56 for more information on how to navigate the pages of  
DeviceManager.  
Menu/Quick Access Buttons  
Navigation Tree  
Display Area  
84  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Navigating DeviceManager/WebManager  
WebManager  
The WebManager uses a expandable/collapsible buttons with folders and pages for the navigation  
tree. You can expand the buttons to view the folders and pages to see the available configuration  
options. When you access a configuration page, you can often navigate the tabs in the configuration  
area to access all of the configuration options.  
Navigation  
Tree  
Configuration Area  
System Info/  
Navigation  
EasyPort Web  
WebManager also launches EasyPort Web, which is a browser-based management tool that can be  
used to manage clustered IOLANs, Remote Power Switches (RPSs), power plugs, and I/O channels  
(available only when an I/O model is accessed). EasyPort Web can also be launched by any user who  
can connect to the IOLAN through a web browser.  
Using DeviceManager and WebManager 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using DeviceManager to Connect to the IOLAN  
Using DeviceManager to Connect to the IOLAN  
DeviceManager can connect to existing IOLANs or assign an IP address to a new IOLAN. Whenever  
you connect to the IOLAN through the DeviceManager, you connect as the Admin user and must  
supply the password for the Admin user.  
Starting a New Session  
To start a new session and connect to the IOLAN using the DeviceManager:  
1. Start the DeviceManager by selecting Start, All Programs, Perle, DeviceManager,  
DeviceManager.  
2. When the DeviceManager starts, it searches the network for IOLANs.  
If you are not seeing IPv6 addresses in the list (you must expand the entry), see IPv6  
Issues on page 416 to find out how to install IPv6 support.  
If your IOLAN is not in the local network and you do not have a multicast enabled router in your  
network and therefore is not displayed in the selectable list, but can be pinged from your PC, you  
can add it to the selectable list by clicking the Add button.  
Click the Add button and type in the IOLAN’s IP address; this field supports IPv4 and IPv6  
addresses. Click the Close button when you have completed adding all the manual entries. Select  
the manually added server to connect to it.  
86  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using DeviceManager to Connect to the IOLAN  
Assigning a Temporary IP Address to a New IOLAN  
You can temporarily assign an IP address to the IOLAN that is connected to your local network  
segment, for the purpose of connecting to it and downloading a configuration file (containing a  
permanent IP address). To temporarily assign an IP address to the IOLAN, do the following:  
1. Click the Refresh button. The IOLAN will be displayed in the IP Address column as Not  
Configured.  
2. Select the new IOLAN and click the Assign IP button. The following window is displayed:  
Version 3.1 or lower  
Version 3.2 or higher  
3. Type a valid temporary IP address into the address field or, in version 3.2 or higher, enable the  
Have the IOLAN automatically get a temporary IP address. If you enable the temporary IP  
address, the IOLAN will enable DHCP/BOOTP on your IOLAN and attempt to get an IP address  
from the DHCP/BOOTP server (this will permanently enable DHCP/BOOTP in your IOLAN’s  
configuration, until you change it). If your network does not have a DHCP/BOOTP server, the  
IOLAN will temporarily assign an IP address in the range of 169.254.0.1-169.254.255.255  
(this IP address is only assigned for the duration of the DeviceManager/IOLAN connection).  
4. Click the Assign IP button.  
5. Double-click the IOLAN in the IOLAN List. If this is the first time you are accessing the  
IOLAN, type in the factory default Admin password, superuser, and click OK. The  
DeviceManager will display a window indicating that it is trying to authenticate and connect you  
on the IOLAN.  
6. If the authentication and connection are successful, the Server Info window is displayed. You are  
now ready to configure the IOLAN. If authentication was unsuccessful, try to connect to the  
IOLAN again; you probably mistyped the password for the Admin user.  
For more information about managing the IOLAN, see Configuration Files on page 89.  
Using DeviceManager and WebManager 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using DeviceManager to Connect to the IOLAN  
Adding/Deleting IOLANs Manually  
To permanently add/delete the IOLAN to/from the IOLAN List, click the Add button. The following  
window is displayed:  
To permanently add the IOLAN to the IOLAN list, click the Add button and type in the IPv4 or IPv6  
address of the IOLAN. To permanently delete the IOLAN from the IOLAN list, select the IOLAN’s  
IP address and click the Delete button.  
Logging in to the IOLAN  
To log in to the IOLAN, double-click on the IOLAN in the Device Server List. You will be prompted  
for the Admin Password (the default is superuser).  
If the authentication and connection are successful, the IOLAN’s Server Info window is displayed.  
If you cannot connect to the IOLAN, you can highlight the IOLAN and click the Ping button to  
verify that the DeviceManager can communicate with the IOLAN’s IP Address. If the ping times out,  
then you might need to set up a Gateway in your IOLAN or verify that your network is  
communicating correctly.  
88  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using WebManager to Connect to the IOLAN  
Using WebManager to Connect to the IOLAN  
WebManager can only connect to IOLANs that already have an assigned IP address. To connect to  
the IOLAN, type the IP address of the IOLAN into the Address field as such:  
http://10.10.234.34.  
You will see the login screen.  
Logging into the IOLAN  
Type in the Admin password in the Password field and click the Login button. A user who does not  
have admin privileges can access EasyPort Web to access clustered serial ports, Perle Remote Power  
Switches (RPS), and/or RPS plugs (must already be configured on this IOLAN) by typing their user  
name and password on the login screen.  
Configuration Files  
Creating a New IOLAN Configuration in DeviceManager  
In DeviceManager, when you select File, New, the New Configuration window is displayed.  
Select the IOLAN model for which you want to create a new configuration file. Any configuration  
file created in this manner can only be save locally. To download a created configuration file, you  
must first connect to the IOLAN, import the created configuration file into DeviceManager (this is  
not available in WebManager), and then download the configuration file to the IOLAN and reboot it.  
Using DeviceManager and WebManager 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Managing the IOLAN  
Opening an Existing Configuration File  
If you select the File, Open, a browse window is opened so you can select the configuration file you  
want to edit. IOLAN configuration files saved in the DeviceManager can be in the IOLAN-native  
binary format (.dme) or as a text file (.txt), which can be edited with a text editor. Either  
configuration version can be imported into the DeviceManager. IOLAN configuration files saved  
from WebManager can also be opened into DeviceManager.  
Importing an Existing Configuration File  
If you have a local, saved configuration file that you want to download to the IOLAN, you must first  
connect to the IOLAN that you want to download the configuration file to. Once you have  
successfully logged into the IOLAN, in DeviceManager select Tools, Import Configuration from a  
File and in WebManager select Administration, Restore/Backup. You need to download the file in  
DeviceManager and in both managers you need to reboot the IOLAN.  
Managing the IOLAN  
Most of the management tasks, such as setting the time/date, downloading keys/certificates,  
downloading firmware, downloading custom files, resetting serial ports, etc., are found under the  
Tools menu option in the DeviceManager and under Administration in WebManager.  
90  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Network Settings  
Chapter  
6
6
Introduction  
The Network section is used to configure the parameters that identify the  
IOLAN within the network and how the IOLAN accesses hosts on the  
network. The following configuration windows are available:  
z
IP Settings—This window configures the IOLAN’s name, IP  
address, and Ethernet information. See IP Settings on page 92 for  
more information.  
z
Advanced—This window configures hosts that the IOLAN will be communicating with, routes,  
DNS/WINS servers, RIP, Dynamic DNS, and IPv6 Tunnels. See Advanced on page 98 for more  
information on these options.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Settings  
IP Settings  
IPv4 Settings  
Overview  
The parameters in IPv4 settings are used to access the IOLAN and are how the IOLAN accesses the  
network.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
System Name  
The System Name is used for informational purposes by such tools as the  
DeviceManager and is also used in conjunction with the Domain field to  
construct a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).  
Default: localhost  
Domain  
This field is combined with the System Name to construct the fully qualified  
domain name (FQDN). For example, if the domain is mycompany.com and the  
Server Name is set to accounting, the FQDN would be  
accounting.mycompany.com.  
Obtain IP Address When enabled, the IOLAN will request an IP address from the DHCP/BOOTP  
automatically using server. By default, when this option is enabled, the IOLAN will also attempt to  
DHCP/BOOTP  
retrieve the DNS server, WINS server, and default gateway from the  
DHCP/BOOTP server.  
Default: Disabled  
Use the following Assign a specific IP address to the IOLAN.  
IP Address  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
IP Address  
The IOLAN’s unique IPv4 network IP address.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
Subnet Mask  
The network subnet mask. For example, 255.255.0.0.  
Default Gateway Specify the gateway IP address that will provide general access beyond the  
local network.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
Default Gateway When DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, you can enable this option to have the  
Obtain  
Automatically  
IOLAN receive the Default Gateway IP address from the DHCP/BOOTP  
server.  
Default: Enabled  
DNS Server  
Specify the IP address of a DNS host in your network for host name resolution.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
DNS Server Obtain When DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, you can enable this option to have the  
Automatically  
IOLAN receive the DNS IP address from the DHCP/BOOTP server.  
Default: Enabled  
WINS Server  
Specify the IP address of a WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) host in  
your network for host resolution.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
92  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Settings  
WINS Server  
Obtain  
When DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, you can enable this option to have the  
IOLAN receive the WINS IP address from the DHCP/BOOTP server.  
Automatically  
Default: Enabled  
IPv6 Settings  
Overview  
Configure IPv6 settings when the IOLAN resides in an IPv6 network.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
Obtain IPv6  
When enabled, you can configure the IOLAN to obtain the IPv6 address(es)  
Address(es) using using IPv6 Autoconfiguration or a DHCPv6 server.  
Default: Enabled  
IPv6  
When enabled, the IOLAN will send out a Router Solicitation message. If a  
Autoconfiguration Router Advertisement message is received, the IOLAN will configure the IPv6  
address(es) and configuration parameters based on the information contained in  
the advertisement. If no Router Advertisement message is received, the IOLAN  
will attempt to connect to a DHCPv6 server to obtain IPv6 addresses and other  
configuration parameters.  
Default: Enabled  
DHCPv6  
When enabled, requests IPv6 address(es) and configuration information from  
the DHCPv6 server.  
Default: Disabled  
Custom IPv6  
Address List  
Displays the list of custom configured IPv6 addresses.  
x
x
x
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Delete Button  
Adds a custom IPv6 address.  
Edits an existing IPv6 address.  
Deletes an IPv6 address from the Custom IPv6 address list.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Settings  
x
Default Gateway  
DSN Server  
Specify the gateway IP address that will provide general access beyond the  
local network.  
Field Format: IPv6 address  
Specify the IPv6 address of a DNS host in your network for host name  
resolution.  
Field Format: IPv6 address  
DNS Server Obtain When DHCPv6 is enabled, you can enable this option to have the IOLAN  
Automatically  
receive the DNS IP address from the DHCPv6 server.  
Default: Enabled  
DHCPv6 Settings When enabled, the IOLAN will accept IPv6 address(es) from the DHCPv6  
IPv6 Address(es)  
server.  
Default: Disabled  
DHCPv6 Settings When enabled, the IOLAN will accept the network prefix from the DHCPv6  
Network Prefix  
server.  
Default: Disabled  
94  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Settings  
Adding/Editing a Custom IPv6 Address  
You can manually add one of the following:  
z
The IPv6 network prefix (and the IOLAN will determine an IPv6 address based on the network  
prefix and the IOLAN MAC address).  
z
The complete IPv6 address.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Create a unique  
When enabled, the IOLAN will derive an IPv6 address from the entered  
IPv6 address on the network prefix and the IOLAN’s MAC address.  
network  
Default: Enabled  
Network Prefix  
Specify the IPv6 network prefix. The IOLAN will derive the complete IPv6  
address from the entered network prefix and the IOLAN’s MAC address.  
Default: Enabled  
Network Prefix  
IPv6 Prefix Bits  
Specify the network prefix bits for the IPv6 address.  
Range: 0-64  
Default: 64  
Use the following Enable this option when you want to enter a specific IPv6 address.  
IPv6 address  
Default: Disabled  
x
IPv6 Address  
Specify the complete IPv6 address.  
Field Format: IPv6 address  
x
IPv6 Address IPv6 Specify the network prefix bits for the IPv6 address.  
Prefix Bits  
Range: 0-128  
Default: 64  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Settings  
Advanced  
Overview  
The Advanced tab configures Active Standby (SCS models only), DNS update, IPv6 Advertising  
Router settings, and the Ethernet interface(s) hardware speed and duplex.  
Configure the parameters in the Advanced tab only if:  
z
z
z
z
you have already set up Dynamic DNS with DynDNS.com  
you want to enable Active Standby (SCS models only)  
you want to specify the line speed and duplex  
you want the IOLAN to act as an IPv6 Advertising Router  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
Register Address in When this parameter is set, the IOLAN will provide the DHCP/DHCPv6 server  
DNS  
with a fully qualified domain name (FQDN), so that the DHCP/DHCPv6 server  
can update the network's DNS server with the newly assigned IP address.  
Default: Disabled  
Domain Prefix  
(SCS models only) A domain prefix to uniquely identify the Ethernet interface  
to the DNS when the IOLAN has two Ethernet interfaces. The FQDN that is  
sent to the DNS will be one of the following formats, depending on what is  
configured in the System Settings section on the IPv4 Settings tab:  
z
z
<Server Name>.<Domain Prefix>.<Domain Name>  
<Server Name>.<Domain Prefix>  
Field Format: Maximum 8 alphanumeric characters  
Enable Active  
Standby  
(SCS models only) Active Standby permits the grouping of Ethernet LAN  
connections to provide for link failover. Both Ethernet connections will have  
the same Ethernet MAC address. Active standby refers to the process by which  
a failure of one interface can be automatically overcome by having its traffic  
routed to the other interface.  
Default: Disabled  
96  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Settings  
x
Monitoring Interval (SCS only) The interval in which the active interface is checked to see if it is  
still communicating.  
Default: 100 ms  
Recovery Delay  
(SCS only) The time that the IOLAN will wait to make the secondary interface  
(Ethernet 2) active after it has been detected as up.  
Default: 200 ms  
Enable IPv6 Router When enabled, the IOLAN will periodically send IPV6 Router Advertisement  
Advertisement  
messages and respond to Router Solicitation messages. The Router  
Advertisement message can be configured to contain any of the following  
information:  
z
z
z
DHCPv6—Use the DHCPv6 server to obtain additional IPV6 address(es)  
and configuration parameters.  
DHCPv6 Configuration Options—Use DHCPv6 server to obtain  
additional configuration parameters.  
Network Prefixes—Advertise the selected custom configured network  
prefixes.  
Default: Disabled  
Advertise DHCPv6 When enabled, the Router Advertisement message indicates to use the  
DHCPv6 server for obtaining additional IPv6 addresses and configuration  
parameters.  
Default: Disabled  
Advertise DHCPv6 When enabled, the Router Advertisement message indicates to use the  
Configuration  
Options  
DHCPv6 server to obtain additional configuration parameters.  
Default: Disabled  
Advertise the  
The network prefix of the IPV6 addresses created in the IPv6 Settings tab in  
following Network the Custom IPv6 Address List are included in the Router Advertisement  
Prefix(es)  
message. You can choose to enabled or disable specific network prefixes from  
being advertised to hosts.  
Default: Enabled  
Interface 1  
Define the Ethernet connection speed (desktop models can support up to 100  
Hardware Speed Mbps and rack mount and medical unit models can support up to 1000 Mbps).  
and Duplex  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Auto—automatically detects the Ethernet interface speed and duplex  
10 Mbps Half Duplex  
10 Mbps Full Duplex  
100 Mbps Half Duplex  
100 Mbps Full Duplex  
1000 Mbps Full Duplex  
Default: Auto  
Interface 2  
Define the Ethernet connection speed (available on SCS models only).  
Hardware Speed  
and Duplex  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Auto—automatically detects the Ethernet interface speed and duplex  
10 Mbps Half Duplex  
10 Mbps Full Duplex  
100 Mbps Half Duplex  
100 Mbps Full Duplex  
1000 Mbps Full Duplex  
Default: Auto  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced  
Advanced  
Host Table  
Overview  
The Host table contains the list of hosts that will be accessed by an IP address or Fully Qualified  
Domain Name (FQDN) from the IOLAN. This table will contain a symbolic name for the host as  
well as its IP address or FQDN. When a host entry is required elsewhere in the configuration, the  
symbolic name will be used.  
Functionality  
You can configure up to 20 hosts using IPv4 or IPv6 internet addresses on desktop IOLAN models;  
you can configure up to 49 hosts on rack mount and medical unit IOLAN models.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
IP Filtering  
Data Options:  
z
z
Allow all traffic—Allows any host to connect to the IOLAN.  
Allow traffic only to/from hosts defined with IP addresses—A security  
feature that when enabled, the IOLAN will only accept data from or send  
data to hosts configured in the IOLAN’s Host Table.  
Default: Allow all traffic  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Delete Button  
Adds a host to the host table.  
Changes a host that already exists in the host table.  
Deletes a host from the host table.  
98  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced  
Adding/Editing a Host  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
Host Name  
The name of the host. This is used only for the IOLAN configuration.  
Field Format: Up to 14 characters, no spaces.  
IP Address  
The host’s IP address.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Fully Qualified  
Domain Name  
When you have DNS defined in the IOLAN, you can enter a DNS resolvable  
fully qualified domain name (note: FQDN’s are excluded as accessible hosts  
when IP Filtering is enabled).  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced  
Route List  
Overview  
Entering routes in the routing list enables the identification of gateways to be used for accessing  
specific hosts or external networks from the IOLAN's local network.  
Functionality  
There are three types of routes:  
z
z
z
Default—A route that provides general access beyond your local network.  
Host—A route defined for accessing a specific host external to your local network.  
Network—A route defined for accessing a specific network external to your local network.  
You can specify up to 20 routes on desktop IOLAN models; you can specify up to 49 routes on rack  
mount and medical unit IOLAN models.  
Two types or gateways (method of accessing specific hosts or external networks) can be configured:  
z
z
Host—Specify a specify host that will provide access to the route destination.  
Interface—Specify the IPv6 tunnel, Remote Access (PPP)-defined serial port, or Remote Access  
(SLIP)-defined serial port that will provide access to the route destination.  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available on this window:  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Delete Button  
Adds a route to the Route List.  
Changes an existing route in the Route List.  
Deletes a route from the Route List.  
100  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced  
Adding/Editing Routes  
From the Route List tab, if you click the Add or Edit button, you will be able to add a new or edit an  
existing route.  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
Type  
Specify the type of route you want to configure.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
Host—A route defined for accessing a specific host external to your local  
network.  
Network—A route defined for accessing a specific network external to  
your local network.  
Default—A route which provides general access beyond your local  
network.  
Default: Default  
IP Address  
When the route Type is defined as Host, this field will contain the IP address of  
the host. If the route Type is defined as Network, the network portion of the IP  
address must be specified and the Host port of the address will be set to 0.  
Example: to access network 10.10.20, the address 10.10.20.0 would be  
specified in this field.  
Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
IPv4 Subnet Mask When the route is a Network route, you must specify the network’s subnet  
mask.  
IPv6 Prefix Bits  
Host  
If the IP address is IPv6, then you must specify the network’s prefix bits.  
Range: 0-128  
Select this option when a host is being used at the route gateway.  
Default: Enabled, None  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced  
Interface  
The Interface list is comprised of configured IPv6 tunnels and serial ports  
defined for Remote Access (PPP) and Remote Access (SLIP) profiles. Select  
this option when you want to use the specified interface as the gateway to the  
destination.  
Field Option(s): IPv6 tunnels, Remote Access (PPP) and Remote Access  
(SLIP) serial ports  
Default: Disabled  
DNS/WINS  
Overview  
You can configure WINS servers for PPP-client name resolution and DNS servers for PPP-client  
name resolution and IOLAN host name resolution (for example, when specifying Bootup file).  
Functionality  
You can configure up to four DNS and four WINS servers. If you specified a DNS and/or WINS  
server on the Network, IP Settings tabs (either IPv4 or IPv6), it will be automatically entered into the  
appropriate list. If the DNS and/or WINS server is provided by a DHCP server, these will NOT be  
viewable in the list, however, you can add DNS and/or WINS servers to supplement the DHCP  
supplied server.  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available on this window:  
Add DNS Button  
Edit DNS Button  
Adds a DNS server.  
Edits an existing DNS server.  
Delete DNS Button Deletes a DNS server.  
Add WINS Button Adds a WINS server.  
Edit WINS Button Edits an existing WINS server.  
Delete WINS  
Button  
Deletes a WINS server.  
102  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced  
Editing/Adding DNS/WINS Servers  
Configure the parameter:  
DNS IP Address  
You can configure up to four DNS servers.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
WINS IP Address You can configure up to four WINS servers.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
RIP  
Overview  
The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is a routing protocol used with almost every TCP/IP  
implementation. Its function is to pass routing information from a router or gateway to a neighboring  
router(s) or gateway(s). RIP messages contain information about destinations which can be reached  
and the number of hops which are required. The hop-count is the basic metric of RIP and so RIP is  
referred to as a “distance vector protocol”. RIP messages are carried in UDP datagrams.  
Functionality  
You can configure RIP to selectively advertise networks remotely connected via a SLIP/PPP link on  
the Ethernet connection, and pass RIP routing information to remotely connected clients. As this can  
be undesirable in some environments, this behavior can be configured and is defaulted to the non-  
routing behavior.  
Transmission and reception of Routing Information Protocol (RIP) packets over PPP and SLIP  
connections can be configured on a per user basis or on a per serial port basis.  
The Routing parameter can be configured:  
z
On the Advanced tab for Remote Access (PPP) and Remote Access (SLIP) profiles configured  
for a serial port to determine the exchange of RIP packets between the IOLAN and remotely  
connected users connected from the serial side.  
z
z
On the Services tab for each local user to determine the exchange of RIP packets between the  
IOLAN and remotely connected users connected from the serial side.  
By the RADIUS server for users authenticated by RADIUS, the RADIUS-defined Framed-  
Routing parameter determines the exchange of RIP packets.  
There are four options for setting the Routing parameters:  
z
None—Routing information is not exchanged across the link. This is the default setting for a line  
and a locally defined user.  
z
z
z
Send—Routing information is only transmitted to the remote user.  
Listen—Routing information is only received from the remote user.  
Send and Listen—Routing information is transmitted to and received from the remote user.  
The local User Routing parameter or RADIUS Framed-Routing parameter, if set, override the serial  
port Routing parameter for a connection.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
Ethernet Mode  
Enable/disable RIP (Routing Information Protocol) mode for the Ethernet  
interface.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
None—Disables RIP over the Ethernet interface.  
Send—Sends RIP over the Ethernet interface.  
Listen—Listens for RIP over the Ethernet interface.  
Send and Listen—Sends RIP and listens for RIP over the Ethernet  
interface.  
Default: None  
Authentication  
Method  
Specify the type of RIP authentication.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
None—No authentication for RIP.  
Password—Simple RIP password authentication.  
MD5—Use MD5 RIP authentication.  
Default: None  
Password  
Specify the password that allows the router tables to be updated.  
Confirm Password Retype in the password to verify that you typed in it correctly.  
ID  
The MD5 identification key.  
Start Date  
The start date that the MD5 key becomes valid. The date format is dependent  
on your system’s settings.  
Start Time  
End Date  
The time that the MD5 key becomes valid. The time format is dependent on  
your system’s settings.  
The last day that the MD5 key is valid. The date format is dependent on your  
system’s settings.  
104  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced  
End Time  
The time that the MD5 key becomes invalid. The time format is dependent on  
your system’s settings.  
Key  
The MD5 key that is being used by your routers.  
Confirm Key  
Retype the MD5 key that is being used by your routers to verify that it was  
typed correctly.  
Dynamic DNS  
Overview  
Dynamic DNS Service providers enable users to access a server connected to the internet that has  
been assigned a dynamic IP address. The IOLAN product line has built-in support for the  
DynDNS.com service provider. Refer to www.DynDNS.comfor information on setting up an account.  
Functionality  
When the IOLAN is assigned a dynamic IP address, it will inform the DynDNS.com service provider  
of its new IP address. Users can then use DynDNS.com as a DNS service to get the IP address of the  
IOLAN. In order to take advantage of this service, the following steps need to be taken.  
1. Create an account with DynDNS.com and configure the name your IOLAN will be known by on  
the internet (the Host name). For example, create a host name such as  
yourcompanySCS.DynDNS.org.  
2. Enable the Network Dynamic DNS feature and configure the IOLAN’s dynamic DNS  
parameters to match the Host’s configuration on the DynDNS.com server. Every time the  
IOLAN gets assigned a new IP address, it will update DynDNS.com with the new IP address.  
3. Users accessing the IOLAN via the internet can now access it via its fully qualified host name.  
For example, telnet yourcompanySCS.DynDNS.org.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
Enable Dynamic  
Enables/disables the dynamic DNS feature. When Dynamic DNS is enabled,  
DNS for the system the IOLAN will automatically update its IP address with DynDNS.org if it  
changes.  
Default: Disabled  
Host  
Specify the registered hostname with DynDNS.org that will be updated with  
the IOLAN’s IP address should it change. Put in the full name; for example,  
mydeviceserver.dyndns.org.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced  
User Name  
Password  
Specify the user name used to access the account set up on the DynDNS.org  
server.  
Specify the password used to access the account set up on the DynDNS.org  
server.  
Account Settings  
Button  
Click this button to configure the Dynamic DNS DynDNS.org account  
information.  
Account Settings  
Enter the information about your DynDNS.com account so the IOLAN can communicate IP address  
updates. These settings are global and apply to all Dynamic DNS settings.  
Configure the appropriate parameters:  
System Type  
Specify how your account IP address schema was set up with DynDNS.org.  
Refer to www.DynDNS.org for information about this parameter.  
Data Options: Dynamic, Static, Custom  
Default: Dynamic  
Wildcard  
Adds an alias to *.yourcompanySCS.dyndns.orgpointing to the same IP  
address as entered for yourcompanySCS.dyndns.org.  
Connection Method Specify how the IOLAN is going to connect to the DynDNS.org server.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
HTTP  
HTTP through Port 8245  
HTTPS—for a secure connection to the DynDNS server  
Default: Disabled  
Cipher Suite Button Launches the cipher information window so you can specify the type of  
encryption that will be used for data that is transferred between the  
DynDNS.org server and the IOLAN.  
See Cipher Suite Field Descriptions on page 107 for more information.  
106  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced  
Validate Peer  
Certificate  
Enables/disables peer validation between the DynDNS.org server and the  
IOLAN. This may be desirable, since the DynDNS user name and password are  
sent from the IOLAN to the DynDNS server when the IP address needs to be  
updated and when an account refresh is performed. Account refreshes are done  
periodically to ensure that DynDNS accounts do not auto-delete should the IP  
address change infrequently. This parameter will only take effect if HTTPS is  
selected as the connection method.  
Default: Disabled  
Validation Criteria Launches the peer validation criteria window so you can specify the  
Button  
information used to validate the connection between the DynDNS.org server  
and the IOLAN.  
See Validation Criteria Field Descriptions on page 109 for more information.  
Cipher Suite Field Descriptions  
The SSL/TLS cipher suite is used to encrypt data between the IOLAN and the client. You can specify  
up to five cipher groups.  
The following buttons are available:  
Add Button  
Adds a cipher to the cipher list.  
Edit Button  
Edits a cipher in the cipher list.  
Delete Button  
Move Up Button  
Deletes a cipher from the cipher list.  
Moves a cipher up in preference in the cipher list.  
Move Down Button Moves a cipher down in preference in the cipher list.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced  
Adding/Editing a Cipher Suite  
To see a list of valid cipher suite combinations, see Appendix B, SSL/TLS Ciphers on page 359.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Encryption  
Select the type of encryption that will be used for the SSL connection.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Any—Will use the first encryption format that can be negotiated.  
AES  
3DES  
DES  
ARCFOUR  
ARCTWO  
Default: Any  
Min Key Size  
Max Key Size  
Key Exchange  
The minimum key size value that will be used for the specified encryption  
type.  
Data Options: 40, 56, 64, 128, 168, 256  
Default: 40  
The maximum key size value that will be used for the specified encryption  
type.  
Data Options: 40, 56, 64, 128, 168, 256  
Default: 256  
The type of key to exchange for the encryption format.  
Data Options:  
z
Any—Any key exchange that is valid is used (this does not, however,  
include ADH keys).  
z
z
RSA—This is an RSA key exchange using an RSA key and certificate.  
EDH-RSA—This is an EDH key exchange using an RSA key and  
certificate.  
z
z
EDH-DSS—This is an EDH key exchange using a DSA key and  
certificate.  
ADH—This is an anonymous key exchange which does not require a  
private key or certificate. Choose this key if you do not want to  
authenticate the peer device, but you want the data encrypted on the  
SSL/TLS connection.  
Default: Any  
108  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced  
HMAC  
Select the key-hashing for message authentication method for your encryption  
type.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
Any  
MD5  
SHA1  
Default: Any  
Validation Criteria Field Descriptions  
If you choose to configure validation criteria, the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate must  
match exactly the information configured in this window in order to pass peer authentication and  
create a valid SSL/TLS connection.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Country  
A country code; for example, US. This field is case sensitive in order to  
successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Two characters  
State/Province  
Locality  
An entry for the state/province; for example, IL. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters  
An entry for the location; for example, Chicago. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters  
Organization  
An entry for the organization; for example, Accounting. This field is case  
sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS  
certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
Organization Unit An entry for the unit in the organization; for example, Payroll. This field is  
case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer  
SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced  
Common Name  
Email  
An entry for common name; for example, the host name or fully qualified  
domain name. This field is case sensitive in order to successfully match the  
information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
An entry for an email address; for example, [email protected]. This field  
is case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer  
SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
IPv6 Tunnels  
Overview  
IPv6 tunnels transport IPv6 data packets from one IPv6 network to another IPv6 network over an  
IPv4 network. In addition to creating the IPv6 tunnel, you must also create the route that will  
transport the data packets through the IPv4 network in the Route List (see Route List on page 100 for  
more information).  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available:  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Delete Button  
Adds an IPv6 tunnel.  
Edits an existing IPv6 tunnel.  
Deletes an IPv6 tunnel. If a tunnel is associated with a route, it cannot be  
deleted until the route is either changed or deleted.  
110  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced  
Adding/Editing an IPv6 Tunnel  
When you add/edit an IPv6 tunnel, you are determining how an IPv6 message will reach an IPv6  
device through an IPv4 network.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Name  
The name of the IPv6 tunnel.  
Field Format: Maximum 16 alphanumeric characters  
Default: ipv6_tunnel1  
Mode  
The method or protocol that is used to create the IPv6 tunnel.  
z
Manual—When enabled, the IOLAN will manually create the IPv6 tunnel  
to the specified Remote Host through the specified Interface.  
z
6to4—When enabled, the IOLAN will broadcast to the multicast address  
192.88.99.1 through the specified Interface. When the closest 6to4 router  
responds, it will create the IPv6 tunnel, encapsulating and decapsulating  
IPv6 traffic sent to and from the IOLAN.  
z
Teredo—When enabled, the Teredo protocol encapsulates the IPv6 packet  
as an IPv4 UDP message, allowing it to pass through most network  
address translator (NAT) boxes and create an IPv6 tunnel to the specified  
Remote Host (a Teredo server) through the specified Interface.  
Default: Manual  
Remote Host  
Interface  
The IPv4 host that can access the IPv6 network when the Mode is Manual.  
The Teredo server when the Mode is Teredo.  
Default: None  
The interface that the IOLAN is going to use to access the Remote Host. The  
list is comprised of the Ethernet interface(s) and serial ports configured for the  
Remote Access (PPP) or Remote Access (SLIP) profiles.  
Default: Ethernet 1  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced  
112  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Serial Ports  
Chapter  
7
7
Introduction  
The Serial section is used to configure the serial ports on your IOLAN. The  
following configuration windows are available:  
z
Serial Ports—Configures the type of connection that the serial port is  
being used for. This is accomplished by selecting a connection profile and  
then configuring the applicable parameters for that profile. See Serial  
Ports on page 113 for more information.  
z
z
Port Buffering—Configures serial port data buffering preferences. See  
Port Buffering on page 194 for more information.  
Advanced—Configures those parameters that are applicable to specific  
environments. You will find modem and TruePort configuration options, in addition to others,  
here. See Advanced on page 197 for more information.  
Serial Ports  
Overview  
Each IOLAN serial port can be connected to serial device. Each serial port can then be configured  
according to a serial port profile that coincides with the serial device attached to that serial port and  
how the serial device is accessed/used.  
Functionality  
When you select the Serial Ports navigation option, you will see a list with the number of serial ports  
on your IOLAN. As you configure the serial ports, the information for each serial port is displayed.  
To configure/change a serial port, click the Edit button.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Serial Ports  
Editing a Serial Port  
In the Serial Port Settings window, click on a serial port and then click the Edit button, the  
following window is displayed:  
114  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Ports  
Click the Change Profile button to select a different serial port profile if you don’t want the  
displayed profile:  
As you select the different serial port profiles, a short description and a picture representing a typical  
application of the profile is displayed. When you have selected the appropriate profile for the serial  
port, click OK and those serial port profile configuration options will be displayed.  
Copying a Serial Port  
Once you configure a serial port, you can copy the serial port settings to other serial ports by  
selecting a serial port and then clicking the Copy button on the Serial Ports Settings window.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Resetting a Serial Port  
When you change a serial port’s configuration, you can download the configuration file to the  
IOLAN and then reset a specific serial port(s) to see how you change affects the serial port’s  
behavior. To reset a serial port, select Tools, Reset, Serial Port(s).  
Serial Port Profiles  
Common Tabs  
Overview  
There are several functions that are common to more than one profile. These functions are:  
z
z
z
z
Hardware—Configure the physical serial line parameters. See Hardware Tab Field  
Descriptions on page 117.  
Email Alert—Configure email alerts for the serial line (these can also be configured globally for  
all lines under the System settings). See Email Alert Tab Field Descriptions on page 119.  
Packet Forwarding—Configure data packet parameters. See Packet Forwarding Tab Field  
Descriptions on page 120.  
SSL/TLS—Configure SSL/TLS encryption options for the serial port. See SSL/TLS Settings  
Tab Field Descriptions on page 123.  
116  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Serial Port Profiles  
Hardware Tab Field Descriptions  
The Hardware tab configures all the serial port hardware connection information. The window below  
shows an SDS1 model; your Hardware tab might display a subset of the parameters described,  
depending on the IOLAN model and supported hardware.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Serial Interface  
Specifies the type of serial line that is being used with the IOLAN.  
Data Options: EIA-232, EIA-422, or EIA-485.  
SCS/STS/MDC models support only EIA-232.  
Default: EIA-232  
Speed  
Specifies the baud rate of the serial line; keep in mind that speed is affected by  
the length of the cable. You can also specify a custom baud rate. When you  
enter a custom baud rate, the IOLAN will calculate the closest baud rate  
available to the hardware. The exact baud rate calculated can be viewed in the  
Serial Ports statistics.  
Range: 50-230400, custom supports 50-1843200  
Default: 9600  
Data Bits  
Parity  
Specifies the number of bits in a transmitted character.  
Default: 8  
Specifies the type of parity being used for the data communication on the serial  
port. If you want to force a parity type, you can specify Mark for 1or Space for  
0.  
Data Options: Even, Odd, Mark, Space, None  
Default: None  
Stop Bits  
Specifies the number of stop bits that follow a byte.  
Data Options: 1,1.5, 2. 1.5 is only available on the 1-port and 2-port models,  
but not on the modem line (Serial Port 2) of the SDS1M model.  
Default: 1  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Duplex  
Used with a EIA-485 serial interface, specify whether the serial port is Full  
Duplex (communication both ways at the same time) or Half Duplex  
(communication in one direction at a time).  
Default: Full  
TX Driver Control Used with a EIA-485 serial interface, if your application supports RTS  
(Request To Send), select this option. Otherwise, select Auto.  
Default: Auto  
Flow Control  
Defines whether the data flow is handled by the software (Soft), hardware  
(Hard), Both, or None. If you are using SLIP, set to Hard only. If you are  
using PPP, set to either Soft or Hard (Hard is recommended). If you select  
Soft with PPP, you must set the ACCM parameter when you configure PPP for  
the Serial Port.  
Data Options: Soft, Hard, Both, None  
Default: None  
Enable Inbound  
Flow Control  
Determines if input flow control is to be used.  
Default: Enabled  
Enable Outbound Determines if output flow control is to be used.  
Flow Control  
Default: Enabled  
Monitor DSR  
Specifies whether the EIA-232 signal DSR (Data Set Ready) should be  
monitored. This is used with modems or any device that sends a DSR signal.  
When it is monitored and the IOLAN detects a DSR signal, the serial port  
profile is started. The Monitor DSR parameter is not available for medical unit  
models. If both Monitor DCD and Monitor DSR are enabled, both signals must  
be detected before the serial port profile is started.  
Default: Disabled  
Monitor DCD  
Specifies whether the EIA-232 signal DCD (Data Carrier Detect) should be  
monitored. This is used with modems or any other device that sends a DCD  
signal. When it is monitored and the IOLAN detects a DCD signal, the serial  
port profile is started. If both Monitor DCD and Monitor DSR are enabled, both  
signals must be detected before the serial port profile is started.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Echo  
Suppression  
This parameter applies only to EIA-485 Half Duplex mode. All characters will  
be echoed to the user and transmitted across the serial ports. Some EIA-485  
applications require local echo to be enabled in order to monitor the loopback  
data to determine that line contention has occurred. If your application cannot  
handle loopback data, echo suppression should be enabled.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Line  
Termination  
Used with EIA-422 and EIA-485 on SDS 8-port and 16-port rack mount  
IOLAN models, specifies whether or not the line is terminated; use this option  
when the serial port is connected to a device at the end of the serial network.  
Default: Disabled  
118  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Email Alert Tab Field Descriptions  
Email notification can be set at the Server and/or serial port levels. You can set unique email  
notifications for each serial port because the person who administers the IOLAN might not be the  
same person who administers the serial device(s) attached to the IOLAN port. Therefore, email  
notification can be sent to the proper person(s) responsible for the hardware.  
The following event triggers an email notification on the Serial Port for the specified Level:  
z
z
DSR signal loss, Warning Level  
I/O alerts, Critical Level  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable Port Email Enable/disable email alert settings for this serial port.  
Alert  
Default: Disabled  
Use System Email Determines whether you want the Serial Port to inherit the Email Alert settings  
Alert Settings  
from the System Email Alert configuration. If this is enabled, System and  
Serial Port notification events will have the same Email Alert setting.  
Default: Enabled  
Level  
Choose the event level that triggers an email notification.  
Data Options: Emergency, Alert, Critical, Error, Warning, Notice, Info,  
Debug  
Default: Emergency  
To  
An email address or list of email addresses that will receive the email  
notification.  
Subject  
From  
A text string, which can contain spaces, that will display in the Subject field of  
the email notification.  
This field can contain an email address that might identify the IOLAN name or  
some other value.  
Reply To  
The email address to whom all replies to the email notification should go.  
Outgoing Mail  
Server (SMTP)  
The SMTP host (email server) that will process the email notification request.  
This can be either a host name defined in the IOLAN host table or the SMTP  
host IP address.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Packet Forwarding Tab Field Descriptions  
The Packet Forwarding tab can be used to control/define how and when serial port data packets are  
sent from the IOLAN to the network.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Minimize Latency This option ensures that all application data is immediately forwarded to the  
serial device and that every character received from the device is immediately  
sent on the network. Select this option for timing-sensitive applications.  
Default: Enabled  
Optimize Network This option provides optimal network usage while ensuring that the application  
Throughput  
performance is not compromised. Select this option when you want to  
minimize overall packet count, such as when the connection is over a WAN.  
Default: Disabled  
Prevent Message This option detects the message, packet, or data blocking characteristics of the  
Fragmentation  
serial data and preserves it throughout the communication. Select this option  
for message-based applications or serial devices that are sensitive to inter-  
character delays within these messages.  
Default: Disabled  
Delay Between  
Messages  
The minimum time, in milliseconds, between messages that must pass before  
the data is forwarded by the IOLAN.  
Range: 0-65535  
Default: 250 ms  
Custom Packet  
Forwarding  
This option allows you to define the packet forwarding rules based on the  
packet definition or the frame definition.  
Default: Disabled  
120  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Packet Definition When enabled, this group of parameters allows you to set a variety of packet  
definition options. The first criteria that is met causes the packet to be  
transmitted. For example, if you set a Force Transmit Timer of 1000 ms and a  
Packet Size of 100 bytes, whichever criteria is met first is what will cause the  
packet to be transmitted.  
Default: Enabled  
Packet Size  
The number of bytes that must be received from the serial port before the  
packet is transmitted to the network. A value of zero (0) ignores this parameter.  
Range: 0-1024 bytes  
Default: 0  
Idle Time  
The amount of time, in milliseconds, that must elapse between characters  
before the packet is transmitted to the network. A value of zero (0) ignores this  
parameter.  
Range: 0-65535 ms  
Default: 0  
Enable Trigger1  
Character  
When enabled, specifies the character that when received will define when the  
packet is ready for transmission. The actual transmission of the packet is based  
on the Trigger Forwarding Rule.  
Range: Hex 0-FF  
Default: 0  
Enable Trigger2  
Character  
When enabled, creates a sequence of characters that must be received to  
specify when the packet is ready for transmission (if the End Trigger1  
character is not immediately followed by the End Trigger2 character, the  
IOLAN waits for another End Trigger1 character to start the End Trigger1/End  
Trigger2 character sequence). The actual transmission of the packet is based on  
the Trigger Forwarding Rule.  
Range: Hex 0-FF  
Default: 0  
Frame Definition When enabled, this group of parameters allows you to control the frame that is  
transmitted by defining the start and end of frame character(s). If the internal  
buffer (1024 bytes) is full before the EOF character(s) are received, the packet  
will be transmitted and the EOF character(s) search will continue.  
Default: Disabled  
SOF1 Character  
When enabled, the Start of Frame character defines the first character of the  
frame, any character(s) received before the Start of Frame character is ignored.  
Range: Hex 0-FF  
Default: 0  
SOF2 Character  
When enabled, creates a sequence of characters that must be received to create  
the start of the frame (if the SOF1 character is not immediately followed by the  
SOF2 character, the IOLAN waits for another SOF1 character to start the  
SOF1/SOF2 character sequence).  
Range: Hex 0-FF  
Default: 0  
Transmit SOF  
Character(s)  
When enabled, the SOF1 or SOF1/SOF2 characters will be transmitted with  
the frame. If not enabled, the SOF1 or SOF1/SOF2 characters will be stripped  
from the transmission.  
Default: Disabled  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
EOF1 Character Specifies the End of Frame character, which defines when the frame is ready to  
be transmitted. The actual transmission of the frame is based on the Trigger  
Forwarding Rule.  
Range: Hex 0-FF  
Default: 0  
EOF2 Character When enabled, creates a sequence of characters that must be received to define  
the end of the frame (if the EOF1 character is not immediately followed by the  
EOF2 character, the IOLAN waits for another EOF1 character to start the  
EOF1/EOF2 character sequence), which defines when the frame is ready to be  
transmitted. The actual transmission of the frame is based on the Trigger  
Forwarding Rule.  
Range: Hex 0-FF  
Default: 0  
Trigger  
Determines what is included in the Frame (based on the EOF1 or EOF1/EOF2)  
Forwarding Rule or Packet (based on Trigger1 or Trigger1/Trigger2). Choose one of the  
following options:  
z
z
z
Strip-Trigger—Strips out the EOF1, EOF1/EOF2, Trigger1, or  
Trigger1/Trigger2, depending on your settings.  
Trigger—Includes the EOF1, EOF1/EOF2, Trigger1, or  
Trigger1/Trigger2, depending on your settings.  
Trigger+1—Includes the EOF1, EOF1/EOF2, Trigger1, or  
Trigger1/Trigger2, depending on your settings, plus the first byte that  
follows the trigger.  
z
Trigger+2—Includes the EOF1, EOF1/EOF2, Trigger1, or  
Trigger1/Trigger2, depending on your settings, plus the next two bytes  
received after the trigger.  
Default: Trigger  
122  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
SSL/TLS Settings Tab Field Descriptions  
You can create an encrypted connection using SSL/TLS for any serial port profile that accesses the  
IOLAN from the network. When you enable this feature, it will automatically use the global  
SSL/TLS settings (configured on Security, SSL/TLS), although you can configure unique SSL/TLS  
settings for the serial port.  
When configuring SSL/TLS, the following configuration options are available:  
z
z
You can set up the IOLAN to act as an SSL/TLS client or server.  
There is an extensive selection of SSL/TLS ciphers that you can configure for your SSL/TLS  
connection; see Appendix B, SSL/TLS Ciphers on page 359 for a list of SSL/TLS ciphers.  
z
You can enable peer certificate validation, for which you must supply the validation criteria that  
was used when creating the peer certificate (this is case sensitive, so keep that in mind when  
enabling and configuring this option).  
See Keys and Certificates on page 242 for information about SSL/TLS support documents.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable SSL/TLS  
Activates the SSL/TLS settings for the serial port.  
Default: Disabled  
Use global settings Uses the SSL/TLS settings configured in the Security section for the serial  
port.  
Default: Enabled  
SSL/TLS Version Specify whether you want to use:  
z
Any—The IOLAN will try a TLSv1 connection first. If that fails, it will  
try an SSLv3 connection. If that fails, it will try an SSLv2 connection.  
z
z
TLSv1—The connection will use only TLSv1.  
SSLv3—The connection will use only SSLv3.  
Default: Any  
SSL/TLS Type  
Specify whether the IOLAN serial port will act as an SSL/TLS client or server.  
Default: Client  
Cipher Suite Button Click this button to specify SSL/TLS connection ciphers.  
See Cipher Suite Field Descriptions on page 124 for more information.  
Validate Peer  
Certificate  
Enable this option when you want the Validation Criteria to match the Peer  
Certificate for authentication to pass. If you enable this option, you need to  
download an SSL/TLS certificate authority (CA) list file to the IOLAN.  
Default: Disabled  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Validation Criteria Click this button to create peer certificate validation criteria that must be met  
Button  
for a valid SSL/TLS connection.  
See Validation Criteria Field Descriptions on page 126 for more information.  
Cipher Suite Field Descriptions  
The SSL/TLS cipher suite is used to encrypt data between the IOLAN and the client. You can specify  
up to five cipher groups.  
The following buttons are available on this window:  
Add Button  
Adds a cipher to the cipher list.  
Edit Button  
Edits a cipher in the cipher list.  
Delete Button  
Move Up Button  
Deletes a cipher from the cipher list.  
Moves a cipher up in preference in the cipher list.  
Move Down Button Moves a cipher down in preference in the cipher list.  
124  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Adding/Editing a Cipher Suite  
To see a list of valid cipher suite combinations, see Appendix B, SSL/TLS Ciphers on page 359.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Encryption  
Select the type of encryption that will be used for the SSL connection.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Any—Will use the first encryption format that can be negotiated.  
AES  
3DES  
DES  
ARCFOUR  
ARCTWO  
Default: Any  
Min Key Size  
Max Key Size  
Key Exchange  
The minimum key size value that will be used for the specified encryption  
type.  
Data Options: 40, 56, 64, 128, 168, 256  
Default: 40  
The maximum key size value that will be used for the specified encryption  
type.  
Data Options: 40, 56, 64, 128, 168, 256  
Default: 256  
The type of key to exchange for the encryption format.  
Data Options:  
z
Any—Any key exchange that is valid is used (this does not, however,  
include ADH keys).  
z
z
RSA—This is an RSA key exchange using an RSA key and certificate.  
EDH-RSA—This is an EDH key exchange using an RSA key and  
certificate.  
z
z
EDH-DSS—This is an EDH key exchange using a DSA key and  
certificate.  
ADH—This is an anonymous key exchange which does not require a  
private key or certificate. Choose this key if you do not want to  
authenticate the peer device, but you want the data encrypted on the  
SSL/TLS connection.  
Default: Any  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
HMAC  
Select the key-hashing for message authentication method for your encryption  
type.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
Any  
MD5  
SHA1  
Default: Any  
Validation Criteria Field Descriptions  
If you choose to configure validation criteria, the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate must  
match exactly the information configured in this window in order to pass peer authentication and  
create a valid SSL/TLS connection.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Country  
A country code; for example, US. This field is case sensitive in order to  
successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Two characters  
State/Province  
Locality  
An entry for the state/province; for example, IL. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters  
An entry for the location; for example, Chicago. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters  
Organization  
An entry for the organization; for example, Accounting. This field is case  
sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS  
certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
Organization Unit An entry for the unit in the organization; for example, Payroll. This field is  
case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer  
SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
126  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Common Name  
Email  
An entry for common name; for example, the host name or fully qualified  
domain name. This field is case sensitive in order to successfully match the  
information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
An entry for an email address; for example, [email protected]. This field  
is case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer  
SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
Console Management Profile  
Overview  
The Console Management profile provides access through the network to a console or administrative  
port of a server or router attached to the IOLAN’s serial port. This profile configures the IOLAN’s  
serial port to set up a TCP socket that will listen for a Telnet or SSH connection from the network.  
Functionality  
Use the Console Management profile when you are configuring users who need to access a serial  
console port from the network.  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
The Console Management General tab configures how the serial port will be accessed by the user  
through the network.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Protocol  
Specify the connection method that users will use to communicate with a serial  
device connected to the IOLAN through the network.  
Data Options: Telnet, SSH  
Default: Telnet  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Serial Port Profiles  
Listen for  
The port number that the IOLAN will listen on for incoming TCP connections.  
Connections on  
TCP Port  
Default: 10001, depending on the serial port number  
Enable IP Aliasing Enables/disables the ability to access a serial device connected to the serial port  
by an IP address (or host name that can be resolved to the Internet Address in a  
DNS network) instead of the IOLAN’s IP address and port number.  
Default: Disabled  
IP Address  
Users can access serial devices connected to the IOLAN through the network  
by the specified Internet Address (or host name that can be resolved to the  
Internet Address in a DNS network).  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 Address  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions  
The Console Management Advanced tab configures serial port options that may be required by  
certain applications.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Authenticate User Enables/disables login/password authentication for users connecting from the  
network.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable TCP  
Keepalive  
Enables a per-connection TCP keepalive feature. After the configured number  
of seconds, the connection will send a gratuitous ACK to the network peer,  
thus either ensuring the connection stays active OR causing a dropped  
connection condition to be recognized.  
This parameter needs to be used in conjunction with Monitor Connection  
Status Interval parameter found in the Serial, Advanced, Advanced Settings  
tab. The interval specifies the inactivity period before "testing" the connection.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Message of Enables/disables the display of the message of the day.  
the Day (MOTD)  
Default: Disabled  
128  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Enable Microsoft When enabled, a user can access SAC (the interface of the Microsoft  
Special  
Emergency Management Systems utility) through EasyPort Web when the  
Administrator  
Console (SAC)  
support  
IOLAN’s serial port is connected to a Microsoft Server 2003 or Microsoft  
Server 2008 host.  
Default: Disabled  
Multisessions  
The number of extra network connections available on a serial port, in addition  
to the single session that is always available. Enabling multisessions will  
permit multiple users to monitor the same console port. Each user monitoring  
the port can be assigned different privileges to this port.  
Range: Dependent on model:  
z
z
z
z
1-port: 0-3  
2-port: (4 x #-of-ports) -1  
STS/SDS 4+ ports: (2 x #-of-ports) -1  
SCS 4+ ports: (2 x (#-of-ports + 1)) -1  
Default: 0  
Idle Timeout  
Use this timer to close a connection because of inactivity. When the Idle  
Timeout expires, the IOLAN will end the connection.  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
Default: 0 seconds so the port will never timeout  
Break Handling  
Specifies how a break is interpreted.  
Data Range:  
z
z
z
z
None—The IOLAN ignores the break key completely and it is not passed  
through to the host.  
Local—The IOLAN deals with the break locally. If the user is in a  
session, the break key has the same effect as a hot key.  
Remote—When the break key is pressed, the IOLAN translates this into a  
telnet break signal which it sends to the host machine.  
Break Interrupt—On some systems such as SunOS, XENIX, and AIX, a  
break received from the peripheral is not passed to the client properly. If  
the client wishes to make the break act like an interrupt key (for example,  
when the stty options -ignbrkand brkintrare set).  
Default: None  
Dial In  
If the console port is remote and will be dialing in via modem or ISDN TA,  
enable this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Out  
If you want the modem to dial a number when the serial port is started, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Timeout  
The number of seconds the IOLAN will wait to establish a connection to a  
remote modem.  
Range: 1-99  
Default: 45 seconds  
Dial Retry  
The number of times the IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection with  
a remote modem.  
Range: 0-99  
Default: 2  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Modem  
Phone  
The name of the predefined modem that is used on this line.  
The phone number to use when Dial Out is enabled.  
TruePort Profile  
Overview  
TruePort is especially useful when you want to improve data security, as you can enable an SSL/TLS  
connection between the TruePort host port and the IOLAN. TruePort is COM Port redirector that is  
supplied with the IOLAN. TruePort can be installed as a client on a Workstation or Server and  
supports a variety of operating systems. It, in conjunction with the IOLAN, emulates a local serial  
port (COM port), to the application, to provide connectivity to a remote serial device over the  
network. The TruePort profile operates in conjunction with the TruePort software.  
Functionality  
TruePort is a COM port redirector utility for the IOLAN. It can be run in two modes (these modes  
will be set on the client software when it is configured):  
z
TruePort Full mode—This mode allows complete device control and operates as if the device  
was directly connected to the Workstation/Server’s local serial port. It provides a complete COM  
port interface between the attached serial device and the network. All serial controls, baud rate  
control, etc., are sent to the IOLAN and replicated on its associated serial port.  
z
TruePort Lite mode—This mode provides a simple raw data interface between the application  
and the remote serial port. Although the port will still operate as a COM port, control signals are  
ignored. In this mode, the serial communications parameters must be configured on the IOLAN.  
See the TruePort User’s Guide for more details about the TruePort client software.  
130  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Serial Port Profiles  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
The TruePort General tab determines how the TruePort connection is initiated and then sets up the  
appropriate connection parameters.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Connect to remote When enabled, the IOLAN initiates communication to the TruePort client.  
system  
Default: Enabled  
Host Name  
TCP Port  
The configured host that the IOLAN will connect to (must be running  
TruePort).  
Default: None  
The TCP Port that the IOLAN will use to communicate through to the TruePort  
client.  
Default: 10001 for serial port 1, then increments by one for each serial port  
Connect to  
Multiple Hosts  
When enabled, the IOLAN will establish a connection to multiple clients  
(Hosts). When using the multiple hosts feature, all TruePort clients must be  
running in Lite mode.  
Default: Disabled  
Define Additional Click this button to define the hosts that this serial port will connect to. This  
Hosts Button  
button is also used to define the Primary/Backup host functionality.  
See Adding/Editing Additional TruePort Hosts on page 132 for more  
information.  
Listen for  
Connection  
When enabled, the IOLAN will wait for connections to be initiated by the  
TruePort Client.  
Default: Disabled  
TCP Port  
The TCP Port that the IOLAN will use to communicate through to the TruePort  
client.  
Default: 10001 for serial port 1, then increments by one for each serial port  
Allow Multiple  
When this option is enabled, multiple hosts can connect to a serial device that  
Hosts to Connect is connected to this serial port. Note: These multiple clients (Hosts) need to be  
running TruePort in Lite mode.  
Default: Disabled  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Adding/Editing Additional TruePort Hosts  
You can define a list of hosts that the serial device will communicate to through TruePort Lite or a  
primary/backup host.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Define additional When this option is enabled, you can define up to 49 hosts that the serial device  
hosts to connect to connected to this serial port will attempt communicate to. With this mode of  
operation, the IOLAN will connect to multiple hosts simultaneously.  
Default: Enabled  
Add Button  
Click the Add button to add a host to the list of hosts that will be receiving  
communication from the serial device connected to the IOLAN.  
See Adding/Editing a Multihost Entry on page 132 for more information.  
Edit Button  
Highlight an existing host and click the Edit button to edit a host in the list of  
hosts that will be receiving communication from the serial device connected to  
the IOLAN.  
Delete Button  
Highlight an existing host and click the Edit button to edit a host in the list of  
hosts that will be receiving communication from the serial device connected to  
the IOLAN.  
Define a primary When this option is enabled, you need to define a primary host that the serial  
host and backup... device connected to this serial port will communicate to and a backup host, in  
the event that the IOLAN loses communication to the primary host. The  
IOLAN will first establish a connection to the primary host. Should the  
connection to the primary host be lost (or never established), the IOLAN will  
establish a connection the backup host. Once connected to the backup, the  
IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection to the Primary host, once this  
is successfully done, it gracefully shuts down the backup connection.  
Default: Disabled  
Primary Host  
TCP Port  
Specify a preconfigured host that the serial device will communicate to through  
the IOLAN.  
Default: None  
Specify the TCP port that the IOLAN will use to communicate to the Primary  
Host.  
Default: 0  
Backup Host  
TCP Port  
Specify a preconfigured host that the serial device will communicate to through  
the IOLAN if the IOLAN cannot communicate with the Primary Host.  
Default: None  
Specify the TCP port that the IOLAN will use to communicate to the Backup  
Host.  
Default: 10000  
Adding/Editing a Multihost Entry  
When you click the Add or Edit button, the Host Entry window appears. The hosts in the multihost  
list must already be defined. If you add a host that was defined with its fully qualified domain name  
(FQDN), it must be resolvable by your configured DNS server.  
Configure the following parameters:  
132  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Host Name  
TCP Port  
Specify the preconfigured host that will be in the multihost list.  
Default: None  
Specify the TCP port that the IOLAN will use to communicate to the Primary  
Host.  
Default: 10000 + serial port number - 1 (so serial port 47 defaults to 10046)  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions  
The TruePort Advanced tab determines how the TruePort connection is initiated and then sets up the  
appropriate connection parameters.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Signals high  
when...  
This option has the following impact based on the state of the TruePort  
connection:  
z
TruePort Lite Mode—When enabled, the EIA-232 signals remain active  
before, during, and after the TruePort connection is established. When  
disabled, the EIA-232 signals remain inactive when there is no TruePort  
connection and active when there is a TruePort connection.  
z
TruePort Full Mode—When enabled, the EIA-232 signals remain active  
before and after the TruePort connection and the TruePort client will  
control the state of the signals during the established TruePort connection.  
When disabled, the EIA-232 signals remain inactive before and after the  
TruePort connection and the TruePort client will control the state of the  
signals during the established TruePort connection.  
Default: Enabled  
Enable Message of Enables/disables the display of the message of the day.  
the Day (MOTD)  
Default: Disabled  
Enable TCP  
Keepalive  
Enables a per-connection TCP keepalive feature. After the configured number  
of seconds, the connection will send a gratuitous ACK to the network peer,  
thus either ensuring the connection stays active OR causing a dropped  
connection condition to be recognized.  
This parameter needs to be used in conjunction with Monitor Connection  
Status Interval parameter found in the Serial, Advanced, Advanced Settings  
tab. The interval specifies the inactivity period before "testing" the connection.  
Default: Disabled  
134  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Enable Data  
Logging  
When enabled, serial data will be buffered if the TCP connection is lost. When  
the TCP connection is re-established, the buffered serial data will be sent to its  
destination (this option is not available when Monitor DSR, Monitor DCD, or  
Multihost is enabled).  
The data buffer is 4K for desktop models and 32K for rack mount and medical  
unit models. If the data buffer is filled, incoming serial data will overwrite the  
oldest data.  
Default: Disabled  
Idle Timeout  
Use this timer to close a connection because of inactivity. When the Idle  
Timeout expires, the IOLAN will end the connection.  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
Default: 0 seconds so the port will never timeout  
Session Timeout  
Use this timer to forcibly close the session/connection when the Session  
Timeout expires.  
Default: 0 seconds so the port will never timeout  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
Dial In  
If the device is remote and will be dialing in via modem or ISDN TA, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Out  
If you want the modem to dial a number when the serial port is started, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Timeout  
The number of seconds the IOLAN will wait to establish a connection to a  
remote modem.  
Range: 1-99  
Default: 45 seconds  
Dial Retry  
The number of times the IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection with  
a remote modem.  
Range: 0-99  
Default: 2  
Modem  
Phone  
The name of the predefined modem that is used on this line.  
The phone number to use when Dial Out is enabled.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
TCP Sockets Profile  
Overview  
The TCP Socket profile allows for a serial device to communicate over a TCP network. The TCP  
connection can be initiated from a host on the network and/or a serial device. This is typically used  
with an application on a Workstation or Server that communicates to a device using a specific TCP  
socket. This is often referred to as a RAW connection.  
Functionality  
The TCP Sockets profile permits a raw connection to be established in either direction, meaning that  
the connection can be initiated by either the Workstation/Server or the IOLAN.  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Listen for  
Connection  
When enabled, the IOLAN listens for a connection to be established by the  
Workstation/Server on the network.  
Default: Enabled  
136  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Serial Port Profiles  
TCP Port  
The TCP port that the IOLAN will use to listen for incoming connections.  
Default: 10000 plus the serial port number, so serial port 5 would have a  
default of 10005  
Allow Multiple  
When this option is enabled, multiple hosts can connect to the serial device that  
Hosts to Connect is connected to this serial port.  
Default: Disabled  
Connect To  
When enabled, the IOLAN initiates communication to the Workstation/Server.  
Default: Disabled  
Host Name  
TCP Port  
The name (resolvable via DNS) or IP address of the configured host the  
IOLAN will connect to.  
The TCP Port that the IOLAN will use to communicate to the client.  
Default: 0  
Connect to  
Multiple Hosts  
When enabled, allows a serial device connected to this serial port to  
communicate to multiple hosts.  
Default: Disabled  
Define Additional Click this button to define the hosts that this serial port will connect to. This  
Hosts Button button is also used to define the Primary/Backup host functionality.  
Initiate Connection If the serial port hardware parameters have been setup to monitor DSR or  
Automatically  
DCD, the host session will be started once the signals are detected. If no  
hardware signals are being monitored, the IOLAN will initiate the session  
immediately after being powered up.  
Default: Enabled  
Initiate Connection Initiates a connection to the specified host when any data is received on the  
When any data is serial port.  
received  
Default: Disabled  
Initiate Connection Initiates a connection to the specified host only when the specified character is  
When <hex value> received on the serial port.  
is received  
Default: Disabled  
Permit  
Connections in  
When this option is enabled, the connection can be initiated by either the  
IOLAN or a host.  
Both Directions  
Default: Disabled  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Adding/Editing Additional Hosts  
You can define a list of hosts that the serial device will communicate to or a primary/backup host.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Define additional When this option is enabled, you can define up to 49 hosts that the serial device  
hosts to connect to connected to this serial port will attempt communicate to. With this mode of  
operation, the IOLAN will connect to multiple hosts simultaneously.  
Default: Enabled  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Click the Add button to add a host to the list of hosts that will be receiving  
communication from the serial device connected to the IOLAN.  
Highlight an existing host and click the Edit button to edit a host in the list of  
hosts that will be receiving communication from the serial device connected to  
the IOLAN.  
Delete Button  
Click the Delete button to delete a host to the list of hosts that will be receiving  
communication from the serial device connected to the IOLAN.  
Define a primary When this option is enabled, you need to define a primary host that the serial  
host and backup... device connected to this serial port will communicate to and a backup host, in  
the event that the IOLAN loses communication to the primary host. The  
IOLAN will first establish a connection to the primary host. Should the  
connection to the primary host be lost (or never established), the IOLAN will  
establish a connection the backup host. Once connected to the backup, the  
IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection to the Primary host, once this  
is successfully done, it gracefully shuts down the backup connection.  
Default: Disabled  
Primary Host  
TCP Port  
Specify a preconfigured host that the serial device will communicate to through  
the IOLAN.  
Default: None  
Specify the TCP port that the IOLAN will use to communicate to the Primary  
Host.  
Default: 0  
Backup Host  
TCP Port  
Specify a preconfigured host that the serial device will communicate to through  
the IOLAN if the IOLAN cannot communicate with the Primary Host.  
Default: None  
Specify the TCP port that the IOLAN will use to communicate to the Backup  
Host.  
Default: 10000  
Adding/Editing a Multihost Entry  
When you click the Add or Edit button, the Host Entry window appears. The hosts in the multihost  
list must already be defined (see Host Table on page 98 to learn how to create a host). If you add a  
host that was defined with its fully qualified domain name (FQDN), it must be resolvable by your  
configured DNS server.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Host Name  
Specify the preconfigured host that will be in the multihost list.  
Default: None  
138  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
TCP Port  
Specify the TCP port that the IOLAN will use to communicate to the Host.  
Default: 0  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Authenticate User Enables/disables login/password authentication for users connecting from the  
network.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable TCP  
Keepalive  
Enables a per-connection TCP keepalive feature. After the configured number  
of seconds, the connection will send a gratuitous ACK to the network peer,  
thus either ensuring the connection stays active OR causing a dropped  
connection condition to be recognized.  
This parameter needs to be used in conjunction with Monitor Connection  
Status Interval parameter found in the Serial, Advanced, Advanced Settings  
tab. The interval specifies the inactivity period before "testing" the connection.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Message of Enables/disables the display of the message of the day.  
the Day (MOTD)  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Data  
Logging  
When enabled, serial data will be buffered if the TCP connection is lost. When  
the TCP connection is re-established, the buffered serial data will be sent to its  
destination (this option is not available when Monitor DSR, Monitor DCD, or  
Multihost is enabled).  
The data buffer is 4K for desktop models and 32K for rack mount and medical  
unit models. If the data buffer is filled, incoming serial data will overwrite the  
oldest data.  
Default: Disabled  
Idle Timeout  
Use this timer to close a connection because of inactivity. When the Idle  
Timeout expires, the IOLAN will end the connection.  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
Default: 0 seconds so the port will never timeout  
Session Timeout  
Use this timer to forcibly close the session/connection when the Session  
Timeout expires.  
Default: 0 seconds so the port will never timeout  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
140  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Dial In  
If the device is remote and will be dialing in via modem or ISDN TA, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Out  
If you want the modem to dial a number when the serial port is started, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Timeout  
The number of seconds the IOLAN will wait to establish a connection to a  
remote modem.  
Range: 1-99  
Default: 45 seconds  
Dial Retry  
The number of times the IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection with  
a remote modem.  
Range: 0-99  
Default: 2  
Modem  
Phone  
The name of the predefined modem that is used on this line.  
The phone number to use when Dial Out is enabled.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
UDP Sockets Profile  
Overview  
The UDP profile configures a serial port to broadcast UDP data to systems and/or receive UDP data  
from systems.  
Functionality  
When you configure UDP, you are setting up a range of IP addresses and the port numbers that you  
will use to send serial data to the LAN (using UDP) or receive UDP data from the LAN which will be  
forwarded to the serial port.  
When you configure UDP for “LAN to Serial”, the following options are available:  
z
To receive data from a specific IP address, enter this address in the Start IP Address field and  
leave the End IP Address field at its default value (0.0.0.0). For the port, you can enter a  
specific “source” port or leave as 0 to accept any source port.  
z
z
To receive data from a range of IP address, fill in the Start IP Address field with the low IP  
address for the range and the End IP Address field with the high IP address for the range.  
To receive data from any IP address and any UDP port, leave the Start IP Address field, the End  
IP Address field and the Port field at its default value of 0. The IP address on the first UDP  
message received will than be the only IP address accepted from that point on. This is the “auto  
learn” feature of the UDP profile.  
z
If the Start IP Address field is set to 255.255.255.255and the End IP Address is left at its  
default value (0.0.0.0), the IOLAN will accept UDP packets from any source address. If you  
want the IOLAN to receive data only from the first IP address is sees (auto learn the sender IP  
address), leave the Start IP Address field at its default value (0.0.0.0).  
When you configure UDP for “Serial to LAN”, the following options are available:  
z
To send data to a specific IP address, enter this address in the Start IP Address field and leave  
the End IP Address field at its default value (0.0.0.0).  
z
To send data to a range of IP address, fill in the Start IP Address field with the low IP address  
for the range and the End IP Address field with the high IP address for the range. A separate  
UDP message with the same serial data will be sent to each host in the configured range.  
142  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Serial Port Profiles  
An example UDP configuration is described based on the following window.  
The UDP configuration window, taken from the DeviceManager, is configured to:  
z
UDP Entry 1  
All hosts that have an IP address that falls within the range of 172.16.1.1to 172.16.1.25  
and listen to Port 33001will be sent the data from the serial device in UDP format. The serial  
device will only receive UDP data from the hosts in that range with a source Port of 33001. The  
IOLAN will listen for data on the port value configured in the Listen for connections on UDP  
port parameter. (10001 in above example)  
z
z
UDP Entry 2  
All UDP data received from hosts that have an IP address that falls within the range of  
172.16.1.20to 172.16.1.50and Port 33010will be sent to the serial device. The IOLAN  
will not send any data received on its serial port.  
UDP Entry 3  
All hosts that have an IP Address that falls within the range of 172.16.1.75to 172.16.1.80  
and who listen to Port 33009will receive UDP data from the serial device. The IOLAN will  
listen for messages on the port value configured in the Listen for connections on UDP port  
parameter. No UDP data will be sent to the serial device.  
z
UDP Entry 4  
This entry is disabled since Direction is set to Disabled.  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Listen for  
connections on  
UDP port  
The IOLAN will listen for UDP packets on the specified port.  
Default: 1000+<port-number> (for example, 10001 for serial port 1)  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Direction  
The direction in which information is received or relayed:  
z
z
Disabled—UDP service not enabled.  
LAN to Serial—UDP Port can be set to Auto Learn or Port. The IOLAN  
will listen on port value configured in the Listen for connections on UDP  
port parameter for messages coming from the learned or configured port.  
z
z
Serial to LAN—UDP Port can be set to Port only. The IOLAN will listen  
on the port value configured in the Listen for connections on UDP port  
parameter and will send to the configured port.  
Both—Messages are relayed in both directions. UDP Port can be set to  
Auto Learn or Port. For messages coming from the LAN to the serial  
device, IOLAN will listen on port value configured in the Listen for  
connections on UDP port parameter for messages coming from the  
learned or configured port. For messages going from the serial device to  
the LAN, the IOLAN will listen on the port value configured in the Listen  
for connections on UDP port parameter and will send to the configured  
or learned (if Auto Learn is enabled, the IOLAN must receive a UDP  
message before it can send one, since the port must first be ’learned’) port.  
Default: Both for UDP 1 and Disabled for all other UDP ranges  
Start IP Address  
End IP Address  
The first host IP address in the range of IP addresses (for IPv4 or IPv6) that the  
IOLAN will listen for messages from and/or send messages to.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
The last host IP address in the range of IP addresses (for IPv4, not supported  
for IPv6) that the IOLAN will listen for messages from and/or send messages  
to.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
UDP Port  
Determines how the IOLAN’s UDP port that will send/receive UDP messages  
is defined:  
z
Auto Learn—The IOLAN will only listen to the first port that it receives a  
UDP packet from. Applicable when Direction is set to LAN to Serial or  
Both.  
z
z
Any Port—The IOLAN will receive messages from any port sending UDP  
packets. Applicable when Direction is set to LAN to Serial.  
Port—The port that the IOLAN will use to relay messages to  
servers/hosts. This option works with any Direction except Disabled. The  
IOLAN will listen for UDP packets on the port configured by the Listen  
for connections on UDP port parameter.  
Default: Auto Learn  
Port  
The port that the IOLAN will use to relay messages to servers/hosts. This  
option works with any Direction except Disabled. The IOLAN will listen for  
UDP packets on the port configured by the Listen for connections on UDP  
port parameter.  
Default: 0 (zero)  
Terminal Profile  
Overview  
The Terminal profile allows network access from a terminal connected to the IOLAN’s serial port.  
This profile is used to access pre-defined hosts on the network from the terminal.  
144  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Functionality  
This profile can be configured for users:  
z
who must be authenticated by the IOLAN first and then a connection to a host can be  
established.  
z
who are connecting through the serial port directly to a host.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Terminal Type  
Specifies the type of terminal connected to the line.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Dumb  
WYSE60  
VT100  
ANSI  
TVI925  
IBM3151TE  
VT320 (specifically supporting VT320-7)  
HP700 (specifically supporting HP700/44)  
Term1, Term2, Term3 (user-defined terminals)  
Default: Dumb  
Require Login  
When users access the IOLAN through the serial port, they must be  
authenticated, using either the local user database or an external authentication  
server.  
Default: Enabled  
User Service  
Settings Button  
After a user has been successfully authenticated, the IOLAN will connect to  
the specified host using the specified protocol according to:  
z
z
the User Service parameter for locally configured users  
the Default User Service parameter for users who are externally  
authenticated  
z
TACACS+/RADIUS for externally authenticated users where the target  
host is passed to the IOLAN  
See User Service Settings on page 150 for field descriptions of the various  
User Service Settings.  
146  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Connect to Remote When the serial port is started, the IOLAN will initiate a connection to the  
System  
specified host using the specified protocol. With this option, user  
authentication will not be performed by the IOLAN.  
Default: Disabled  
Protocol  
Specify the protocol that will be used to connect to the specified host.  
Data Options: Telnet, SSH, Rlogin  
Default: Telnet  
Settings Button  
Host Name  
TCP Port  
Click this button to define the settings for the protocol that will be used to  
connect the user to the specified host.  
The name (resolvable via DNS) or IP address of the configured host the  
IOLAN will connect to.  
The TCP Port that the IOLAN will use to connect to the host.  
Default: Telnet-23, SSH-22, Rlogin-513  
Automatically  
If the serial port hardware parameters have been setup to monitor DSR or  
DCD, the host session will be started once the signals are detected. If no  
hardware signals are being monitored, the IOLAN will initiate the session  
immediately after being powered up.  
Default: Enabled  
When any data is Initiates a connection to the specified host when any data is received on the  
received  
serial port.  
Default: Disabled  
When <hex value> Initiates a connection to the specified host only when the specified character is  
is received  
received on the serial port.  
Default: Disabled  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable Message of Enables/disables the display of the message of the day.  
the Day (MOTD)  
Default: Disabled  
Reset Terminal on When enabled, resets the terminal definition connected to the serial port when  
disconnect  
a user logs out.  
Default: Disabled  
Allow Port Locking When enabled, the user can lock his terminal with a password using the  
Hotkey Prefix (default Ctrl-a) ^a l (lowercase L). The IOLAN prompts the  
user for a password and a confirmation.  
Default: Disabled  
Hotkey Prefix  
The prefix that a user types to lock a serial port or redraw the Menu.  
Data Range:  
z
^a l—(Lowercase L) Locks the serial port until the user unlocks it. The  
user is prompted for a password (any password, excluding spaces) and  
locks the serial port. Next, the user must retype the password to unlock the  
serial port.  
z
^r—When you switch from a session back to the Menu, the screen may  
not be redrawn correctly. If this happens, use this command to redraw it  
properly. This is always Ctrl R, regardless of the Hotkey Prefix.  
You can use the Hotkey Prefix key to lock a serial port only when the Allow  
Port Locking parameter is enabled.  
Default: Hex 01 (Ctrl-a, ^a)  
148  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Idle Timeout  
Session Timeout  
Dial Timeout  
Dial Retry  
Use this timer to close a connection because of inactivity. When the Idle  
Timeout expires, the IOLAN will end the connection.  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
Default: 0 seconds so the port will never timeout  
Use this timer to forcibly close the session/connection when the Session  
Timeout expires.  
Default: 0 seconds so the port will never timeout  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
The number of seconds the IOLAN will wait to establish a connection to a  
remote modem.  
Range: 1-99  
Default: 45 seconds  
The number of times the IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection with  
a remote modem.  
Range: 0-99  
Default: 2  
Dial In  
If the device is remote and will be dialing in via modem or ISDN TA, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Out  
If you want the modem to dial a number when the serial port is started, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
User Service Settings  
Login Settings  
These settings apply to users who are accessing the network from a terminal connected to the  
IOLAN’s serial port. The Telnet, Rlogin, SSH, SLIP, PPP settings take effect when the connection  
method is defined in the user’s profile (or are passed to the IOLAN by a RADIUS or TACACS+  
server when those authentication methods are being used).  
Configure the following parameters:  
Limit Connection Makes the serial port dedicated to the specified user. The user won’t need to  
to User  
enter their login name - just their password.  
Initial Mode  
Specifies the initial interface a user navigates when logging into the serial port.  
Data Options: Menu, Command Line  
Default: Command Line  
Terminal Pages  
The number of video pages the terminal supports.  
Range: 1-7  
Default: 5 pages  
150  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Telnet Settings  
The Telnet settings apply when the User Service is set to Telnet or the Terminal profile specifies a  
Telnet connection to a host.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Terminal Type  
Type of terminal attached to this serial port; for example, ANSI or WYSE60.  
Enable Local Echo Toggles between local echo of entered characters and suppressing local echo.  
Local echo is used for normal processing, while suppressing the echo is  
convenient for entering text that should not be displayed on the screen, such as  
passwords. This parameter can be used only when Enable Line Mode is  
enabled.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Line Mode When enabled, keyboard input is not sent to the remote host until Enter is  
pressed, otherwise input is sent every time a key is pressed.  
Default: Disabled  
Map CR to CRLF When enabled, maps carriage returns (CR) to carriage return line feed (CRLF).  
Default: Disabled  
Interrupt  
Quit  
Defines the interrupt character. Typing the interrupt character interrupts the  
current process. This value is in hexadecimal.  
Default: 3 (ASCII value ^C)  
Defines the quit character. Typing the quit character closes and exits the  
current telnet session. This value is in hexadecimal.  
Default: 1c (ASCII value FS)  
EOF  
Defines the end-of-file character. When Enable Line Mode is enabled, entering  
the EOF character as the first character on a line sends the character to the  
remote host. This value is in hexadecimal.  
Default: 4 (ASCII value ^D)  
Erase  
Echo  
Defines the erase character. When Line Mode is Off, typing the erase character  
erases one character. This value is in hexadecimal.  
Default: 8 (ASCII value ^H)  
Defines the echo character. When Line Mode is On, typing the echo character  
echoes the text locally and sends only completed lines to the host. This value is  
in hexadecimal.  
Default: 5 (ASCII value ^E)  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Escape  
Defines the escape character. Returns you to the command line mode. This  
value is in hexadecimal.  
Default: 1d (ASCII value GS)  
Rlogin Settings  
The Rlogin settings apply when the User Service is set to Rlogin or the Terminal profile has Require  
Login selected and specifies an Rlogin connection to a host.  
Configure the following parameter:  
Terminal Type  
Type of terminal attached to this serial port; for example, ANSI or WYSE60.  
When Connect to remote system is selected, the Rlogin window requires the name of the user who  
is connecting to the host.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Terminal Type  
User  
Type of terminal attached to this serial port; for example, ANSI or WYSE60.  
This name is passed on to the specified host for the Rlogin session, so that the  
user is only prompted for a password.  
152  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
SSH Settings  
The SSH settings apply when the User Service is set to SSH or the Terminal profile specifies an  
SSH connection to a host.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Terminal Type  
Verbose Mode  
Type of terminal attached to this serial port; for example, ANSI or WYSE60.  
When enabled, displays debug messages on the terminal.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable  
Compression  
When enabled, requests compression of all data. Compression is desirable on  
modem lines and other slow connections, but will only slow down things on  
fast networks.  
Default: Disabled  
Auto Login  
When enabled, creates an automatic SSH login, using the Name and Password  
values.  
Default: Disabled  
Name  
The name of the user logging into the SSH session.  
Field Format: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters, excluding spaces  
Password  
SSH1  
The user’s password when Auto Login is enabled.  
Field Format: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters, excluding spaces  
When enabled, selects an SSH version 1 connection.  
Default: Enabled  
SSH1 Cipher  
Select the encryption method (cipher) that you want to use for your SSH  
version 1 connection:  
Data Options:  
z
z
3DES  
Blowfish  
Default: 3DES  
SSH2  
When enabled, selects an SSH version 2 connection. If both SSH 1 and SSH 2  
are selected, the IOLAN will attempt to make an SSH 2 connection first. If that  
connection fails, it will attempt to connect to the specified host using SSH 1.  
Default: Enabled  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
SSH2 Ciphers  
Opt1-5  
Select the order of negotiation for the encryption method (ciphers) that the  
IOLAN will use for the SSH version 2 connection:  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
3DES  
Blowfish  
AES  
Arcfour  
CAST  
RSA  
DSA  
When enabled, an authentication method used by SSH version 1 and 2. Use  
RSA authentication for the SSH session.  
Default: Enabled  
When enabled, an authentication method used by SSH version 2. Use DSA  
authentication for the SSH session.  
Default: Enabled  
Keyboard  
When enabled, the user types in a password for authentication.  
Authentication  
Default: Enabled  
SLIP Settings  
The SLIP settings apply when the User Service is set to SLIP.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Local IP Address The IPv4 address of the IOLAN end of the SLIP link. For routing to work you  
must enter an IP address in this field. Choose an address that is part of the same  
network or subnetwork as the remote end; for example, if the remote end is  
address 192.101.34.146, your local IP address can be 192.101.34.145. Do not  
use the IOLAN’s (main) IP address in this field; if you do so, routing will not  
take place correctly.  
Remote IP Address The IPv4 address of the remote end of the SLIP link. Choose an address that is  
part of the same network or subnetwork as the IOLAN. If your user is  
authenticated by the IOLAN, this remote IP address will be overridden if you  
have set a Framed IP Address for the user. If your user is authenticated by  
RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Address is set in the RADIUS  
file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in preference to the  
value configured here.  
Subnet Mask  
The network subnet mask. For example, 255.255.0.0. If your user is  
authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Netmask is set  
in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in  
preference to the value configured here.  
154  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
MTU  
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) parameter restricts the size of  
individual SLIP packets being sent by the IOLAN. Enter a value between 256  
and 1006 bytes; for example, 512. The default value is 256. If your user is  
authenticated by the IOLAN, this MTU value will be overridden when you  
have set a Framed MTU value for the user. If your user is authenticated by  
RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-MTU is set in the RADIUS file,  
the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in preference to the value  
configured here.  
Default: 256  
Routing  
Determines the routing mode (RIP, Routing Information Protocol) used on the  
SLIP interface as one of the following options:  
z
z
z
z
None—Disables RIP over the SLIP interface.  
Send—Sends RIP over the SLIP interface.  
Listen—Listens for RIP over the SLIP interface.  
Send and Listen—Sends RIP and listens for RIP over the SLIP interface.  
This is the same function as the Framed-Routing attribute for RADIUS  
authenticated users.  
Default: None  
VJ Compression  
When enabled, Van Jacobson compression is used on this link. When enabled,  
C-SLIP, or compressed SLIP, is used. When disabled, plain SLIP is used. C-  
SLIP greatly improves the performance of interactive traffic, such as Telnet or  
Rlogin.  
If your user is authenticated by the IOLAN, this VJ compression value will be  
overridden if you have set a Framed Compression value for a user. If your  
user is authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-  
Compression is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the  
RADIUS file in preference to the value configured here.  
Default: Enabled  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
PPP Settings  
The PPP settings apply when the User Service is set to PPP.  
Configure the following parameters:  
IPv4 Local IP  
Address  
The IPV4 IP address of the IOLAN end of the PPP link. For routing to work,  
you must enter a local IP address. Choose an address that is part of the same  
network or subnetwork as the remote end; for example, if the remote end is  
address 192.101.34.146, your local IP address can be 192.101.34.145. Do not  
use the IOLAN’s (main) IP address in this field; if you do so, routing will not  
take place correctly.  
IPv4 Remote IP  
Address  
The IPV4 IP address of the remote end of the PPP link. Choose an address that  
is part of the same network or subnetwork as the IOLAN. If you set the PPP  
parameter IP Address Negotiation to On, the IOLAN will ignore the remote IP  
address value you enter here and will allow the remote end to specify its IP  
address. If your user is authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter  
Framed-Address is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in  
the RADIUS file in preference to the value configured here. The exception to  
this rule is a Framed-Address value in the RADIUS file of 255.255.255.254;  
this value allows the IOLAN to use the remote IP address value configured  
here.  
IPv4 Subnet Mask The network subnet mask. For example, 255.255.0.0. If your user is  
authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Netmask is set  
in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in  
preference to the value configured here.  
IPv6 Local  
The local IPv6 interface identifier of the IOLAN end of the PPP link. For  
Interface Identifier routing to work, you must enter a local IP address. Choose an address that is  
part of the same network or subnetwork as the remote end. Do not use the  
IOLAN’s (main) IP address in this field; if you do so, routing will not take  
place correctly.  
Field Format: The first 64 bits of the Interface Identifier must be zero,  
therefore, ::abcd:abcd:abcd:abcd is the expected format.  
156  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
IPv6 Remote  
The remote IPv6 interface identifier of the remote end of the PPP link. Choose  
Interface Identifier an address that is part of the same network or subnetwork as the IOLAN. If  
you enable Negotiate IP Address Automatically, the IOLAN will ignore the  
remote IP address value you enter here and will allow the remote end to  
specify its IP address. If your user is authenticated by RADIUS and the  
RADIUS parameter Framed-Interface-ID is set in the RADIUS file, the  
IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in preference to the value  
configured here.  
Field Format: The first 64 bits of the Interface Identifier must be zero,  
therefore, ::abcd:abcd:abcd:abcd is the expected format.  
ACCM  
Specifies the ACCM (Asynchronous Control Character Map) characters that  
should be escaped from the data stream.  
Field Format: This is entered as a 32-bit hexadecimal number with each bit  
specifying whether or not the corresponding character should be escaped. The  
bits are specified as the most significant bit first and are numbered 31-0. Thus  
if bit 17 is set, the 17th character should be escaped, that is, 0x11 (XON). The  
value 000a0000 will cause the control characters 0x11 (XON) and 0x13  
(XOFF) to be escaped on the link, thus allowing the use of XON/XOFF  
(software) flow control. If you have selected Soft Flow Control on the Serial  
Port, you must enter a value of at least 000a0000 for the ACCM.  
Default: 00000000, which means no characters will be escaped  
MRU  
The Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) parameter specifies the maximum size of  
PPP packets that the IOLAN’s port will accept. If your user is authenticated by  
the IOLAN, the MRU value will be overridden if you have set a MTU value for  
the user. If your user is authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter  
Framed-MTU is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the  
RADIUS file in preference to the value configured here.  
Range: 64-1500 bytes  
Default: 1500  
Authentication  
The type of authentication that will be done on the link. You can use PAP or  
CHAP to authenticate a serial port or user on the IOLAN, from a remote  
location, or authenticate a remote client/device, from the IOLAN.  
When setting either PAP and CHAP, make sure the IOLAN and the remote  
client/device have the same setting. For example, if the IOLAN is set to PAP,  
but the remote end is set to CHAP, the connection will be refused.  
Data Options:  
z
z
None  
PAP—is a one time challenge of a client/device requiring that it respond  
with a valid username and password. A timer operates during which  
successful authentication must take place. If the timer expires before the  
remote end has been authenticated successfully, the link will be  
terminated.  
z
CHAP—challenges a client/device at regular intervals to validate itself  
with a username and a response, based on a hash of the secret (password).  
A timer operates during which successful authentication must take place.  
If the timer expires before the remote end has been authenticated  
successfully, the link will be terminated.  
Default: CHAP  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
User  
Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Authentication field, and  
z
you wish to dedicate this line to a single remote user, who will be  
authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN).  
When Connect is set to Dial Out or both Dial In/Dial Out are enabled, the User  
is the name the remote device will use to authenticate a port on this IOLAN.  
The remote device will only authenticate your IOLAN’s port when PAP or  
CHAP are operating. You can enter a maximum of sixteen alphanumeric  
characters; for example, tracy201. When connecting together two networks,  
enter a dummy user name; for example, DS_HQ.  
Note If you want a reasonable level of security, the user name and password  
should not be similar to a user name or password used regularly to login to the  
IOLAN. External authentication can not be used for this user.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 254 alphanumeric characters.  
Password  
Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Security field and:  
z
you wish to dedicate this serial port to a single remote user, who will be  
authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN)  
Password means the following:  
z
When PAP is specified, this is the password the remote device will use to  
authenticate the port on this IOLAN.  
z
When CHAP is specified, this is the secret (password) known to both ends  
of the link upon which responses to challenges shall be based.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters.  
Remote User  
Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Security field, and  
z
you wish to dedicate this line to a single remote user, who will be  
authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN)  
When Dial In or Dial In/Dial Out is enabled, the Remote User is the name the  
IOLAN will use to authenticate the port on the remote device. Your IOLAN  
will only authenticate the port on the remote device when PAP or CHAP are  
operating. When connecting together two networks, enter a dummy user name;  
for example, DS_SALES.  
Note If you want a reasonable level of security, the user name and password  
should not be similar to a user name or password used regularly to login to the  
IOLAN. This option does not work with external authentication.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 254 alphanumeric characters.  
158  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Remote Password Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Security field, and  
z
you wish to dedicate this serial port to a single remote user, and this user  
will be authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN)  
Remote password means the following:  
z
When PAP is specified, this is the password the IOLAN will use to  
authenticate the remote device.  
z
When CHAP is specified, this is the secret (password) known to both ends  
of the link upon which responses to challenges will be based.  
Remote Password is the opposite of the parameter Password. Your IOLAN  
will only authenticate the remote device when PAP or CHAP is operating.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters.  
Routing  
Determines the routing mode (RIP, Routing Information Protocol) used on the  
PPP interface.This is the same function as the Framed-Routing attribute for  
RADIUS authenticated users.  
Data Options  
z
z
z
z
None—Disables RIP over the PPP interface.  
Send—Sends RIP over the PPP interface.  
Listen—Listens for RIP over the PPP interface.  
Send and Listen—Sends RIP and listens for RIP over the PPP interface.  
Default: None  
Configure Req.  
Timeout  
The maximum time, in seconds, that LCP (Link Control Protocol) will wait  
before it considers a configure requestpacket to have been lost.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 3 seconds  
Configure Req.  
Retries  
The maximum number of times a configure requestpacket will be re-sent  
before the link is terminated.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 10 seconds  
Terminate Req.  
Timeout  
The maximum time, in seconds, that LCP (Link Control Protocol) will wait  
before it considers a terminate requestpacket to have been lost.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 3 seconds  
Terminate Req.  
Retries  
The maximum number of times a terminate requestpacket will be re-sent  
before the link is terminated.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 2 seconds  
Configure NAK  
Retries  
The maximum number of times a configure NAKpacket will be re-sent  
before the link is terminated.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 10 seconds  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Authentication  
Timeout  
The timeout, in minutes, during which successful PAP or CHAP authentication  
must take place (when PAP or CHAP are specified). If the timer expires before  
the remote end has been authenticated successfully, the link will be terminated.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 1 minute  
Roaming Callback A user can enter a telephone number that the IOLAN will use to callback  
him/her. This feature is particularly useful for a mobile user. Roaming callback  
can only work when the User Enable Callback parameter is enabled. Enable  
Roaming Callback therefore overrides (fixed) User Enable Callback.To use  
Enable Roaming Callback, the remote end must be a Microsoft Windows OS  
that supports Microsoft’s Callback Control Protocol (CBCP). The user is  
allowed 30 seconds to enter a telephone number after which the IOLAN ends  
the call.  
Default: Disabled  
Challenge Interval The interval, in minutes, for which the IOLAN will issue a CHAP re-challenge  
to the remote end. During CHAP authentication, an initial CHAP challenge  
takes place, and is unrelated to CHAP re-challenges. The initial challenge takes  
place even if re-challenges are disabled. Some PPP client software does not  
work with CHAP re-challenges, so you might want to leave the parameter  
disabled in the IOLAN.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 0 (zero), meaning CHAP re-challenge is disabled  
Address/Control  
Compression  
This determines whether compression of the PPP Address and Control fields  
take place on the link. For most applications this should be enabled.  
Default: Enabled  
Protocol  
Compression  
This determines whether compression of the PPP Protocol field takes place on  
this link.  
Default: Enabled  
VJ Compression  
When enabled, Van Jacobson Compression is used on this link. If your user is  
authenticated by the IOLAN, this VJ compression value will be overridden if  
you have enabled the User, Enable VJ Compression parameter. If the user is  
authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Compression  
is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in  
preference to the value configured here.  
Default: Enabled  
Magic Negotiation Determines if a line is looping back. If enabled (On), random numbers are sent  
on the link. The random numbers should be different, unless the link loops  
back.  
Default: Disabled  
IP Address  
Negotiation  
Specifies whether or not IP address negotiation will take place. IP address  
negotiation is where the IOLAN allows the remote end to specify its IP  
address. When On, the IP address specified by the remote end will be used in  
preference to the Remote IP Address set for a Serial Port. When Off, the  
Remote IP Address set for the Serial Port will be used.  
Default: Disabled  
160  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Dynamic DNS  
Button  
Launches the Dynamic DNS window when IP Address Negotiation is enabled,  
which can then update the DNS server with the IP address that is negotiated  
and accepted for the PPP session.  
See Dynamic DNS Field Descriptions on page 186 for more information.  
Printer Profile  
Overview  
The Printer profile allows for the serial port to be configured to support a serial printer device that  
can be access by the network.  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameter:  
Map CR to CR/LF Defines the default end-of-line terminator as CR/LF (ASCII carriage-return  
line-feed) when enabled.  
Default: Disabled  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Port Profiles  
Serial Tunneling Profile  
Overview  
The Serial Tunneling profile allows two IOLANs to be connected back-to-back over the network to  
establish a virtual link between two serial ports based on RFC 2217.  
Functionality  
The serial device that initiates the connection is the Tunnel Client and the destination is the Tunnel  
Server, although once the serial communication tunnel has been successfully established,  
communication can go both ways.  
A more detailed implementation of the Serial Tunneling profile is as follows:  
Serial  
Client  
Serial  
Network  
Server  
Tunnel  
IOLAN  
IOLAN  
Tunnel  
The Server Tunnel will also support Telnet Com Port Control protocol as detailed in RFC 2217.  
Serial  
Network  
Server  
Tunnel  
IOLAN  
Running  
2217 Application  
The IOLAN serial port signals will also follow the signals on the other serial port. If one serial port  
receives DSR then it will raise DTR on the other serial port. If one serial port receives CTS then it  
will raise RTS on the other serial port. The CD signal is ignored.  
162  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Port Profiles  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Act As Tunnel  
Server  
The IOLAN will listen for an incoming connection request on the specified  
Internet Address on the specified TCP Port.  
Default: Enabled  
TCP Port  
The TCP port that the IOLAN will listen for incoming connection on.  
Default: 10000+serial port number; so serial port 5 is 10005.  
Enable TCP  
Keepalive  
Enables a per-connection TCP keepalive feature. After the configured number  
of seconds, the connection will send a gratuitous ACK to the network peer,  
thus either ensuring the connection stays active OR causing a dropped  
connection condition to be recognized.  
This parameter needs to be used in conjunction with Monitor Connection  
Status Interval parameter found in the Serial, Advanced, Advanced Settings  
tab. The interval specifies the inactivity period before "testing" the connection.  
Default: Disabled  
Act as Tunnel  
Client  
The IOLAN will initiate the connection the Tunnel Server.  
Default: Disabled  
Host Name  
TCP Port  
A preconfigured host name that is associated with the IP address of the Tunnel  
Server.  
The TCP port that the IOLAN will use to connect to the Tunnel Server.  
Default: 10000+serial port number; so serial port 5 is 10005.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Virtual Modem Profile  
Overview  
Virtual Modem (Vmodem) is a feature of the IOLAN that provides a modem interface to a serial  
device. It will respond to AT commands and provide signals in the same way that a serially attached  
modem would. This feature is typically used when you are replacing dial-up modems with the  
IOLAN in order to provide Ethernet network connectivity.  
Functionality  
The serial port will behave in exactly the same fashion as it would if it were connected to a modem.  
Using AT commands, it can configure the modem and the issue a dial-out request (ATTD). The  
IOLAN will then translate the dial request into a TCP connection and data will be begin to flow in  
both directions. The connection can be terminated by “hanging” up the phone line.  
You can also manually start a connection by typing ATD<ip_address>,<port_number>and end  
the connection by typing +++ATH. The ip_address can be in IPv4 or IPv6 formats and is the IP  
address of the receiver. For example, ATD123.34.23.43,10001or you can use  
ATD12303402304310001, without any punctuation (although you do need to add zeros where there  
are not three digits presents, so that the IP address is 12 digits long).  
164  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Serial Port Profiles  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Listen on TCP Port The IOLAN TCP port that the IOLAN will listen on.  
Default: 10000 + serial port number (for example, serial port 12 defaults to  
10012)  
Connect  
When enabled, automatically establishes the virtual modem connection when  
Automatically At the serial port becomes active.  
Startup  
Default: Enabled  
Host Name  
TCP Port  
The preconfigured target host name.  
The port number the target host is listening on for messages.  
Default: 0 (zero)  
Connect Manually When enabled, the virtual modem requires an AT command before it  
Via AT Command establishes a connection. Specify this option when your modem application  
sends a phone number or other AT command to a modem. The serial device  
can supply an IP address directly or it can provide a phone number that will be  
translated into an IP address by the IOLAN using the mapping table.  
Default: Disabled  
Phone Number to When your modem application provides a phone number in an AT command  
Host Mapping  
string, you can map that phone number to the destination host.  
Button  
See Phone Number to Host Mapping on page 168 for information about the  
window that appears when you click this button.  
Send Connection When enabled, the connection success/failure indication strings are sent to the  
Status As  
connected device, otherwise these indications are suppressed. This option also  
determines the format of the connection status results that are generated by the  
virtual modem.  
Default: Enabled  
Verbose String  
When enabled, the connection status is sent by text strings to the connected  
device.  
Default: Disabled  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Success String  
Failure String  
Numeric Codes  
String that is sent to the serial device when a connection succeeds.  
Default: CONNECT <speed>, for example, CONNECT 9600  
String that is sent to the serial device when a connection fails.  
Default: NO CARRIER  
When enabled, the connection status is sent to the connected device using the  
following numeric codes:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
0 OK  
1 CONNECTED  
2 RING  
3 NO CARRIER  
4 ERROR  
6 ITERFACE DOWN  
7 CONNECTION REFUSED  
8 NO LISTNER  
Default: Enabled  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Echo characters in When enabled, echoes back characters that are typed in (equivalent to  
command mode  
ATE0/ATE1 commands).  
Default: Disabled  
DTR Signal Always Specify this option to make the DTR signal always act as a DTR signal.  
On  
Default: Enabled  
DTR Signal Acts as Specify this option to make the DTR signal always act as a DCD signal.  
DCD  
Default: Disabled  
166  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
DTR Signal Acts as Specify this option to make the DTR signal always act as a RI signal.  
RI  
Default: Disabled  
RTS Signal Always Specify this option to make the RTS signal always act as a RTS signal.  
On  
Default: Enabled  
RTS Signal Acts as Specify this option to make the RTS signal always act as a DCD signal.  
DCD  
Default: Disabled  
RTS Signal Acts as Specify this option to make the RTS signal always act as a RI signal.  
RI  
Default: Disabled  
DCD Signal Always When you configure the DTR or RTS signal pin to act as a DCD signal, enable  
On  
this option to make the DCD signal always stay on.  
Default: Enabled  
DCD Signal On  
when host  
When you configure the DTR or RTS signal pin to act as a DCD signal, enable  
this option to make the DCD signal active only during active communication.  
connection  
established  
Default: Disabled  
Additional modem You can specify additional virtual modem commands that will affect how  
initialization  
virtual modem starts. The following commands are supported: ATQn, ATVn,  
ATEn, +++ATH, ATA, ATI0, ATI3, ATS0, AT&Z1, AT&Sn, AT&Rn,  
AT&Cn, AT&F, ATS2, ATS12, ATO (ATD with no phone number), and  
ATDS1.  
See Appendix C, Virtual Modem AT Commands on page 361 for a more  
detailed explanation of the support initialization commands.  
Enable Message of When enabled, displays the Message of the Day (MOTD) when a successful  
the Day (MOTD) virtual modem connection is made.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable TCP  
Keepalive  
Enables a per-connection TCP keepalive feature. After the configured number  
of seconds, the connection will send a gratuitous ACK to the network peer,  
thus either ensuring the connection stays active OR causing a dropped  
connection condition to be recognized.  
This parameter needs to be used in conjunction with Monitor Connection  
Status Interval parameter found in the Serial, Advanced, Advanced Settings  
tab. The interval specifies the inactivity period before "testing" the connection.  
Default: Disabled  
AT Command  
Response Delay  
The amount of time, in milliseconds, before an AT response is sent to the  
requesting device.  
Default: 250 ms  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Phone Number to Host Mapping  
If your modem application dials using a phone number, you can add an entry in the Phone Number to  
Host Mapping window that can be accessed by all serial ports configured as Virtual Modem. You  
need to enter the phone number sent by your modem application and the IOLAN IP address and TCP  
Port that will be receiving the “call”. 1-port models support up to 4 entries, all other desktop models  
support up to 8 entries, and rack mount and medical unit models support up to 48 entries.  
The following buttons are available:  
Add Button  
Click the Add button to display a window that allows you to configure the  
phone number or AT command your modem application sends and the  
IOLAN’s IP address and TCP port number that is receiving the call.  
Edit Button  
Click on a phone number entry and click the Edit button to change any values  
configured for the phone number.  
Delete Button  
Click on a phone number entry and click the Delete button to remove it from  
the phone number list.  
168  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
VModem Phone Number Entry  
Create an entry in the Phone Number to Host Mapping window.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Phone Number  
Specify the phone number your modem application sends to the modem. Note:  
The IOLAN does not validate the phone number, so it must be entered in the  
exact way the application will send it. For example, if you enter 555-1212 in  
this table and the application sends 5551212, the IOLAN will not match the  
two numbers.  
Host IP Address  
TCP Port  
Specify the IP address of the IOLAN that is receiving the virtual modem  
connection.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Specify the TCP Port on the IOLAN that is set to receive the virtual modem  
connection.  
Default: 0  
Control Signal I/O Profile  
Overview  
The Control Signal I/O profile is only available on IOLAN I/O models. When you configure a serial  
port for Control Signal I/O, you are using the DSR, DCD, CTS, DTR, and RTS serial pins for I/O  
channel Digital Input (DSR, DCD, and CTS) or Digital Output (DTR and RTS).  
Functionality  
The Control Signal I/O profile enables the use of the EIA-232 serial port pins to be used as assigned  
Digital Inputs or Digital Outputs.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Serial Port Profiles  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
The General tab displays the signal pins. This window is also used to enable/disable the signal pins.  
Highlight a signal and then click the Edit button to configure the signal pin’s parameters.  
Input Signal Field Descriptions  
See Digital I/O Extension on page 263 for information about the I/O Extension tab.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Description  
Provide a description of the channel, making it easier to identify.  
Data Options: Maximum 20 characters, including spaces  
Latch  
Latches (remembers) the activity transition (active to inactive or inactive to  
active).  
Data Options: None, Inactive-to-Active, Active-to-Inactive  
Default: None  
Invert Signal  
When enabled, inverts the actual condition of the I/O signal in the status;  
therefore, an inactive status will be displayed as active.  
Default: Disabled  
170  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Trigger  
When the trigger condition is met, triggers the specified alarm action.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Disabled—No alarm settings. This is the default.  
Inactive—When the expected Digital input is active, going inactive will  
trigger an alarm.  
z
Active—When the expected Digital input is inactive, going active will  
trigger an alarm.  
Default: Disabled  
Auto Clear Mode When enabled, automatically clears the alarm when the trigger condition  
changes; for example, if the Trigger is Inactive and the alarm is triggered, once  
the input becomes active again, the alarm will automatically be cleared  
Default: Enabled  
Manual Clear  
Mode  
When enabled, a triggered alarm must be manually cleared.  
Default: Disabled  
Email  
Syslog  
SNMP  
When enabled, sends an email alert to an email account(s) set up in the System  
settings when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The email alert data includes the  
severity level and the value that caused the alarm to trigger or clear. The Email  
Alert is associated with Level Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
When enabled, sends a message to syslog when an alarm is triggered or  
cleared. The syslog entry includes the severity level and the value that caused  
the alarm to trigger or clear. The syslog message is associated with Level  
Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
When enabled, sends an SNMP trap when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The  
trap consists of the severity level and whether the alarm was triggered or  
cleared.  
Default: Disabled  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Output Signal Field Descriptions  
See Digital I/O Extension on page 263 for information about the I/O Extension tab.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Description  
Provide a description of the channel, making it easier to identify.  
Data Options: Maximum 20 characters, including spaces  
Failsafe Action  
When there has been no I/O activity within the specified time (set in the I/O  
Interfaces, Settings on the Failsafe Timer tab) and the Failsafe Timer is  
triggered.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
None—The state of the Digital/Relay output remains the same, no change.  
Activate Output—Activates the channel.  
Deactivate Output—Deactivates the channel.  
Default: None  
172  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Modbus Gateway Profile  
Overview  
Each serial port can be configured as either a Modbus Master gateway or a Modbus Slave gateway,  
depending on your configuration and requirements. If your model supports I/O, see Modbus I/O  
Access on page 278 for more information on using the Modbus protocol to access I/O data.  
Functionality  
The Modbus Gateway profile configures a serial port to act as a Modbus Master Gateway or a  
Modbus Slave Gateway.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Port Profiles  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Mode  
Specify how the Modbus Gateway is defined on the serial port.  
Data Options:  
z
Modbus Master—Typically, the Modbus Master is connected to the  
Serial Port and is communicating to Modbus Slaves on the network.  
z
Modbus Slave—Typically, the Modbus Master is accessing the IOLAN  
through the network to communicated to Modbus Slaves connected to the  
IOLAN’s Serial Ports.  
Default: Modbus Master Gateway  
Destination Slave Click this button to launch the Destination Slave IP Settings window, where  
IP Mappings  
Button  
you can configure the TCP/Ethernet Modbus Slaves that the Modbus Master on  
the Serial Port will communicate with.  
Advanced Slave  
Settings Button  
Click this button to configure global Modbus Slave settings.  
UID Range  
You can specify a range of UIDs (1-247), in addition to individual UIDs.  
Field Format: Comma delimited; for example, 2-35, 50, 100-103  
Modbus/RTU  
Select this option when the Modbus/RTU protocol is being used for  
communication between the Modbus Master and Slave.  
Default: Enabled  
Modbus/ASCII  
Append CR/LF  
Select this option when Modbus/ASCII protocol is being used for  
communication between the Modbus Master and Slave.  
Default: Disabled  
When Modbus/ASCII is selected, adds a CR/LF to the end of the transmission;  
most Modbus devices require this option.  
Default: Enabled  
174  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Advanced Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Idle Timeout  
Use this timer to close a connection because of inactivity. When the Idle  
Timeout expires, the IOLAN will end the connection.  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
Default: 0 (zero), which does not timeout, so the connection is permanently  
open.  
Enable Modbus  
Exceptions  
Click this button to launch the Destination Slave IP Settings window, where  
you can configure the TCP/Ethernet Modbus Slaves that the Modbus Master on  
the Serial Port will communicate with.  
Character Timeout Used in conjunction with the Modbus RTU protocol, specifies how long to  
wait, in milliseconds, after a character to determine the end of frame.  
Range: 10-10000  
Default: 30 ms  
Message Timeout Time to wait, in milliseconds, for a response message from a Modbus TCP or  
serial slave (depending if the Modbus Gateway is a Master Gateway or Slave  
Gateway, respectively) before sending a Modbus exception.  
Range: 10-10000  
Default: 1000 ms  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Modbus Slave IP Settings Field Descriptions  
This window is used to configure the Modbus Slaves.  
The following buttons are available:  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Delete Button  
Adds an entry into the Modbus Destination Slave IP Settings table.  
Edits an entry in the Modbus Destination Slave IP Settings table.  
Deletes an entry from the Modbus Destination Slave IP Settings table.  
176  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Adding/Editing Modbus Slave IP Settings  
Configure the following parameters:  
UID Start  
UID End  
Type  
When Destination is set to Host and you have sequential Modbus Slave IP  
addresses (for example, 10.10.10.1, 10.10.10.2, 10.10.10.3, etc.), you can  
specify a UID range (not supported with IPv6 addresses) and the IOLAN will  
automatically increment the last digit of the configured IP address. Therefore,  
you can specify a UID range of 1-100, and the IOLAN will route Master  
Modbus messages to all Modbus Slaves with IP addresses of 10.10.10.1 -  
10.10.10.100.  
Range: 1-247  
Default: 0 (zero)  
When Destination is set to Host and you have sequential Modbus Slave IP  
addresses (for example, 10.10.10.1, 10.10.10.2, 10.10.10.3, etc.), you can  
specify a UID range (not supported with IPv6 addresses) and the IOLAN will  
automatically increment the last digit of the configured IP address. Therefore,  
you can specify a UID range of 1-100, and the IOLAN will route Master  
Modbus messages to all Modbus Slaves with IP addresses of 10.10.10.1 -  
10.10.10.100.  
Range: 1-247  
Default: 0 (zero)  
Specify the configuration of the Modbus Slaves on the network.  
Data Options:  
z
Host—The IP address is used for the first UID specified in the range. The  
last octet in the IPv4 address is then incremented for subsequent UID’s in  
that range.  
z
Gateway—The Modbus Master Gateway will use the same IP address  
when connecting to all the remote Modbus slaves in the specified UID  
range.  
Default: Host  
Start IP Address  
The IP address of the TCP/Ethernet Modbus Slave.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
End IP Address  
Protocol  
Displays the ending IP address of the TCP/Ethernet Modbus Slaves, based on  
the Start IP address and the UID range (not supported for IPv6 addresses).  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
Specify the protocol that is used between the Modbus Master and Modbus  
Slave(s).  
Data Options: TCP or UDP  
Default: TCP  
UDP/TCP Port  
The destination port of the remote Modbus TCP Slave that the IOLAN will  
connect to.  
Range: 0-65535  
Default: 502  
Modbus Slave Advanced Settings Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
TCP/UDP Port  
The network port number that the Slave Gateway will listen on for both TCP  
and UDP messages.  
Default: 502  
Next Request Delay A delay, in milliseconds, to allow serial slave(s) to re-enable receivers before  
issuing next Modbus Master request.  
Range: 0-1000  
Default: 50 ms  
Enable Serial  
When enabled, a UID of 0 (zero) indicates that the message will be broadcast to  
Modbus Broadcasts all Modbus Slaves.  
Default: Disabled  
Request Queuing When enabled, allows multiple, simultaneous messages to be queued and  
processed in order of reception.  
Default: Enabled  
178  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Embedded  
Remapped  
When this option is selected, the address of the slave Modbus device is  
embedded in the message header.  
Default: Enabled  
Used for single device/port operation. Older Modbus devices may not include a  
UID in their transmission header. When this option is selected, you can specify  
the UID that will be inserted into the message header for the Modbus slave  
device. This feature supersedes the Broadcast feature.  
Default: Disabled  
Remap UID  
Specify the UID that will be inserted into the message header for the Slave  
Modbus serial device.  
Range: 1-247  
Default: 1  
Enable SSL/TLS When enabled, Modbus Slave Gateway messages to remote TCP Modbus  
using global  
settings  
Masters are encrypted via SSL/TLS.  
Default: Disabled  
Power Management Profile  
Overview  
The Power Management profile applies when there is a Perle Remote Power Switch (RPS) connected  
to the serial port. This profile is used to configure the RPS. See RPS Control on page 313 for  
information on how to actively management the RPS.  
Functionality  
The Power Management profile configures a serial port to communicate with a Remote Power  
Switch’s (RPS) administration port. This allows network access to the RPS and permits access to  
statistics and control of the RPS’s power plugs.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Port Profiles  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
RPS Name  
RPS Model  
Specify a name for the RPS.  
Specify the RPS model.  
Data Options: RSP820, RPS830, RPS1620, RPS1630  
Default: RSP820  
Edit Button  
Highlight a plug and then click the Edit button to configure the plug.  
Editing Power Management Plug Settings Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Plug  
Displays the plug number you are configuring.  
Name  
Specify a name for the plug to make it easier to recognize and manage.  
Power Up Interval Specify the amount of time, in seconds, that the RPS will wait before powering  
up a plug. This can be useful if you have peripherals that need to be started in a  
specific order.  
Data Options: .5, 1, 2, 5, 15, 30, 60, 120, 180, 300  
Default: .5 seconds  
180  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port Profiles  
Default State  
Sets the default state of the plug.  
Data Options: On, Off  
Default: Off  
Associated Port  
When a server or router has its console port connected to one of the serial ports  
on this IOLAN and that server/router is also powered by this RPS, the  
server/router serial port number should be entered here. This will give you  
direct access to some RPS commands when managing that server or router  
(using Telnet or SSH).  
Remote Access (PPP) Profile  
Overview  
The Remote Access (PPP) profile configures a serial port to allow a remote user to establish a PPP  
connection to the IOLAN’s serial port. This is typically used with a modem for dial-in or dial-out  
access to the network or a wireless WAN card.  
Functionality  
There are two options for PPP user authentication:  
1. You can configure a specific user/password and a specific remote user/password per a serial port.  
2. You can create a secrets file with multiple users and their passwords that will globally  
authenticate users on all serial ports.  
You can use configure PPP authentication in the configuration or in the secrets file, but not both.  
If you want to use a secrets file, you must download the secrets file to the IOLAN for CHAP or PAP  
authentication; the files must be downloaded to the IOLAN using the names chap-secretsand  
pap-secrets, respectively. The file can be downloaded to the IOLAN under the Custom Files  
option by selecting the Download Other File parameter.  
In the Remote Access (PPP) profile, you must also specify the Authentication option as PAP or  
CHAP on the Authentication tab, but must leave the User, Password, Remote User, and Remote  
Password fields blank.  
An example of the CHAP secrets file follows:  
# Secrets for authentication using CHAP  
# client  
barney  
fred  
server  
fred  
barney  
secret  
acceptable local IP addresses  
flintstone1234567890 192.168.43.1  
wilma  
192.168.43.2  
An example of the PAP secret file follows:  
# Secrets for authentication using PAP  
# client  
barney  
server  
*
secret  
flintstone1234567890  
acceptable local IP addresses  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Serial Port Profiles  
fred  
*
wilma  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
IPv4 Local IP  
Address  
The IPV4 IP address of the IOLAN end of the PPP link. For routing to work,  
you must enter a local IP address. Choose an address that is part of the same  
network or subnetwork as the remote end; for example, if the remote end is  
address 192.101.34.146, your local IP address can be 192.101.34.145. Do not  
use the IOLAN’s (main) IP address in this field; if you do so, routing will not  
take place correctly.  
IPv4 Remote IP  
Address  
The IPV4 IP address of the remote end of the PPP link. Choose an address that  
is part of the same network or subnetwork as the IOLAN. If you set the PPP  
parameter IP Address Negotiation to On, the IOLAN will ignore the remote IP  
address value you enter here and will allow the remote end to specify its IP  
address. If your user is authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter  
Framed-Address is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in  
the RADIUS file in preference to the value configured here. The exception to  
this rule is a Framed-Address value in the RADIUS file of 255.255.255.254;  
this value allows the IOLAN to use the remote IP address value configured  
here.  
IPv4 Subnet Mask The network subnet mask. For example, 255.255.0.0. If your user is  
authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Netmask is set  
in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in  
preference to the value configured here.  
Negotiate IP  
Address  
Automatically  
Specifies whether or not IP address negotiation will take place. IP address  
negotiation is where the IOLAN allows the remote end to specify its IP  
address. When On, the IP address specified by the remote end will be used in  
preference to the Remote IP Address set for a Serial Port. When Off, the  
Remote IP Address set for the Serial Port will be used.  
Default: Disabled  
Dynamic DNS  
Button  
Launches the Dynamic DNS window when IP Address Negotiation is enabled,  
which can then update the DNS server with the IP address that is negotiated  
and accepted for the PPP session.  
See Dynamic DNS Field Descriptions on page 186 for more information.  
182  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
IPv6 Local  
The local IPv6 interface identifier of the IOLAN end of the PPP link. For  
Interface Identifier routing to work, you must enter a local IP address. Choose an address that is  
part of the same network or subnetwork as the remote end. Do not use the  
IOLAN’s (main) IP address in this field; if you do so, routing will not take  
place correctly.  
Field Format: The first 64 bits of the Interface Identifier must be zero,  
therefore, ::abcd:abcd:abcd:abcd is the expected format.  
IPv6 Remote  
The remote IPv6 interface identifier of the remote end of the PPP link. Choose  
Interface Identifier an address that is part of the same network or subnetwork as the IOLAN. If  
you enable Negotiate IP Address Automatically, the IOLAN will ignore the  
remote IP address value you enter here and will allow the remote end to  
specify its IP address. If your user is authenticated by RADIUS and the  
RADIUS parameter Framed-Interface-ID is set in the RADIUS file, the  
IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in preference to the value  
configured here.  
Field Format: The first 64 bits of the Interface Identifier must be zero,  
therefore, ::abcd:abcd:abcd:abcd is the expected format.  
IPv6 Global  
Network Prefix  
You can optionally specify an IPv6 global network prefix that the IOLAN will  
advertise to the device at the other end of the PPP link.  
Default: 0:0:0:0  
IPv6 Prefix Bits  
Specify the prefix bits for the IPv6 global network prefix.  
Default: 64  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Authentication Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Authentication  
The type of authentication that will be done on the link. You can use PAP or  
CHAP to authenticate a serial port or user on the IOLAN, from a remote  
location, or authenticate a remote client/device, from the IOLAN.  
When setting either PAP and CHAP, make sure the IOLAN and the remote  
client/device have the same setting. For example, if the IOLAN is set to PAP,  
but the remote end is set to CHAP, the connection will be refused.  
Data Options:  
z
z
None  
PAP—is a one time challenge of a client/device requiring that it respond  
with a valid username and password. A timer operates during which  
successful authentication must take place. If the timer expires before the  
remote end has been authenticated successfully, the link will be  
terminated.  
z
CHAP—challenges a client/device at regular intervals to validate itself  
with a username and a response, based on a hash of the secret (password).  
A timer operates during which successful authentication must take place.  
If the timer expires before the remote end has been authenticated  
successfully, the link will be terminated.  
Default: CHAP  
User  
Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Authentication field, and  
z
you wish to dedicate this line to a single remote user, who will be  
authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN).  
When Connect is set to Dial Out or both Dial In/Dial Out are enabled, the User  
is the name the remote device will use to authenticate a port on this IOLAN.  
The remote device will only authenticate your IOLAN’s port when PAP or  
CHAP are operating. You can enter a maximum of sixteen alphanumeric  
characters; for example, tracy201. When connecting together two networks,  
enter a dummy user name; for example, DS_HQ.  
Note If you want a reasonable level of security, the user name and password  
should not be similar to a user name or password used regularly to login to the  
IOLAN. External authentication can not be used for this user.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 254 alphanumeric characters.  
184  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Password  
Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Security field and:  
z
you wish to dedicate this serial port to a single remote user, who will be  
authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN)  
Password means the following:  
z
When PAP is specified, this is the password the remote device will use to  
authenticate the port on this IOLAN.  
z
When CHAP is specified, this is the secret (password) known to both ends  
of the link upon which responses to challenges shall be based.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters.  
Remote User  
Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Security field, and  
z
you wish to dedicate this line to a single remote user, who will be  
authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN)  
When Dial In or Dial In/Dial Out is enabled, the Remote User is the name the  
IOLAN will use to authenticate the port on the remote device. Your IOLAN  
will only authenticate the port on the remote device when PAP or CHAP are  
operating. When connecting together two networks, enter a dummy user name;  
for example, DS_SALES.  
Note If you want a reasonable level of security, the user name and password  
should not be similar to a user name or password used regularly to login to the  
IOLAN. This option does not work with external authentication.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 254 alphanumeric characters.  
Remote Password Complete this field only if you have specified PAP or CHAP (security  
protocols) in the Security field, and  
z
you wish to dedicate this serial port to a single remote user, and this user  
will be authenticated by the IOLAN, or  
z
you are using the IOLAN as a router (back-to-back with another IOLAN)  
Remote password means the following:  
z
When PAP is specified, this is the password the IOLAN will use to  
authenticate the remote device.  
z
When CHAP is specified, this is the secret (password) known to both ends  
of the link upon which responses to challenges will be based.  
Remote Password is the opposite of the parameter Password. Your IOLAN  
will only authenticate the remote device when PAP or CHAP is operating.  
Field Format: You can enter a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters.  
Authentication  
Timeout  
The timeout, in minutes, during which successful PAP or CHAP authentication  
must take place (when PAP or CHAP are specified). If the timer expires before  
the remote end has been authenticated successfully, the link will be terminated.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 1 minute  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
CHAP Challenge The interval, in minutes, for which the IOLAN will issue a CHAP re-challenge  
Interval  
to the remote end. During CHAP authentication, an initial CHAP challenge  
takes place, and is unrelated to CHAP re-challenges. The initial challenge takes  
place even if re-challenges are disabled. Some PPP client software does not  
work with CHAP re-challenges, so you might want to leave the parameter  
disabled in the IOLAN.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 0 (zero), meaning CHAP re-challenge is disabled  
Enable Roaming  
Callback  
A user can enter a telephone number that the IOLAN will use to callback  
him/her. This feature is particularly useful for a mobile user. Roaming callback  
can only work when the User Enable Callback parameter is enabled. Enable  
Roaming Callback therefore overrides (fixed) User Enable Callback.To use  
Enable Roaming Callback, the remote end must be a Microsoft Windows OS  
that supports Microsoft’s Callback Control Protocol (CBCP). The user is  
allowed 30 seconds to enter a telephone number after which the IOLAN ends  
the call.  
Default: Disabled  
Dynamic DNS Field Descriptions  
Dynamic DNS can be enabled and configured on a serial port level. If you enable Dynamic DNS and  
leave the parameters blank, the Dynamic DNS system parameters will be used (Network, Advanced,  
Dynamic DNS tab).  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable Dynamic  
DNS for this Serial  
Port  
Enables/disables the ability to register a new IP address with the DNS server.  
Default: Disabled  
Host  
Specify the host name that will be updated with the PPP session’s IP address  
on the DNS server.  
User Name  
Password  
Specify the user name used to access the DNS server.  
Specify the password used to access the DNS server.  
Account Settings  
Button  
Click this button to configure the Dynamic DNS DynDNS.org account  
information.  
See Account Settings on page 106 for information on how to configure the  
Account Settings window.  
186  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Routing  
Determines the routing mode (RIP, Routing Information Protocol) used on the  
PPP interface.This is the same function as the Framed-Routing attribute for  
RADIUS authenticated users.  
Data Options  
z
z
z
z
None—Disables RIP over the PPP interface.  
Send—Sends RIP over the PPP interface.  
Listen—Listens for RIP over the PPP interface.  
Send and Listen—Sends RIP and listens for RIP over the PPP interface.  
Default: None  
ACCM  
Specifies the ACCM (Asynchronous Control Character Map) characters that  
should be escaped from the data stream.  
Field Format: This is entered as a 32-bit hexadecimal number with each bit  
specifying whether or not the corresponding character should be escaped. The  
bits are specified as the most significant bit first and are numbered 31-0. Thus  
if bit 17 is set, the 17th character should be escaped, that is, 0x11 (XON). The  
value 000a0000 will cause the control characters 0x11 (XON) and 0x13  
(XOFF) to be escaped on the link, thus allowing the use of XON/XOFF  
(software) flow control. If you have selected Soft Flow Control on the Serial  
Port, you must enter a value of at least 000a0000 for the ACCM.  
Default: 00000000, which means no characters will be escaped  
MRU  
The Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) parameter specifies the maximum size of  
PPP packets that the IOLAN’s port will accept. If your user is authenticated by  
the IOLAN, the MRU value will be overridden if you have set a MTU value for  
the user. If your user is authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter  
Framed-MTU is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the  
RADIUS file in preference to the value configured here.  
Range: 64-1500 bytes  
Default: 1500  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Configure Request The maximum time, in seconds, that LCP (Link Control Protocol) will wait  
Timeout  
before it considers a configure requestpacket to have been lost.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 3 seconds  
Configure Request The maximum number of times a configure requestpacket will be re-sent  
Retries  
before the link is terminated.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 10 seconds  
Terminate Request The maximum time, in seconds, that LCP (Link Control Protocol) will wait  
Timeout  
before it considers a terminate requestpacket to have been lost.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 3 seconds  
Terminate Request The maximum number of times a terminate requestpacket will be re-sent  
Retries  
before the link is terminated.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 2 seconds  
Configure NAK  
Retries  
The maximum number of times a configure NAKpacket will be re-sent  
before the link is terminated.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 10 seconds  
Enable  
This determines whether compression of the PPP Address and Control fields  
Address/Control  
take place on the link. For most applications this should be enabled.  
Compression  
Default: Enabled  
Enable Protocol  
Compression  
This determines whether compression of the PPP Protocol field takes place on  
this link.  
Default: Enabled  
Enable VJ  
Compression  
When enabled, Van Jacobson Compression is used on this link. If your user is  
authenticated by the IOLAN, this VJ compression value will be overridden if  
you have enabled the User, Enable VJ Compression parameter. If the user is  
authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Compression  
is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in  
preference to the value configured here.  
Default: Enabled  
Enable Magic  
Negotiation  
Determines if a line is looping back. If enabled (On), random numbers are sent  
on the link. The random numbers should be different, unless the link loops  
back.  
Default: Disabled  
Idle Timeout  
Use this timer to close a connection because of inactivity. When the Idle  
Timeout expires, the IOLAN will end the connection.  
Range: 0-4294967 seconds (about 49 days)  
Default: 0 (zero), which does not timeout, so the connection is permanently  
open.  
Direct Connect  
Specify this option when a modem is not connected to this serial port.  
Default: Enabled  
188  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Dial In  
If the device is remote and will be dialing in via modem or ISDN TA, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Out  
Dial In/Out  
If you want the modem to dial a number when the serial port is started, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable this option when you want the serial port to do either of the following:  
z
z
accept a call from a modem or ISDN TA  
dial a number when the serial port is started  
Default: Disabled  
MS Direct Host  
Specify this option when the serial port is connected to a Microsoft Guest  
device.  
Default: Enabled  
MS Direct Guest  
Dial Timeout  
Enable this option when the serial port is connected to a Microsoft Host device.  
Default: Disabled  
The number of seconds the IOLAN will wait to establish a connection to a  
remote modem.  
Range: 1-99  
Default: 45 seconds  
Dial Retry  
The number of times the IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection with  
a remote modem.  
Range: 0-99  
Default: 2  
Modem  
Phone  
The name of the predefined modem that is used on this line.  
The phone number to use when Dial Out is enabled.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Remote Access (SLIP) Profile  
Overview  
The Remote Access (SLIP) profile configures a serial port to allow a remote user to establish a SLIP  
connection to the IOLAN’s serial port. This is typically used with a modem for dial-in or dial-out  
access to the network.  
General Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Local IP Address The IPv4 address of the IOLAN end of the SLIP link. For routing to work you  
must enter an IP address in this field. Choose an address that is part of the same  
network or subnetwork as the remote end; for example, if the remote end is  
address 192.101.34.146, your local IP address can be 192.101.34.145. Do not  
use the IOLAN’s (main) IP address in this field; if you do so, routing will not  
take place correctly.  
Remote IP Address The IPv4 address of the remote end of the SLIP link. Choose an address that is  
part of the same network or subnetwork as the IOLAN. If your user is  
authenticated by the IOLAN, this remote IP address will be overridden if you  
have set a Framed IP Address for the user. If your user is authenticated by  
RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Address is set in the RADIUS  
file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in preference to the  
value configured here.  
Subnet Mask  
The network subnet mask. For example, 255.255.0.0. If your user is  
authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-Netmask is set  
in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in  
preference to the value configured here.  
190  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Port Profiles  
Advanced Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
MTU  
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) parameter restricts the size of  
individual SLIP packets being sent by the IOLAN. Enter a value between 256  
and 1006 bytes; for example, 512. The default value is 256. If your user is  
authenticated by the IOLAN, this MTU value will be overridden when you  
have set a Framed MTU value for the user. If your user is authenticated by  
RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-MTU is set in the RADIUS file,  
the IOLAN will use the value in the RADIUS file in preference to the value  
configured here.  
Default: 256  
Routing  
Determines the routing mode (RIP, Routing Information Protocol) used on the  
SLIP interface as one of the following options:  
z
z
z
z
None—Disables RIP over the SLIP interface.  
Send—Sends RIP over the SLIP interface.  
Listen—Listens for RIP over the SLIP interface.  
Send and Listen—Sends RIP and listens for RIP over the SLIP interface.  
This is the same function as the Framed-Routing attribute for RADIUS  
authenticated users.  
Default: None  
VJ Compression  
When enabled, Van Jacobson compression is used on this link. When enabled,  
C-SLIP, or compressed SLIP, is used. When disabled, plain SLIP is used. C-  
SLIP greatly improves the performance of interactive traffic, such as Telnet or  
Rlogin.  
If your user is authenticated by the IOLAN, this VJ compression value will be  
overridden if you have set a Framed Compression value for a user. If your  
user is authenticated by RADIUS and the RADIUS parameter Framed-  
Compression is set in the RADIUS file, the IOLAN will use the value in the  
RADIUS file in preference to the value configured here.  
Default: Enabled  
Direct Connect  
If the device is remote and will be dialing in via modem or ISDN TA, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Profiles  
Dial In  
If the device is remote and will be dialing in via modem or ISDN TA, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Out  
Dial In/Out  
If you want the modem to dial a number when the serial port is started, enable  
this parameter.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable this option when you want the serial port to do either of the following:  
z
z
accept a call from a modem or ISDN TA  
dial a number when the serial port is started  
Default: Disabled  
Dial Timeout  
Dial Retry  
The number of seconds the IOLAN will wait to establish a connection to a  
remote modem.  
Range: 1-99  
Default: 45 seconds  
The number of times the IOLAN will attempt to re-establish a connection with  
a remote modem.  
Range: 0-99  
Default: 2  
Modem  
Phone  
The name of the predefined modem that is used on this line.  
The phone number to use when Dial Out is enabled.  
192  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Port Profiles  
Custom Application Profile  
Overview  
The Custom App/Plugin profile is used in conjunction with custom applications created for the  
IOLAN by using the Perle SDK. See the SDK Programmer’s Guide (the SDK and guide are  
accessible via a request form located on the Perle website at  
www.perle.com/supportfiles/SDK_Request.shtml) for information about the functions that  
are supported.  
Functionality  
You must download the program and any ancillary files to the IOLAN and set the serial port to the  
Custom App/Plugin profile to actually run a custom application. You must also specify the program  
executable and any parameters you want to pass to the program in the Command Line field. The  
custom application is automatically run when the serial port is started.  
General Tab Field Description  
Configure the following parameter:  
Command Line  
The name of the SDK program executable that has been already been  
downloaded to the IOLAN, plus any parameters you want to pass to the  
program.Use the shellCLI command as described in the SDK Programmer’s  
Guide to manage the files that you have downloaded to the IOLAN. For  
example, using sample outraw program, you would type:  
outraw 192.168.2.1:10001 Acct:10001  
if you were starting the application on a serial port.  
Field Format: Maximum of 80 characters  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Port Buffering  
Port Buffering  
Overview  
The Port Buffering feature allows data activity on the IOLAN’s serial ports to be held in memory for  
viewing at a later stage without affecting the normal operation of the serial ports.  
Port Buffering is only supported on serial port(s) configured for the Console Management  
profile.  
Functionality  
Port Buffering is required by system administrators to capture important information from devices  
attached to the IOLAN. If a device (such as a Router) has a problem and sends a warning message  
out of its console port while no one is connected, the warning can be lost. With Port Buffering  
enabled, the messages will be captured in memory or in a file and can be viewed later to aid  
administrators in diagnosing and fixing problems.  
Local Port Buffering  
Port buffer information for the serial port can be viewed after successful connection to a device on a  
serial port. The user can toggle between communicating to the device on the serial port and viewing  
the port buffer data for that device by entering a the View Buffer String (default ~view). Local port  
buffering is limited to 256Kb and will be flushed after the IOLAN reboots.  
To view the local port buffer for a particular serial port, you must:  
1. Connect to the device on that serial port by Telnet or SSH (the serial port(s) must be set to the  
Console Management profile to support this type of connection).  
2. Once you have established a connection to a device, you can enter the View Buffer String at any  
time to switch the display to the content of the port buffer for that particular serial port.  
3. To return to communicating to the device, press the ESC key and the communication session will  
continue from where you left off.  
To navigate through the port buffer data, the following chart illustrates the keyboard keys or “hot  
keys” that can be used to view the port buffer data. Press the ESC key and to continue to  
communicate with the device on that particular serial port.  
Keyboard  
Page Up  
Page Down  
Home  
Buttons Hot Keys  
<CTRL>B  
Direction  
Up  
<CTRL>F  
Down  
<CTRL>T  
Top of the buffer data (oldest data)  
Bottom of the buffer (latest data)  
Exit viewing port buffer data.  
End  
<CTRL>E  
ESC  
194  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Port Buffering  
Remote Port Buffers  
The Remote Port Buffering feature allows data received from serial ports on the IOLAN to be sent to  
a remote server on the LAN. The remote server, supporting Network File System (NFS), allows  
administrators to capture and analyze data and messages from the serial device connected to the  
IOLAN serial port.  
Remote Port Buffering data can be encrypted or raw and/or time stamped. The data is transmitted to  
an NFS server where a unique remote file is created for each serial port using the configured serial  
port Name for the file name. If the serial port Name parameter is left blank, the IOLAN will create  
unique files using the IOLAN’s Ethernet MAC address and serial port number. It is recommended  
that a unique NFS directory and serial port Name be configured if multiple IOLANs use the same  
NFS host for Remote Port Buffering.  
The filenames will be created on the NFS host with a .ENCextension to indicate data encrypted files  
or .DATfor unencrypted files. If the data is encrypted, the Decoder utility application must be run on  
the NFS server to convert the encrypted data to a readable file for administrators to analyze. The  
Decoder Utility can be found on your installation CDROM or on the Perle website (www.perle.com).  
The data that is sent to the remote buffer file is appended to the end of the file (even through IOLAN  
reboots), so you will want to create a size limit on the file on your remote NFS host, to keep the  
buffer file size from becoming too large for your system.  
Field Definitions  
Port buffering displays or logs data received on the IOLAN serial port.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable Local  
Buffering  
Enables/disables local port buffering on the IOLAN.  
Default: Disabled  
View Port  
Buffering String  
The string used by a a session connected to a serial port to display the port  
buffer for that particular serial port.  
Data Options: Up to an 8 character string. You can specify control  
(unprintable) codes by putting the decimal value in angle brackets < > (for  
example, Escape b is <027>b).  
Default: ~view  
Enable Remote  
(NFS) Buffering  
Enables/disables port buffering on a remote system. When you enable this  
option, you have the ability to save the buffered data to a file(s) (one file is  
created for each serial port) and/or send it to the Syslog host for viewing on the  
Syslog host’s monitor.  
Default: Disabled  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Port Buffering  
NFS Host  
The NFS host that the IOLAN will send data to for its Remote Port Buffering  
feature. The IOLAN will open a file on the NFS host for each serial port  
configured for Console Management, and will send serial port data to be  
written to that file(s).  
Default: None  
NFS Directory  
Encrypt Data  
The directory and/or subdirectories where the Remote Port Buffering files  
will be created. For multiple IOLANs using the same NFS host, it is  
recommended that each IOLAN have its own unique directory to house the  
remote port log files.  
Default: /device_server/portlogs  
Determines if the data sent to the NFS host is sent encrypted or in the clear  
across the LAN.  
NOTE: When NFS encryption is enabled, the Decoder utility software is  
required to be installed on the NFS host for decrypting the data to a readable  
format. The Decoder utility software can be found on the installation CD-ROM  
and on the www.perle.comwebsite.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Port  
When enabled, buffered data is sent to the syslog host to be viewed on the  
Buffering to Syslog host’s monitor.  
Default: Disabled  
Add Time Stamp to Enable/disable time stamping of the serial port buffer data.  
Data  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Key Stroke When enabled, key strokes that are sent from the network host to the serial  
Buffering  
device on the IOLAN’s serial port are buffered.  
Default: Disabled  
196  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced  
Advanced  
Advanced Serial Settings Tab  
Overview  
Advanced serial port settings apply to all serial ports.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Process Break  
Signals  
Enables/disables proprietary inband SSH break signal processing, the Telnet  
break signal, and the out-of-band break signals for TruePort.  
Default: Disabled  
Flush Data Before When enabled, deletes any pending outbound data when a port is closed.  
Closing Serial Port  
Default: Disabled  
Deny Multiple  
Network  
Connections  
Allows only one network connection at a time per a serial port. Application  
accessing a serial port device across a network with get a connection (socket)  
refused until:  
z
z
z
All data from previous connections on that serial port has drained  
There are no other connections  
Up to a 1 second interconnection poll timer has expired  
This also enables a per-connection TCP keepalive feature. After approximately  
3 minutes of network connection idle time, the connection will send a  
gratuitous ACK to the network peer, thus either ensuring the connection stays  
active OR causing a dropped connection condition to be recognized by all peer  
network connections.  
Applications using this feature need to be aware that there can be some  
considerable delay between a network disconnection and the port being  
available for the next connection attempt, allowing any data sent on prior  
connections to be transmitted out of the serial port. Application network retry  
logic needs to accommodate this feature.  
Default: Disabled  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced  
Serial Port Menu When a user connects to the IOLAN through the network, the string used to  
String  
access the Easy Port Access menu without disconnecting the network  
connection.  
Data Options: You can specify control (unprintable) codes by putting the  
decimal value in angle brackets < > (for example, ESC-b is <027>b).  
Default: ~menu  
Session Escape  
String  
When a user connects to the IOLAN through the network, the string is used to  
access the Reverse Session Menu.  
Data Options: You can specify control (unprintable) codes by putting the  
decimal value in angle brackets < > (for example, ESC-b is <027>b).  
Default: <026>s (Ctrl-z s)  
PowerManagement Users accessing the IOLAN through the network can enter the string to bring  
Menu String  
up the Power Bar Management menu.  
Data Options: You can specify control (unprintable) codes by putting the  
decimal value in angle brackets < > (for example, ESC-b is <027>b).  
Default: <016> (Ctrl-p)  
Monitor  
Connection  
Interval Status  
Specify how often, in seconds, the IOLAN will send a TCP Keepalive to  
services that support TCP Keepalive.  
Default: 30 seconds  
198  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced  
Modems Tab  
Overview  
You need to configure a modem if there is a modem connected to the IOLAN. If your IOLAN model  
contains an internal modem or a PCI slot (SCS models) for a modem card, a permanent modem string  
called internal_modem or IOLAN modem, respectively, exists permanently in your configuration.  
Functionality  
Modems are usually configured for PPP/SLIP dial in/out connections, although some modems do  
support raw data communication. When you click on the Modems tab, you will see the following:  
If any modems have been configured, they will be displayed.  
Adding/Editing a Modem  
You can add new modems or edit existing modems through the following window:  
Configure the following parameters:  
Name  
The name of the modem.  
Restrictions: Do not use spaces.  
Initialization String The initialization string of the modem; see your modem’s documentation.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced  
TruePort Baud Rate Tab  
Overview  
The TruePort utility acts as a COM port redirector that allows applications to talk to serial devices  
across a network as though the serial devices were directly attached to the server. For IOLAN I/O  
models, you can also monitor and control I/O through the TruePort client.  
Functionality  
Since some older applications may not support the higher baud rates that the IOLAN is capable of  
achieving, the baud rate can be mapped to a different value on the IOLAN. Through TruePort, you  
can map the baud rate of the host COM port to a higher baud rate for the serial line that connects the  
serial device and the IOLAN. See TruePort on page 391 for more information about the TruePort  
utility.  
Field Definitions  
Configure the following parameter:  
Actual Baud Rate The actual baud rate that runs between the IOLAN and the connected serial  
device.  
Range: 50-230400, you can also specify a custom baud rate  
200  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Users  
Chapter  
8
8
Introduction  
You can configure up to four users in the IOLAN’s local user database  
for all DS, SDS, and STS 1-port to 4-port desktop models, in addition  
to the Admin user. You can configure up to 48 users in the IOLAN’s  
local user database for all STS, SCS, and SDS rack mount models and  
all MDC medical unit models, in addition to the Admin user. A user  
can even represent a device, like a barcode reader or a card swipe  
device, that you want to be authenticated.  
When users are connecting to the IOLAN via serial ports, the user  
database can be used to:  
z
Have the user authenticated prior to establishing a connection to a  
network host.  
z
z
Establish a different connection type to the host specific to each user.  
Create a profile different from the Default user profile.  
When users are connecting to the IOLAN from a network connection, the user database can be used  
to:  
z
z
Provide authentication on the IOLAN prior to establishing a serial connection via PPP or SLIP.  
Authenticate users prior to providing access to a serially attached console port (such as a Unix  
server or router).  
You do not need user accounts for users who are externally authenticated.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Settings  
User Settings  
Overview  
The Users window allows you to add, edit, and delete users from the IOLAN.  
Functionality  
The Users window displays the users who have been configured. You can add users, edit existing  
users, or delete users from this window. See Adding/Editing Users on page 203 for information on  
the parameters available when adding or editing a user.  
202  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adding/Editing Users  
Adding/Editing Users  
General Tab  
Overview  
The General tab configures the basic user information.  
Functionality  
You must, minimally, provide a User Name and Level for a user.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
User Name  
The name of the user.  
Restrictions: Do not use spaces.  
Password  
The password the user will need to enter to login to the IOLAN.  
Confirm Password Enter the user’s password again to verify it is entered correctly.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Adding/Editing Users  
Level  
The access that a user is allowed.  
Data Options:  
z
Admin—The admin level user has total access to the IOLAN. You can  
create more than one admin user account but we recommend that you only  
have one. They can monitor and configure the IOLAN. Users configured  
with this level can access the unit either via serial Terminal Profile  
connection or via a network originated Telnet or SSH connection to the  
IOLAN.  
z
z
Normal—The Normal level user has limited access to the IOLAN.  
Limited CLI commands and Menu access are available with the ability to  
configure the user’s own configuration settings. Users configured with this  
level can access the unit either via serial Terminal Profile connection or  
via a network originated Telnet or SSH connection to the IOLAN.  
Restricted—The Restricted level user can only access predefined sessions  
or access the Easy Port Access menu. Users configured with this level will  
be restricted to pre-defined sessions or limited CLI commands when  
connecting through the serial port via the Terminal Profile. The CLI  
commands are limited to those used for initiating a session. If connection  
to the IOLAN is done with Telnet or SSH from the network, the user will  
be presented with the Easy Port Access menu.  
z
Menu—The menu level user will only be able to access predefined  
session when connecting through a serial port with the Terminal profile or  
will be limited to the Easy Port Access menu when connecting from the  
network. The Easy Port Access allows the user to connect to the accessible  
line without disconnecting their initial connection to the IOLAN. Does not  
have any access to CLI commands.  
When the Admin user logs into the IOLAN, the prompt ends with a #, whereas  
all other users’ prompts ends with a $or £, depending on the character set.  
Default: Normal  
A technique for giving a serially attach user (dial-in or terminal attached), the same menus as  
one that is network connected is to do the following:  
1. Define the serial port with a Terminal Profile using telnet protocol with a direct  
connection to Host IP address 127.0.0.0 (local loop back).  
2. When the user connects to that serial port a Telnet session will be established to the  
IOLAN and the user will appear to have connected from the network.  
204  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding/Editing Users  
Services Tab  
Overview  
The Services tab configures the connection parameters for a user. Any connection parameters  
configured in this window will override the serial port connection parameters.  
Functionality  
When a Terminal profile is set for the serial port and Require Login has been selected, user’s  
accessing the IOLAN through the serial port will be authenticated. Once authentication is successful,  
the Service specified here is started. For example, if the Service Telnet is specified, the IOLAN will  
start a Telnet connection to the specified Host IP/TCP Port after the user is successfully authenticated  
(logs in successfully).  
Within the Terminal profile, there are a number of settings that apply to possible Services. Once it is  
known which user is connected, and which service is to be used, then the settings from both the  
Terminal profile and the user are used. User parameters take precedence over serial port parameters.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Service  
Used in conjunction with the Terminal Profile. After the user has successfully  
been authenticated, the specified service is started.  
Data Options: DSPrompt, Telnet, SSH, RLogin, SLIP, PPP, TCP Raw, SSL  
Raw  
Default: DSPrompt  
Host IP  
When the User Service is set to Telnet or TCP Clear, the target host IP  
address. If no IP address is specified, the Host IP value in the Default User  
configuration will be used.  
Default: None  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Adding/Editing Users  
TCP Port  
When the User Service is Telnet, this is the target port number. The default  
value will change based on the type of Service selected; the most common  
known port numbers are used as the default values.  
IPv4 Address  
Used for User Service PPP or SLIP, sets the IP address of the remote user.  
Enter the address in dot decimal notation as follows:  
z
n.n.n.n—(where n is a number) Enter the IP address of your choice. This  
IP address will then be used in preference to the Remote IP Address set  
for a line.  
The following IP addresses have a special meaning:  
z
255.255.255.254—The IOLAN will use the Remote IP Address set in the  
PPP settings for the serial port that this user is connecting to.  
z
255.255.255.255—When the User Service is PPP, the IOLAN will allow  
the remote machine to specify its IP address (overriding the IP address  
negotiation value configured in the PPP settings).  
z
255.255.255.255—When the User Service is SLIP, the IOLAN will use  
the Remote IP Address set for the line (no negotiation).  
Default: 255.255.255.254  
IPv4 Subnet Mask If the remote user is on a subnet, enter the network’s subnet mask. For  
example, a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0.  
IPv6 Interface  
Indentifier  
Used for User Service PPP, sets the IPv6 address of the remote user. Enter the  
address in IPv6 format.  
Field Format: The first 64 bits of the Interface Identifier must be zero,  
therefore, ::abcd:abcd:abcd:abcd is the expected format.  
MTU  
Used for User Service PPP or SLIP, specifies the maximum size of packets, in  
bytes, being transferred across the link. On noisy links it might be preferable to  
fragment large packets being transferred over the link, since there will a be  
quicker recovery from errors.  
Data Options:  
z
PPP—MTU will be the maximum size of packets that the IOLAN will  
negotiate for this port. This value is negotiated between the two ends of  
the link.  
z
SLIP—MTU will be the maximum size of packets being sent by the  
IOLAN.  
The User MTU value will override the MTU/MRU values set for a Serial Port.  
Range: PPP: 64-1500 bytes, SLIP: 256-1006 bytes  
Default: PPP is 1500 bytes, SLIP is 256 bytes  
Routing  
Determines the routing mode used for RIP packets on the PPP and SLIP  
interfaces. Values are:  
z
z
z
z
None—RIP packets are neither received nor sent by the IOLAN.  
Send—RIP packets can only be sent by the IOLAN.  
Listen—RIP packets can only be received by the IOLAN.  
Send and Listen—RIP packets are sent and received by the IOLAN.  
Default: None  
206  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding/Editing Users  
Enable VJ  
Compression  
Used for User Service PPP or SLIP, determines whether Van Jacobsen  
Compression is used on the link. VJ compression is a means of reducing the  
standard TCP/IP header from 40 octets to approximately 5 octets. This gives a  
significant performance improvement, particularly when interactive  
applications are being used. For example, when the user is typing, a single  
character can be transmitted and thus have the overhead of the full TCP/IP  
header. VJ Compression has minimal effect on other types of links, such as ftp,  
where the packets are much larger. The User VJ Compression option will  
override the VJ Compression value set for a Serial Port.  
Default: Disabled  
Advanced Tab  
Overview  
The Advanced tab is used to configure those parameters that control the user session; this includes  
session length, language, the hotkey used for switching between sessions, access to clustered ports,  
etc.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Idle Timeout  
The amount of time, in seconds, before the IOLAN closes a connection due to  
inactivity. The default value is 0 (zero), meaning that the Idle Timer will not  
expire (the connection is open permanently). The User Idle Timeout will  
override all other Serial Port Idle Timeout parameters.  
Range: 0-4294967  
Default: 0  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adding/Editing Users  
Session Timeout  
The amount of time, in seconds, before the IOLAN forcibly closes a user’s  
session (connection). The default value is 0 (zero), meaning that the session  
timer will not expire (the session is open permanently, or until the user logs  
out). The User Session Timeout will override all other Serial Port Session  
Timeout parameters.  
Range: 0-4294967  
Default: 0  
Enable Callback  
When enabled, enter a phone number for the IOLAN to call the user back (the  
Enable Callback parameter is unrelated to the Serial Port Remote Access  
(PPP) profile Dial parameter).  
Note: the IOLAN will allow callback only when a user is authenticated. If the  
protocol over the link does not provide authentication, there will be no  
callback. Therefore, when the Serial Port profile is set to Remote Access  
(PPP), you must use either PAP or CHAP, because these protocols provide  
authentication.  
The IOLAN supports another type of callback, Roaming Callback, which is  
configurable when the Serial Port profile is set to Remote Access (PPP).  
Default: Disabled  
Phone Number  
Language  
The phone number the IOLAN will dial to callback the user (you must have set  
Enable Callback enabled).  
Restrictions: Enter the number without spaces.  
You can specify whether a user will use English or Custom Language as the  
language that appears in the Menu, CLI, or WebManager. The IOLAN supports  
one custom language that must be downloaded to the IOLAN.  
Default: English  
See Language Support on page 327 for more information about Custom  
Languages.  
Hotkey Prefix  
The prefix that a user types to control the current session.  
Data Options:  
z
^a number—To switch from one session to another, press ^a (Ctrl-a) and  
then the required session number. For example, ^a 2 would switch you to  
session 2. Pressing ^a 0 will return you to the IOLAN Menu.  
z
z
z
z
^a n—Display the next session. The current session will remain active.  
The lowest numbered active session will be displayed.  
^a p—Display the previous session. The current session will remain  
active. The highest numbered active session will be displayed.  
^a m—To exit a session and return to the IOLAN. You will be returned to  
the menu. The session will be left running.  
^a l—(Lowercase L) Locks the serial port until the user unlocks it. The  
user is prompted for a password (any password, excluding spaces) and the  
serial port is locked. The user must retype the password to unlock the  
serial port.  
z
^r—When you switch from a session back to the Menu, the screen may  
not be redrawn correctly. If this happens, use this command to redraw it  
properly. This is always Ctrl R, regardless of the Hotkey Prefix.  
The User Hotkey Prefix value overrides the Serial Port Hotkey Prefix value.  
You can use the Hotkey Prefix keys to lock a serial port only when the serial  
port’s Allow Port Locking parameter is enabled.  
Default: Hex 01 (Ctrl-a or ^a)  
208  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding/Editing Users  
Sessions Tab  
Overview  
The Sessions tab is used to configure specific connections for users who are accessing the network  
through the IOLAN’s serial port.  
Functionality  
Users who have successfully logged into the IOLAN (User Service set to DSprompt) can start up to  
four login sessions on network hosts. These users start sessions through the Easy Port Menu option  
Sessions.  
Multiple sessions can be run simultaneously to the same host or to different hosts. Users can switch  
between different sessions and also between sessions and the IOLAN using Hotkey commands (see  
Hotkey Prefix on page 208 for a list of commands).  
Users with Admin or Normal privileges can define new sessions and use them to connect to Network  
hosts; they can even configure them to start automatically on login to the IOLAN. Restricted and  
Menu users can only start sessions predefined for them in their user configuration.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Adding/Editing Users  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Session 1, 2, 3, 4 You can configure up to four (4) sessions that the user can select from to  
connect to a specific host after that user has successfully logged into the  
IOLAN (used only on serial ports configured for the Terminal profile).  
Data Options:  
z
z
None—No connection is configured for this session.  
Telnet—For information on the Telnet connection window, see Telnet  
Settings on page 151.  
z
z
SSH—For information on the SSH connection window, see SSH Settings  
on page 153.  
RLogin—For information on the RLogin connection window, see Rlogin  
Settings on page 152.  
Default: None  
Settings Button  
Click this button to configure the connection parameters for this session.  
Connect  
Automatically  
Specify whether or not the session(s) will start automatically when the user  
logs into the IOLAN.  
Default: Disabled  
Host  
The host that the user will connect to in this predefined session.  
Default: None  
TCP Port  
The TCP port that the IOLAN will use to connect to the host in this predefined  
session.  
Default: Telnet-23, SSH-22, Rlogin-513  
210  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding/Editing Users  
Serial Port Access Tab  
Overview  
The Serial Port Access tab controls the user’s read/write access on any given IOLAN serial port.  
This pertains to users that are connecting from the network to a serial over a Console Management  
type session.  
This can be useful when you have multiple users connecting to the same serial device and you wish  
to control the viewing and/or the write to and from the device. See the Multisessions and User  
Authentication parameters in the Console Management Profile on page 127 for the serial port  
settings.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Serial Port Access Specifies the user access rights to each IOLAN serial port device. There can be  
multiple users connected to a particular serial device and these settings  
determine the rights of this user for any of the listed serial ports.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Read/Write—The user has read and write access to the serial port.  
Read In—The User will see data going to the serial port, from all  
network-connected users that have write privileges to this serial port.  
z
Read Out—The user will have access to all data originating from the  
serial device.  
Users can read data going in both directions by selecting both the Read In and  
Read Out options.  
Default: Read/Write  
Allow Access to  
Clustered Ports  
When enabled, allows the user access to IOLANs that have been configured in  
the clustering group.  
Default: Enabled  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adding/Editing Users  
212  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Security  
Chapter  
9
9
Introduction  
The Security group includes the following configuration options:  
z
Authentication—When a serial port is configured for the  
Console Management or TCP Sockets profile, the user can be  
authenticated either locally in the IOLAN user profile or  
externally. This option configures the external authentication  
server. See Authentication on page 213 for more information.  
z
z
SSH—This configuration window configures the SSH server in  
the IOLAN. See SSH on page 223 for more information.  
SSL/TLS—This configuration window configures global  
SSL/TLS settings, which can be overridden on the serial port  
level. See SSL/TLS on page 226 for more information.  
z
z
VPN—This configuration window configures the Virtual Personal Network (VPN) IPsec and  
L2TP/IPsec tunnel parameters. See VPN on page 231 for more information.  
Services—This configuration window is used to enable/disabled client and daemon services that  
run in the IOLAN. See Services on page 240 for more information.  
Authentication  
Authentication can be handled by the IOLAN or through an external authentication server.  
Authentication is different from authorization, which can restrict a user’s access to the network  
(although this can be done through the concept of creating sessions for a user, see Sessions Tab on  
page 209 for more information). Authentication ensures that the user is defined within the  
authentication database—with the exception of using the Guest authentication option under Local  
Authentication, which can accept any user ID as long as the user knows the configured password.  
For external authentication, the IOLAN supports RADIUS, Kerberos, LDAP, TACACS+, SecurID,  
and NIS. You can specify a primary authentication method and a secondary authentication method. If  
the primary authentication method fails (cannot connect to the server or authentication fails), the  
secondary authentication method is tried (unless you enable the Only Use as backup option, in  
which case the secondary authentication method will be tried only when the IOLAN cannot  
communicate with the primary authentication host). This allows you to specify two different  
authentication methods. If you do specify two different authentication methods, the user will be  
prompted for his/her username once, but will be prompted for a password for each authentication  
method tried. For example, user Alfred’s user ID is maintained in the secondary authentication  
database, therefore, he will be prompted for his password twice, because he is not in the primary  
authentication database.  
Unlike the other external authentication methods, RADIUS and TACACS+ can also send back Serial  
Port and User parameters that are used for the duration of the connection. Therefore, any parameters  
configured by RADIUS or TACACS+ will override the same parameters configured in the IOLAN.  
See Appendix A, RADIUS and TACACS+ on page 347 for more information.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Authentication  
Authentication  
In the Authentication window, you can select up to two methods of authentication made up of  
external authentication options and/or the local user database.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Primary  
The first authentication method that the IOLAN attempts.  
Authentication  
Method  
Data Options: Local, RADIUS, Kerberos, LDAP, TACACS+, SecurID, NIS  
Default: Local  
Secondary  
Authentication  
Method  
If the Primary Authentication Method fails, the next authentication method  
that the IOLAN attempts. You can choose to use authentication methods in  
combination. For example, you can specify the Primary Authentication  
Method as Local and the Secondary Authentication Method as RADIUS.  
Therefore, some users can be defined in the IOLAN (Local) others in RADIUS.  
Data Options: None, Local, RADIUS, Kerberos, LDAP, TACACS+, SecurID,  
NIS  
Default: None  
Settings Button  
Click this button to configure the authentication method.  
Only use as backup The secondary authentication method will be tried only when the IOLAN  
cannot communicate with the primary authentication host.  
Default: Disabled  
Only authenticate When enabled, the IOLAN will only authenticate the admin user in the local  
admin user in the user database, regardless of any external authentication methods configured.  
local database  
When disabled, a user called admin must exist when only external  
authentication methods are configured, or you will not be able to access the  
IOLAN as the admin user, except through the console port.  
Default: Enabled  
214  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Authentication  
Local  
Overview  
When Local authentication is selected, the user must either be configured in the IOLAN’s User List  
or you must enable Guest users.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable Guest Mode Allow users who are not defined in the Users database to log into the IOLAN  
with any user ID and the specified password. Guest users inherit their settings  
from the Default User’s configuration.  
Default: Disabled  
Guest Password  
The password that Guest users must use to log into the IOLAN.  
Confirm Password Type the Guest Password in again to verify that it is correct.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication  
RADIUS  
Overview  
RADIUS is an authentication method that the IOLAN supports that can send back User information;  
see RADIUS on page 347 for more information on the User parameters that can be sent back by  
RADIUS.  
General Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
First Authentication Name of the primary RADIUS authentication host.  
Host  
Default: None  
Second  
Name of the secondary RADIUS authentication host, should the first RADIUS  
Authentication Host host fail to respond.  
Default: None  
Secret  
The secret (password) shared between the IOLAN and the RADIUS  
authentication host.  
Authentication Port The port that the RADIUS host listens to for authentication requests.  
Default: 1812  
Enable Accounting Enables/disables RADIUS accounting.  
Default: Disabled  
First Accounting  
Host  
Name of the primary RADIUS accounting host.  
Default: None  
Second Accounting Name of the secondary RADIUS accounting host.  
Host  
Default: None  
Secret  
The secret (password) shared between the IOLAN and the RADIUS accounting  
host.  
216  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication  
Account Port  
The port that the RADIUS host listens to for accounting requests.  
Default: 1813  
Enable Accounting Enables/disables whether or not the IOLAN validates the RADIUS accounting  
Authenticator  
response.  
Default: Enabled  
Retry  
The number of times the IOLAN tries to connect to the RADIUS server before  
erroring out.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 5  
Timeout  
The time, in seconds, that the IOLAN waits to receive a reply after sending out  
a request to a RADIUS accounting or authentication host. If no reply is  
received before the timeout period expires, the IOLAN will retry the same host  
up to and including the number of retry attempts.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 3 seconds  
Attributes Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
NAS-Identifier  
This is the string that identifies the Network Address Server (NAS) that is  
originating the Access-Request to authenticate a user.  
Field Format: Maximum 31 characters, including spaces  
Automatically  
When enabled, the IOLAN will send the IOLAN’s Ethernet 1 IPv4 address to  
determine NAS-IP- the RADIUS server.  
Address  
Default: Enabled  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Authentication  
Use the following When enabled, the IOLAN will send the specified IPv4 address to the RADIUS  
NAS-IP-Address  
server.  
Default: Disabled  
IP Address  
The IPv4 address that the IOLAN will send to the RADIUS server.  
Default: 0.0.0.0  
Automatically  
determine NAS-  
IPv6-Address  
When enabled, the IOLAN will send the IOLAN’s IPv6 address to the  
RADIUS server.  
Default: Enabled  
Use the following When enabled, the IOLAN will send the specified IPv6 address to the RADIUS  
NAS-IPv6-Address server.  
Default: Disabled  
IPv6 Address  
The IPv6 address that the IOLAN will send to the RADIUS server.  
Field Format: IPv6 address  
Kerberos  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Realm  
The Kerberos realm is the Kerberos host domain name, in upper-case letters.  
KDC Domain  
The name of a host running the KDC (Key Distribution Center) for the  
specified realm. The host name that you specify must either be defined in the  
IOLAN’s Host Table before the last reboot or be resolved by DNS.  
KDC Port  
The port that the Kerberos server listens to for authentication requests.  
Default: 88  
218  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Authentication  
LDAP  
Overview  
If you are using LDAP with TLS, you need to download a CA list to the IOLAN that includes the  
certificate authority (CA) that signed the LDAP certificate on the LDAP host by selecting Tools,  
Advanced, Keys and Certificates. See Keys and Certificates on page 242 for more information on  
the LDAP certificate.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Host Name  
The name or IP address of the LDAP host. If you use a host name, that host  
must either have been defined in the IOLAN’s Host Table before the last  
reboot or be resolved by DNS. If you are using TLS, you must enter the same  
string you used to create the LDAP certificate that resides on your LDAP  
server.  
Port  
The port that the LDAP host listens to for authentication requests.  
Default: 389  
Base  
The domain component (dc) that is the starting point for the search for user  
authentication.  
Enable TLS  
Enables/disables the Transport Layer Security (TLS) with the LDAP host.  
Default: Disabled  
TLS Port  
Specify the port number that LDAP will use for TLS.  
Default: 636  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication  
TACACS+  
Overview  
TACACS+ is an authentication method that the IOLAN supports that can send back User  
information; see Appendix , TACACS+ on page 354 for more information on the User parameters  
that can be sent back by TACACS+.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Authentication/  
Authorization  
Primary Host  
The primary TACACS+ host that is used for authentication.  
Default: None  
Authentication/  
Authorization  
Secondary Host  
The secondary TACACS+ host that is used for authentication, should the  
primary TACACS+ host fail to respond.  
Default: None  
Authentication/  
The port number that TACACS+ listens to for authentication requests.  
Authorization Port  
Default: 49  
Authentication/  
Authorization  
Secret  
The TACACS+ shared secret is used to encrypt/decrypt TACACS+ packets in  
communications between two devices. The shared secret may be any  
alphanumeric string. Each shared secret must be configured on both client and  
server sides.  
Enable  
Authorization  
Enables authorization on the TACACS+ host, meaning that IOLAN-specific  
parameters set in the TACACS+ configuration file can be passed to the IOLAN  
after authentication.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable Accounting Enables/disables TACACS+ accounting.  
Default: Disabled  
Accounting  
The primary TACACS+ host that is used for accounting.  
Primary Host  
Default: None  
220  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication  
Accounting  
Secondary Host  
The secondary TACACS+ host that is used for accounting, should the primary  
accounting TACACS+ host fail to respond.  
Default: None  
Accounting Port  
The port number that TACACS+ listens to for accounting requests.  
Default: 49  
Accounting Secret The TACACS+ shared secret is used to encrypt/decrypt TACACS+ packets in  
communications between two devices. The shared secret may be any  
alphanumeric string. Each shared secret must be configured on both client and  
server sides.  
SecurID  
Overview  
If you need to reset the SecurID secret, select Tools, Reset, Reset SecurID Node Secret.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Primary/Master  
Host  
The first SecurID server that is tried for user authentication.  
Default: None  
Replica/Slave Host If the first SecurID server does not respond to an authentication request, this is  
the next SecurID server that is tried for user authentication.  
Default: None  
UDP Port  
The port number that SecurID listens to for authentication requests.  
Default: 5500  
Encryption Type  
The type of encryption that will be used for SecurID server communication.  
Data Options: DES, SDI  
Default: SDI  
s
Legacy  
If you are running SecurID 3.x or 4.x, you need to run in Legacy Mode. If you  
are running SecurID 5.x or above, do not select Legacy Mode.  
Default: Disabled  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication  
NIS  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
NIS Domain  
The NIS domain name.  
Primary NIS Host The primary NIS host that is used for authentication.  
Default: None  
Secondary NIS Host The secondary NIS host that is used for authentication, should the primary NIS  
host fail to respond.  
Default: None  
222  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SSH  
SSH  
Overview  
The IOLAN contains SSH Server software that you need to configure if the IOLAN is going to be  
accessed via SSH. If you specify more than one Authentication method and/or Cipher, the IOLAN  
will negotiate with the client and use the first authentication method and cipher that is compatible  
with both systems.  
Functionality  
When you are using the SSH connection protocol, keys need to be distributed to all users and the  
IOLAN. Below are a couple of example scenarios for key/certificate distribution.  
Users Logging into the IOLAN Using SSH  
This scenario applies to serial ports configured for Console Management using the SSH protocol. In  
the following example, users are connecting to the IOLAN via SSH from the LAN. Therefore, the  
following keys need to be exchanged:  
z
Upload the IOLAN SSH Public Key to each user’s host machine who is connecting and logging  
into the IOLAN using SSH.  
z
Download the SSH Public Key from each user’s host machine who is connecting and logging  
into the IOLAN using SSH.  
Lynn  
Device Server Public Key  
Lynn Private Key  
Tracy  
Device Server Public Key  
Tracy Private Key  
SSH  
Network  
Device Server  
Device Server Private Key  
Lynn Public Key  
Dennis  
Device Server Public Key  
Dennis Private Key  
Server  
Tracy Public Key  
Dennis Public Key  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SSH  
Users Passing Through the IOLAN Using SSH (Dir/Sil)  
This scenario applies to serial ports configured for the Terminal profile and are required to login to  
the IOLAN. The user’s service is set to the SSH protocol, therefore, users first log into the IOLAN  
and then are connected to a specified host (configured for the user when User Service SSH is  
selected) through an SSH connection. Lynn and Tracy automatically connect to the HR Server and  
Dennis automatically connects to the Development Server via SSH through the IOLAN. All the SSH  
negotiation is being done between the IOLAN and the target servers, therefore, the following keys  
need to be exchanged:  
z
Download the SSH Host Public Key to the IOLAN for each of the hosts that the IOLAN is  
connecting to.  
z
z
Download the SSH User Private Key for each user whose User Service is set to SSH.  
Copy the SSH User Public Key to the host that the user is connecting to (this is done outside the  
scope of the IOLAN).  
Lynn  
Tracy  
Sales Server  
SSH  
Device Server  
Sales Server Private Key  
Dennis Public Key  
Sales Server Public Key  
HR Server Public Key  
Lynn Private Key  
Dennis  
Tracy Private Key  
Dennis Private Key  
HR Server  
HR Server Private Key  
Lynn Public Key  
Tracy Public Key  
224  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSH  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Allow SSH-1  
Protocol  
Allows the user’s client to negotiate an SSH-1 connection, in addition to SSH-  
2.  
Default: Disabled  
RSA  
DSA  
When a client SSH session requests RSA authentication, the IOLAN’s SSH  
server will authenticate the user via RSA.  
Default: Enabled  
When a client SSH session requests DSA authentication, the IOLAN’s SSH  
server will authenticate the user via DSA.  
Default: Enabled  
Keyboard-  
Interactive  
The user types in a password for authentication.  
Default: Enabled  
Password  
3DES  
The user types in a password for authentication.  
Default: Enabled  
The IOLAN SSH server’s 3DES encryption is enabled/disabled.  
Default: Enabled  
CAST  
The IOLAN SSH server’s CAST encryption is enabled/disabled.  
Default: Enabled  
Blowfish  
Arcfour  
AES  
The IOLAN SSH server’s Blowfish encryption is enabled/disabled.  
Default: Enabled  
The IOLAN SSH server’s Arcfour encryption is enabled/disabled.  
Default: Enabled  
The IOLAN SSH server’s AES encryption is enabled/disabled.  
Default: Enabled  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSL/TLS  
Break String  
The break string used for inband SSH break signal processing. A break signal  
is generated on a specific serial port only when the server's break option is  
enabled and the user currently connected using reverse SSH has typed the  
break string exactly.  
Field Format: maximum 8 characters  
Default: ~break, where ~ is tilde  
Enable Verbose  
Output  
Displays debug messages on the terminal.  
Default: Disabled  
Allow Compression Requests compression of all data. Compression is desirable on modem lines  
and other slow connections, but will only slow down things on fast networks.  
Default: Disabled  
SSL/TLS  
Overview  
When SSL/TLS is configured, data is encrypted between the IOLAN and the host/device (which must  
also support SSL/TLS). When you configure the SSL/TLS settings in the System section, you are  
configuring the default global SSL/TLS settings; you are not configuring an SSL/TLS server.  
Functionality  
You can create an encrypted connection using SSL/TLS for the following profiles: TruePort, TCP  
Sockets, Terminal (the user’s Service must be set to SSL_Raw), Serial Tunneling, Virtual Modem,  
and Modbus.  
When configuring SSL/TLS, the following configuration options are available:  
z
z
You can set up the IOLAN to act as an SSL/TLS client or server.  
There is an extensive selection of SSL/TLS ciphers that you can configure for your SSL/TLS  
connection; Appendix B, SSL/TLS Ciphers on page 359 for a list of SSL/TLS ciphers.  
z
You can enable peer certificate validation, for which you must supply the validation criteria that  
was used when creating the peer certificate (this is case sensitive).  
See Keys and Certificates on page 242 for information about SSL/TLS support documents.  
226  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SSL/TLS  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
SSL/TLS Version Specify whether you want to use:  
z
Any—The IOLAN will try a TLSv1 connection first. If that fails, it will  
try an SSLv3 connection. If that fails, it will try an SSLv2 connection.  
z
z
TLSv1—The connection will use only TLSv1.  
SSLv3—The connection will use only SSLv3.  
Default: Any  
SSL/TLS Type  
Specify whether the IOLAN serial port will act as an SSL/TLS client or server.  
Default: Client  
Cipher Suite Button Click this button to specify SSL/TLS connection ciphers.  
Validate Peer  
Certificate  
Enable this option when you want the Validation Criteria to match the Peer  
Certificate for authentication to pass. If you enable this option, you need to  
download an SSL/TLS certificate authority (CA) list file to the IOLAN.  
Default: Disabled  
Validation Criteria Click this button to create peer certificate validation criteria that must be met  
Button  
for a valid SSL/TLS connection.  
SSL Certificate  
Passphrase  
This is the SSL/TLS passphrase used to generate an encrypted RSA/DSA  
private key. This private key and passphrase are required for both HTTPS and  
SSL/TLS connections, unless an unencrpyted private key was generated, then  
the SSL passphrase is not required. Make sure that you download the SSL  
private key and certificate if you are using the secure HTTP option (HTTPS) or  
SSL/TLS. If both RSA and DSA private keys are downloaded to the IOLAN,  
they need to be generated using the same SSL passphrase for both to work.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSL/TLS  
Cipher Suite Field Descriptions  
The SSL/TLS cipher suite is used to encrypt data between the IOLAN and the client. You can specify  
up to five cipher groups.  
The following buttons are available on the Cipher Suite window:  
Add Button  
Adds a cipher to the cipher list.  
Edit Button  
Edits a cipher in the cipher list.  
Delete Button  
Move Up Button  
Deletes a cipher from the cipher list.  
Moves a cipher up in preference in the cipher list.  
Move Down Button Moves a cipher down in preference in the cipher list.  
228  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSL/TLS  
Adding/Editing a Cipher  
See Appendix B, SSL/TLS Ciphers on page 359 for a list of valid SSL/TLS ciphers.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Encryption  
Select the type of encryption that will be used for the SSL connection.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Any—Will use the first encryption format that can be negotiated.  
AES  
3DES  
DES  
ARCFOUR  
ARCTWO  
Default: Any  
Min Key Size  
Max Key Size  
Key Exchange  
The minimum key size value that will be used for the specified encryption  
type.  
Data Options: 40, 56, 64, 128, 168, 256  
Default: 40  
The maximum key size value that will be used for the specified encryption  
type.  
Data Options: 40, 56, 64, 128, 168, 256  
Default: 256  
The type of key to exchange for the encryption format.  
Data Options:  
z
Any—Any key exchange that is valid is used (this does not, however,  
include ADH keys).  
z
z
RSA—This is an RSA key exchange using an RSA key and certificate.  
EDH-RSA—This is an EDH key exchange using an RSA key and  
certificate.  
z
z
EDH-DSS—This is an EDH key exchange using a DSA key and  
certificate.  
ADH—This is an anonymous key exchange which does not require a  
private key or certificate. Choose this key if you do not want to  
authenticate the peer device, but you want the data encrypted on the  
SSL/TLS connection.  
Default: Any  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSL/TLS  
HMAC  
Select the key-hashing for message authentication method for your encryption  
type.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
Any  
MD5  
SHA1  
Default: Any  
Validation Criteria Field Descriptions  
If you choose to configure validation criteria, then the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate  
must match exactly the information configured in this window in order to pass peer authentication  
and create a valid SSL/TLS connection.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Country  
A country code; for example, US. This field is case sensitive in order to  
successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Two characters  
State/Province  
Locality  
An entry for the state/province; for example, IL. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters  
An entry for the location; for example, Chicago. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters  
Organization  
An entry for the organization; for example, Accounting. This field is case  
sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer SSL/TLS  
certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
Organization Unit An entry for the unit in the organization; for example, Payroll. This field is  
case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer  
SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
230  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VPN  
Common Name  
Email  
An entry for common name; for example, the host name or fully qualified  
domain name. This field is case sensitive in order to successfully match the  
information in the peer SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
An entry for an email address; for example, [email protected]. This field  
is case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the peer  
SSL/TLS certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters  
VPN  
Overview  
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) creates a secure, dedicated communications network tunnelled  
through another network.  
You can configure the IOLAN for:  
z
z
z
z
a host-to-host Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection  
a host-to-network VPN connection  
a network-to-network VPN connection  
or host/network-to-IOLAN VPN connection (allowing serial devices connected to the IOLAN to  
communicate data to a host/network).  
In addition to being able to configure up to 64 IPsec tunnels, you can configure an L2TP/IPsec tunnel  
that will allow hosts to create a VPN tunnel to the IOLAN. The L2TP/IPsec VPN protocol is required  
by the Windows XP operating system.Windows Vista and Server 2008 support both VPN protocols.  
Before you enable/configure any VPN tunnels, you should configure any exceptions or you  
might not be able to access the IOLAN except through a VPN tunnel or the console port. See  
Exceptions on page 238 for more information about exceptions.  
Note:  
If you are configuring IPsec and/or L2TP/IPsec, you must also enable the IPsec service  
found in Security, Services navigation tree.  
Functionality  
The information in this section applies only to setting up IPsec VPN tunnels, not L2TP/IPsec VPN  
tunnels.  
The IOLAN can be configured as a VPN gateway using the IPsec protocol. You can configure the  
VPN connection using two IOLANs as the local and remote VPN gateways or the IOLAN as the  
local VPN gateway and a host/server running the VPN software as the remote VPN gateway.  
If the VPN tunnel is being configured for an IPv6 network that is going through a router(s), the  
router(s) must have manual IPv6 address entry capability, similar to what Windows Vista provides.  
VPN servers/clients can support various VPN parameters. However, the following parameters are  
REQUIRED to be set to the following values to support a VPN tunnel between the IOLAN and a  
VPN server/client:  
perfect forward secrecy: no  
protocol: ESP  
mode: tunnel (not transport)  
opportunistic encryption: no  
aggressive mode: no  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VPN  
IKE Phase 1 Proposals  
The following IKE Phase 1 proposals are supported by the IOLAN VPN gateway:  
z
z
z
Ciphers—3DES, AES  
Hashes—MD5, SHA1  
Diffie-Hellman Groups—2 (MODP1024), 5 (MODP1536), 14 (MODP2048), 15 (MODP3072),  
16 (MODP4096), 17 (MODP6144), 18 (MODP8192)  
ESP Phase 2 Proposals  
The following ESP Phase 2 proposals are supported by the IOLAN VPN gateway:  
z
z
Ciphers—3DES, AES  
Authentication Algorithms—MD5, SHA1, SHA2  
IPsec  
When an IPsec tunnel becomes active, you are requiring that all access to the IOLAN go through the  
configured IPsec tunnel(s), so you must configure any exceptions first (see Exceptions on page 238  
for more information on exceptions) or you will not be able to access the IOLAN through the  
network unless you are configured to go through the IPsec tunnel (you can still access the IOLAN  
through the Console port).  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available:  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Delete Button  
Click this button to add a new IPsec VPN tunnel.  
Select an existing IPsec VPN tunnel to edit the tunnel’s parameters.  
Select an existing IPsec VPN tunnel to remove the tunnel.  
232  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VPN  
Adding/Editing the IPsec Tunnel  
When you click the Add button or select an IPsec tunnel and click the Edit button, the following  
window is displayed:  
Configure the following parameters:  
Name  
Provide a name for the IPsec VPN tunnel to make it easy to identify.  
Text Characteristics: Maximum of 16 characters, spaces not allowed  
Authentication  
Method  
Specify the authentication method that will be used between VPN peers to  
authenticate the VPN tunnel.  
Data Options:  
z
Shared Secret—A text-based secret that is used to authenticate the IPsec  
tunnel (case sensitive). This applies to all VPN tunnels (IPsec and  
L2TP/IPsec).  
z
RSA Signature—RSA signatures are used to authenticate the IPsec  
tunnel. When using this authentication method, you must download the  
IPsec RSA public key to the IOLAN and upload the IPsec RSA public key  
from the IOLAN to the VPN gateway.  
z
X.509 Certificate—X.509 certificates are used to authenticate the IPsec  
tunnel. When using this authentication method, you must include the  
signing authority’s certificate information in the SSL/TLS CA list and  
download it to the IOLAN.  
Default: Shared Secret  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VPN  
Secret/Remote  
Validation Criteria  
Button  
Depending on the Authentication Method:  
Shared Secret—Specify the text-based secret that is used to authenticate the  
IPsec tunnel (case sensitive). This applies to all VPN tunnels (IPsec and  
L2TP/IPsec).  
X.509 Certificate—Specify the remote X.509 certificate validation criteria that  
must match for successful authentication (case sensitive). Note that all  
validation criteria must be configured to match the X.509 certificate. An  
asterisk (*) is valid as a wildcard.  
See Shared Secret Field Description on page 235 for more information.  
See Remote Validation Criteria Field Descriptions on page 236 for more  
information on the X.509 certificate validation criteria.  
Local Device  
When the VPN tunnel is established, one side of the tunnel is designated as  
Right and the other as Left. You are configuring the IOLAN-side of the VPN  
tunnel.  
Data Options: Left, Right  
Default: Left  
Local IP Address The IP address of the IOLAN. You can specify %defaultroutewhen the IP  
address of the IOLAN is not always known (for example, when it gets its IP  
address from DHCP). When %defaultrouteis used, a default gateway must  
be configured in the route table (Network, Advanced, Route List tab).  
Field Format: IPv4 address, IPv6 address, FQDN, %defaultroute  
Local External IP When NAT Traversal (NAT_T) is enabled, this is IOLAN’s external IP address  
Address  
or FQDN. When the IOLAN is behind a NAT router, this will be its public IP  
address.  
Field Format: IPv4 address, IPv6 address, FQDN  
Local Next Hop  
The IP address of the router/gateway that will forward data packets to the  
remote VPN (if required). The router/gateway must reside on the same subnet  
at the IOLAN. Leave this parameter blank if you want to use the Default  
Gateway configured in the IOLAN.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Local Host/Network The IP address of a specific host, or the network address that the IOLAN will  
Address  
provide a VPN connection to.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Local IPv4 Subnet The subnet mask of the local IPv4 network. Keep the default value when you  
Mask  
are configuring a host-to-host VPN connection.  
Default: 255.255.255.255  
Local IPv6 Prefix The prefix bits of the local IPv6 network. Keep the default value when you are  
Bits  
configuring a host-to-host VPN connection.  
Default: 0  
Remote IP Address The IP address or FQDN of the remote VPN peer. If you want to accept a VPN  
connection from any VPN peer, you can enter %anyin this field.  
Field Format: IPv4 address, IPv6 address, FQDN, %any  
Remote External IP When NAT Traversal (NAT_T) is enabled, the remote VPN’s public external IP  
Address  
address or FQDN.  
Field Format: IPv4 address, IPv6 address, FQDN  
234  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VPN  
Remote Next Hop The IP address of the router/gateway that will forward data packets to the  
IOLAN (if required). The router/gateway must reside on the same subnet at the  
remote VPN.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Remote  
Host/Network  
Address  
The IP address of a specific host or the network address that the IOLAN will  
provide a VPN connection to. If the IPsec tunnel is listening for connections  
(Boot Action set to Add), and the field value is left at 0.0.0.0, any VPN peer  
with a private remote network/host that conforms to RFC 1918 (10.0.0.0/8,  
172.16.0.0./12, 192.168.0.0/16) will be allowed to use this tunnel if it  
successfully authenticates.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Remote IPv4  
Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask of the remote IPv4 network. Keep the default value when you  
are configuring a host-to-host VPN connection.  
Default: 255.255.255.255  
Remote IPv6 Prefix The prefix bits of the remote IPv6 network. Keep the default value when you  
Bits  
are configuring a host-to-host VPN connection.  
Default: 0  
Boot Action  
Determines the state of the VPN network when the IOLAN is booted.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
Start—Starts the VPN network, initiating communication to the remote  
VPN.  
Add—Adds the VPN network, but doesn’t initiate a connection to the  
remote VPN.  
Ignore—Maintains the VPN network configuration, but the VPN network  
is not started and cannot be started through the IPsec command option.  
When defining peer VPN gateways, one side should be defined as Start  
(initiate) and the other as Add (listen). It is invalid to define both gateways as  
Add. VPN connection time can take longer when both gateways are set to  
Start, as both sides will attempt to initiate the same VPN connection.  
Default: Start  
Shared Secret Field Description  
When the Authentication Method is set to Shared Secret, you can enter a secret that applies to all  
VPN tunnels (both the IPsec and L2TP/IPsec protocols) to successfully authenticate and create a  
valid connection.  
Configure the following parameter:  
Secret  
When the Authentication Method is set to Shared Secret, enter the case-  
sensitive secret word.This applies to all VPN tunnels (IPsec and L2TP/IPsec).  
Field Format: Maximum of 16 characters, spaces not allowed  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VPN  
Remote Validation Criteria Field Descriptions  
When the Authentication Method is set to X.509 Certificate, you can configure the remote  
validation criteria. The information in the remote X.509 certificate must match exactly the  
information configured in this window in order to successfully authenticate and create a valid  
connection.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Country  
A country code; for example, US. This field is case sensitive in order to  
successfully match the information in the remote X.509 certificate.  
Data Options: Two characters, asterisk (*) works as a wildcard  
State/Province  
Locality  
An entry for the state/province; for example, IL. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the remote X.509 certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters, asterisk (*) works as a wildcard  
An entry for the location; for example, Chicago. This field is case sensitive in  
order to successfully match the information in the remote X.509 certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 128 characters, asterisk (*) works as a wildcard  
Organization  
An entry for the organization; for example, Accounting. This field is case  
sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the remote X.509  
certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters, asterisk (*) works as a wildcard  
Organization Unit An entry for the unit in the organization; for example, Payroll. This field is  
case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the remote  
X.509 certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters, asterisk (*) works as a wildcard  
Common Name  
Email  
An entry for common name; for example, the host name or fully qualified  
domain name. This field is case sensitive in order to successfully match the  
information in the remote X.509 certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters, asterisk (*) works as a wildcard  
An entry for an email address; for example, [email protected]. This field  
is case sensitive in order to successfully match the information in the remote  
X.509 certificate.  
Data Options: Maximum 64 characters, asterisk (*) works as a wildcard  
236  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VPN  
L2TP/IPsec  
Many operating systems support L2TP/IPsec VPN tunnels, however, Windows XP requires this VPN  
tunnel protocol. When L2TP/IPsec is enabled, the IOLAN will listen for L2TP/IPsec VPN tunnel  
requests.  
When you enable L2TP/IPsec, you are requiring that all access to the IOLAN go through the  
L2TP/IPsec tunnel, so you must configure any exceptions first (see Exceptions on page 238 for more  
information on exceptions) or you will not be able to access the IOLAN through the network unless  
you are configured to go through the L2TP/IPsec tunnel (you can still access the IOLAN through the  
Console port).  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Allow L2TP/IPsec When enabled, the IOLAN listens for L2TP/IPsec VPN tunnel connections.  
connections  
Note: to allow non-VPN tunnel connections to the IOLAN, you must create  
entries in the VPN Exceptions list.  
Default: Disabled  
Local IP Address The IPv4 address that the IOLAN will listen on for L2TP/IPsec connections. If  
the default value (0.0.0.0) is kept, the IOLAN will use the Default Gateway  
value (if no Default Gateway is specified, L2TP/IPsec VPN connections will  
not be established).  
Default: 0.0.0.0  
Authentication  
Method  
Specify the authentication method that will be used between VPN peers to  
authenticate the VPN tunnel.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Shared Secret—A text-based secret that is used to authenticate the IPsec  
tunnel (case sensitive).  
X.509 Certificate—X.509 certificates are used to authenticate the IPsec  
tunnel. When using this authentication method, you must include the  
signing authority’s certificate information in the SSL/TLS CA list and  
download it to the IOLAN.  
Default: Shared Secret  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VPN  
Remote Validation Depending on the Authentication Method:  
Criteria  
Shared Secret—Specify the text-based secret that is used to authenticate the  
IPsec tunnel (case sensitive). This applies to all VPN tunnels (IPsec and  
L2TP/IPsec).  
X.509 Certificate—Specify the remote X.509 certificate validation criteria  
that must match for successful authentication (case sensitive). Note that all  
validation criteria must be configured to match the X.509 certificate. An  
asterisk (*) is valid as a wildcard.  
See Shared Secret Field Description on page 235 for more information.  
See Remote Validation Criteria Field Descriptions on page 236 for more  
information on the X.509 certificate validation criteria.  
IPv4 Local IP  
Address  
Specify the unique IPv4 address that hosts accessing the IOLAN through the  
L2TP tunnel will use.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
IPv4 Remote IP  
Start Address  
Specify the first IPv4 address that can be assigned to incoming hosts through  
the L2TP tunnel.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
IPv4 Remote IP  
End Address  
Specify the end range of the IPv4 addresses that can be assigned to incoming  
hosts through the L2TP tunnel.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
Authentication  
Specify the authentication method that will be used for the L2TP tunnel.  
Data Options: CHAP, PAP, Both  
Default: Both  
Exceptions  
Exceptions allow specific hosts or any host in a network to access the IOLAN outside of a VPN  
tunnel. This is especially useful when allowing local network hosts access to the IOLAN when VPN  
tunnels have been configured for remote user security.  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available:  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Click the Add button to add a VPN exception to the Exception List.  
Highlight an Exception List entry and click the Edit button to change the entry.  
238  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VPN  
Delete Button  
Highlight an Exception List entry and click the Delete button to remove the  
entry from the list.  
Adding/Editing a VPN Exception  
The following parameters are available:  
IP Address  
The IP address of the host that will communicate with the IOLAN outside of  
the VPN tunnel.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Network  
The network address that will communicate with the IOLAN outside of the  
VPN tunnel.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
IPv4 Subnet Mask The IPv4 subnet mask for the IPv4 network.  
Default: 0.0.0.0  
IPv6 Prefix Bits  
The IPv6 prefix bits for the IPv6 network.  
Range: 0-128  
Default: 0  
Advanced  
Field Description  
Configure the following parameter:  
Use NAT Traversal NAT Traversal should be enabled when the IOLAN is communicating through  
(NAT_T)  
a router/gateway to a remote VPN that also has NAT Traversal enabled.  
Default: Enabled  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Services  
Services  
Overview  
Services are either daemon or client processes that run on the IOLAN. You can disable any of the  
services for security reasons.  
Functionality  
If you disable any of the daemons, it can affect how the IOLAN can be used or accessed. For  
example, if you disable WebManager (HTTPS and HTTP) services, you will not be able to access the  
IOLAN with the WebManager. If you disable the DeviceManager service, the DeviceManager will  
not be able to connect to the IOLAN. If you do not want to allow users to Telnet to the IOLAN, you  
can disable the Telnet Server service; therefore, disabling daemons can also be used as an added  
security method for accessing the IOLAN.  
By default, all daemon and client applications are enabled, except IPsec, and running on the IOLAN.  
Field Descriptions  
Enable/disable the following options:  
Telnet Server  
Telnet daemon process in the IOLAN listening on TCP port 23.  
Default: Enabled  
TruePort Full  
Mode  
The TruePort daemon process in the IOLAN that supports TruePort Full Mode  
on UDP port 668. You can still communicate with the IOLAN in Lite Mode  
when this service is disabled.  
Default: Enabled  
Syslog Client  
Modbus  
Syslog client process in the IOLAN.  
Default: Enabled  
Modbus daemon process in the IOLAN listening on port 502.  
Default: Enabled  
SNMP  
SNMP daemon process in the IOLAN listening on port 161.  
Default: Enabled  
240  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Services  
DeviceManager  
DeviceManager daemon process in the IOLAN. If you disable this service, you  
will not be able to connect to the IOLAN with the DeviceManager application.  
The DeviceManager listens on port 33812 and sends on port 33813.  
Default: Enabled  
WebManager  
(HTTP)  
WebManager daemon process in the IOLAN listening on port 80.  
Default: Enabled  
WebManager  
(HTTPS)  
Secure WebManager daemon process in the IOLAN listening on port 443.  
Default: Enabled  
If you are using the WebManager in secure mode (HTTPS), you need to  
download the SSL/TLS private key and certificate to the IOLAN. You also  
need to set the SSL Passphrase parameter with the same password that was  
used to generate the key. See Keys and Certificates on page 242 for more  
information.  
SSH Server  
SNTP Client  
SSH daemon process in the IOLAN listening on TCP port 22.  
Default: Enabled  
Simple Network Time Protocol client process in the IOLAN.  
Default: Enabled  
Dynamic Routing Dynamic Routing daemon process in the IOLAN listening on port 520.  
(RIP)  
Default: Enabled  
IPsec  
IPsec daemon process in the IOLAN listening and sending on UDP port 500.  
Default: Disabled  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keys and Certificates  
Keys and Certificates  
When you are using SSH, SSL/TLS, LDAP, or HTTPS, you will need to install keys and/or  
certificates or get server keys in order to make those options work properly. All certificates need to be  
created and all keys need to be generated outside of the IOLAN, with the exception of the IOLAN  
SSH Public keys, which already exist in the IOLAN. SSH keys must be generated using the  
OpenSSH format.  
Certificate Authorities (CAs) such as Verisign, COST, GTE CyberTrust, etc. can issue certificates. Or,  
you can create a self-signed certificate using a utility such as OpenSSL.  
To download or keys, a certificate, or a CA list or to upload the IOLAN public SSH key, select Tools,  
Advanced, Keys and Certificates.  
The following fields are available:  
Key / Certificate  
Select the key or certificate that you want to download to the IOLAN or upload  
the IOLAN SSH Public Key.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Upload Server SSH Public Key, used for Console Management serial  
ports set to SSH connections  
Download SSH User Public Key, used for Console Management serial  
ports set to SSH connections  
Download SSH User Private Key, used for IOLAN Users on serial ports  
set to the Terminal profile using SSH connections  
Download SSH Host Public Key, used for IOLAN Users on serial ports  
set to the Terminal profile using SSH connections  
Download SSL/TLS Private Key, required if using HTTPS and/or  
SSL/TLS  
Download SSL/TLS Certificate, required if using HTTPS and/or  
SSL/TLS  
Download SSL/TLS CA, required if using LDAP with TLS, SSL/TLS,  
and/or X.509 certificate authentication for an IPsec tunnel  
Upload IPsec RSA Public Key, must be installed on the remote VPN  
gateway when the RSA Signature is the IPsec tunnel authentication  
method  
z
Download IPsec RSA Public Key, from the remote VPN gateway when  
RSA Signature is the IPsec tunnel authentication method  
File Name  
The file that you are going to download/upload to/from the IOLAN via TFTP.  
242  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Keys and Certificates  
Key Type  
Specify the type of authentication that will be used for the SSH session. The  
following list details the keys that support each key type.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
*RSA—Server SSH Public Key, SSH User Public Key, SSH User Private  
Key, SSH Host Public Key  
DSA—Server SSH Public Key, SSH User Public Key, SSH User Private  
Key, SSH Host Public Key  
**RSA1—SSH User Private Key, SSH Host Public Key  
*RSA is used with SSH-2  
**RSA1 is used with SSH-1  
v
User Name  
Host Name  
The name of the user for whom you are downloading the SSH User Public or  
Private Key to the IOLAN.  
The name of the host for which you are downloading the SSH Host Public or  
Private Key to the IOLAN.  
IPsec Tunnel Name Select the IPsec tunnel that the RSA public key is being used to authenticate.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keys and Certificates  
244  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring I/O  
Interfaces  
Chapter 10  
10  
Introduction  
There is a line of IOLANs that can control/monitor the following types  
of I/O:  
z
z
z
z
Analog Input  
Digital Input/Output  
Relay Output  
Temperature Input  
Some of the models are I/O combinations and some of the models support one I/O type, although all  
of the SDS I/O models are extensions of the feature rich, extended temperature SDS IOLAN.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Settings  
Settings  
Overview  
The I/O Interfaces Settings window configures the parameters that are global to all I/O channels.  
I/O Access Functionality  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable I/O Access Enables/disables Modbus as the communication protocol for all the I/O  
to Modbus protocol channels.  
Default: Disabled  
UID  
This is the UID you are assigning to the IOLAN, which is acting as a Modbus  
slave.  
Default: 255  
Advanced Modbus Click this button to configure global Modbus Slave settings.  
Settings Button  
See Advanced Slave Modbus Settings on page 247 for field descriptions.  
Allow Modbus TCP Allows a host running a Modbus/TCP application to communicate to the I/O  
Application (API) channels using the standard Modbus API.  
Default: Permanently enabled when Enable I/O Access via Modbus protocol  
is enabled  
See Modbus I/O Access on page 278 for function codes and I/O  
coil/registration descriptions.  
Allow Modbus  
RTU/ASCII via  
TruePort  
Enables/disables serial Modbus application access to the I/O over the network  
using the TruePort COM redirector feature.  
Default: Disabled  
See Modbus I/O Access on page 278 for function codes and I/O  
coil/registration descriptions and Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort on page  
285 for the Perle API.  
246  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Settings  
Enable I/O Access Enables/disables serial application access to the I/O over the network using the  
via TruePort  
TruePort COM redirector feature.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable SSL  
Encryption  
Enables/disables SSL encryption for the I/O data between the IOLAN and the  
TruePort host.  
Default: Disabled  
Listen TCP Port  
The TCP port that the IOLAN will listen to for I/O channel data requests from  
TruePort.  
Default: 33816  
Allow I/O Access Allows serial application access to the I/O over the network using the TruePort  
via API through  
TruePort  
COM redirector feature via a custom application using the Perle API.  
Default: Permanently enabled when Enable I/O Access via TruePort is  
enabled  
See Modbus I/O Access on page 278 for function codes and I/O  
coil/registration descriptions and Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort on page  
285 for the Perle API.  
Advanced Slave Modbus Settings  
The parameters in this window configure global Modbus gateway settings that apply to all serial ports  
configured first as the Modbus Gateway profile and then as a Modbus Slave.  
Configure the following parameters:  
TCP/UDP Port  
The network port number that the Slave Gateway will listen on for both TCP  
and UDP messages.  
Default: 502  
Next Request Delay A delay, in milliseconds, to allow serial slave(s) to re-enable receivers before  
issuing next Modbus Master request.  
Range: 0-1000  
Default: 50 ms  
Enable Serial  
When enabled, a UID of 0 (zero) indicates that the message will be broadcast to  
Modbus Broadcasts all Modbus Slaves.  
Default: Disabled  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Settings  
Request Queuing When enabled, allows multiple, simultaneous messages to be queued and  
processed in order of reception.  
Default: Enabled  
Embedded  
Remapped  
When this option is selected, the address of the slave Modbus device is  
embedded in the message header.  
Default: Enabled  
Used for single device/port operation. Older Modbus devices may not include a  
UID in their transmission header. When this option is selected, you can specify  
the UID that will be inserted into the message header for the Modbus slave  
device. This feature supersedes the Broadcast feature.  
Default: Disabled  
Remap UID  
Specify the UID that will be inserted into the message header for the Slave  
Modbus serial device.  
Range: 1-247  
Default: 1  
Enable SSL/TLS  
When enabled, Modbus Slave Gateway messages to remote TCP Modbus  
using global settings Masters are encrypted via SSL/TLS.  
Default: Disabled  
248  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings  
Failsafe Timer Functionality  
Overview  
The Failsafe Timer tab configures the I/O failsafe timer. The Failsafe Timer is enabled on a global  
basis and provides a trigger mechanism that can be configured for each channel when no I/O  
traffic/management has occurred for the specified amount of time. A Failsafe Action can be  
configured for each Digital Output channel, each Serial Signal Output pin (DTR and RTS), and each  
Relay channel to either Activate or Deactivate the output.  
The Failsafe Timer has a different function when I/O Extension is enabled for Digital Output  
channels, Relay channels, or the Serial Signal Output pins (DTR and RTS). For I/O Extension, the  
Failsafe Timer provides a per channel or per serial signal output pin trigger mechanism that is  
activated when there are no TCP sessions for the specified amount of time.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable I/O Failsafe Enables/disables the Failsafe Timer. This is the global setting that must be  
Timer  
enabled to set the Failsafe Action on the channel for digital output and relay  
channels or output signal pins. When this timer expires because of no I/O  
activity within the specified time interval, the Failsafe Action set for the  
channel determines the action on the output. When the channel or serial signal  
pin is configured for I/O extension, the timer expires there are no TCP sessions  
for the specified time interval.  
Default: Disabled  
Timeout  
The number of seconds that must elapse before the channel/serial signal pin  
Failsafe Action is triggered.  
Range: 1-9999  
Default: 30 seconds  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Settings  
UDP Functionality  
Overview  
The UDP tab configures the I/O UDP broadcast settings. The I/O UDP broadcast feature periodically  
broadcasts the I/O channel status in a UDP message.  
You can configure up to four sets of IP address entries (each entry consisting of a start and end IP  
address range) to broadcast I/O status data. The broadcast frequency of the UDP packets to the  
configured UDP IP addresses can be defined to accommodate network traffic and monitoring PC  
application requirements. For details of the UDP I/O datagram see I/O UDP on page 274.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable UDP  
Broadcast of I/O  
Status  
Enables/disables UDP broadcast of I/O channel status (data).  
Default: Disabled  
Broadcast Interval Enter the interval, in seconds, for UDP broadcasts of I/O channel status (data).  
Range: 1-9999  
Default: 30 seconds  
Settings Button  
Click this button to configure the UDP IP addresses that will receive the I/O  
status information.  
See I/O UDP Settings on page 251 for field descriptions for the I/O UDP  
Settings window.  
250  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Settings  
I/O UDP Settings  
Configure the following parameters:  
UDP Entry  
Start IP Address  
End IP Address  
Port  
When enabled, broadcasts I/O status (data) to the specified range of IP  
addresses.  
Default: Disabled  
The first host IP address in the range of IP addresses (for IPV4 or IPV6) that  
the IOLAN will listen for messages from and/or send messages to.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
The last host IP address in the range of IP addresses (for IPV4, not required for  
IPV6) that the IOLAN will listen for messages from and/or send messages to.  
Field Format: IPv4 address  
The UDP port that the IOLAN will use to relay messages to servers/hosts.  
Default: 0 (zero)  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Settings  
Temperature Functionality  
Overview  
The Temperature tab configures the temperature scale settings for T4 models.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameter:  
Temperature Scale Select the temperature scale that will be used to display temperature data.  
Data Options: Fahrenheit or Celsius  
Default: Celsius  
252  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Channels  
Channels  
The Channels section displays the I/O Channels window, through which you can enable/disable the  
I/O channels.  
Highlight a channel and then click the Edit button to configure the parameters for that channel.  
Analog  
Overview  
Analog channels monitor current/voltage input. Note that the internal jumpers must match the  
software setting (by default, they are set to Current); see Analog Input Module on page 383 to find  
out how to set the internal jumpers.  
For example, in an industrial freezer warehouse, the IOLAN A4R2 is used to monitor humidity  
transducers, which are in place to help prevent freezer burn. If the humidity reaches a certain  
percentage (monitored by an Analog channel) a syslog message is sent to the Monitoring Application.  
The Monitoring Application then sends a command to the IOLAN via the Perle API that causes the  
Relay channel to activate an internal freezer dehumidifier. The relay is turned off when the Analog  
channel sends a clear syslog message to the Monitoring Application and the Relay channel is  
deactivated.  
A4D2  
Relay  
Network  
Analog  
Analog I/O  
Relay  
IOLAN  
Monitoring  
Application  
Industrial  
Freezers  
Analog  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Channels  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Description  
Provide a description of the channel, making it easier to identify.  
Data Options: Maximum 20 characters, including spaces  
Type  
Select the type of input being measured.  
Data Options: Current or Voltage  
Default: Current  
Range  
Select the range for the measurement type.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Current—0-20 mA, 4-20 mA  
Voltage—+/- 10V, +/- 5V, +/- 1V, +/- 500mV, +/- 150mV  
Default: Current is 0-20 mA. Voltage is +/- 10V.  
Alarm Settings  
Button  
Click the Alarm Settings button to specify the trigger and clear levels for the  
alarms. Notice that the Analog Alarm Settings window has two alarm  
configuration views, a basic alarm view and an advanced alarm view.  
See Alarm Settings on page 271 for field descriptions.  
254  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Digital Input  
Overview  
When the channel is set for digital input, it monitors voltage or current. Note that the internal jumpers  
must match the software setting and must be set to Input, which is the default; see Digital I/O Module  
on page 382 to find out how to set the internal jumpers.  
Functionality  
The Digital input channels allow you to configure the following options:  
z
You can choose to remember the last state change, or latch, that occurred. Your options are to  
latch (remember) when the state changes from inactive to active or active to inactive.  
z
z
You can choose to invert the signal, which is useful if your sensor is wired in such a way that  
closed is actually inactive, whereas closed is normally considered active.  
You can also configure an alarm trigger and clear mode based on whether the Digital input is  
active or inactive, sending an email, syslog message, and/or SNMP trap when the alarm is  
triggered or cleared.  
In an industrial freezer warehouse example, a D4 is used to monitor the open door sensor, so that  
every time a freezer door is opened, an alarm is triggered and a syslog message is sent to a syslog  
server, where the monitoring application notes the time.  
D4  
Input  
Network  
Digital I/O  
IOLAN  
Monitoring  
Application  
Input  
Industrial  
Freezers  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Channels  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Description  
Provide a description of the channel, making it easier to identify.  
Data Options: Maximum 20 characters, including spaces  
Input Mode  
When selected, the channel will be reading the status of the line (input). The  
internal jumpers must match the software configuration; the internal jumpers  
are factory configured for Input Mode.  
Default: Input Mode  
Latch  
Latches (remembers) the activity transition (active to inactive or inactive to  
active).  
Data Options: None, Inactive-to-Active, Active-to-Inactive  
Default: None  
Invert Signal  
Trigger  
When enabled, inverts the actual condition of the I/O signal in the status;  
therefore, an inactive status will be displayed as active.  
Default: Disabled  
When the trigger condition is met, triggers the specified alarm action.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Disabled—No alarm settings. This is the default.  
Inactive—When the expected Digital input is active, going inactive will  
trigger an alarm.  
z
Active—When the expected Digital input is inactive, going active will  
trigger an alarm.  
Default: Disabled  
256  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Auto Clear Mode When enabled, automatically clears the alarm when the trigger condition  
changes; for example, if the Trigger is Inactive and the alarm is triggered, once  
the input becomes active again, the alarm will automatically be cleared  
Default: Enabled  
Manual Clear  
Mode  
When enabled, a triggered alarm must be manually cleared.  
Default: Disabled  
Email  
Syslog  
SNMP  
When enabled, sends an email alert to an email account(s) set up in the System  
settings when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The email alert data includes the  
severity level and the value that caused the alarm to trigger or clear. The Email  
Alert is associated with Level Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
When enabled, sends a message to syslog when an alarm is triggered or  
cleared. The syslog entry includes the severity level and the value that caused  
the alarm to trigger or clear. The syslog message is associated with Level  
Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
When enabled, sends an SNMP trap when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The  
trap consists of the severity level and whether the alarm was triggered or  
cleared.  
Default: Disabled  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channels  
Digital Output  
Overview  
When the channel is set for digital output, either voltage is applied to the channel or the channel is  
grounded. Note that the internal jumpers must match the software setting and must be set to Output  
(by default, they are set to Input); see Digital I/O Module on page 382 to find out how to set the  
internal jumpers.  
Functionality  
The Digital output channels support three types of Digital output: sink (voltage), source (ground), and  
sink and source (apply voltage or ground). For the output type, you can configure the following  
options:  
z
z
You can choose to manually activate/deactivate the Digital output.  
You can choose to manually activate/deactivate the Digital output and then specify that the  
Digital output will either pulse (you get to specify the active and inactive pulse times)  
continuously or for a specified number of pulse counts.  
z
z
You can choose to manually activate/deactivate the Digital output and then specify a delay before  
the output goes from inactive to active or active to inactive.  
You can also specify a failsafe action that can either activate or inactivate the Digital output  
when the failsafe timer is triggered (see Failsafe Timer Functionality on page 249 for more  
information).  
In an industrial freezer warehouse, the IOLAN D4 is used to monitor the freezer doors. When one of  
the industrial freezer doors are left open for more than five minutes, the Monitoring Application  
(using the Perle API) starts the Digital output sink, causing the strobe light on top of the offending  
freezer to activate.  
Output  
D4  
Input  
Network  
Digital I/O  
Output  
IOLAN  
Monitoring  
Application  
Input  
Industrial  
Freezers  
258  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Channels  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Description  
Provide a description of the channel, making it easier to identify.  
Data Options: Maximum 20 characters, including spaces  
Output Mode  
When selected, the channel will drive the line (output). The internal jumpers  
must match the software configuration, so if you change this setting to Output  
Mode, you will have to also change the internal hardware jumpers.  
Default: Disabled  
Type  
Specify the type of digital output.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
Sink—Specifies that the channel will be grounded when active.  
Source—Specifies that the channel will provide voltage when active.  
Sink and Source—Specifies that channel will be grounded when it is  
inactive and will provide voltage when it is active.  
Default: Sink  
Output  
Specify how the channel output will be handled.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Manual—You must manually manipulate the channel output.  
Pulse—Activates and deactivates the channel output activity in intervals  
after it is manually activated.  
z
z
Inactive-to-Active Delay—The channel output will remain inactive for  
the specified time interval after it is manually started.  
Active-to-Inactive Delay—The channel output will go inactive after the  
specified time interval after it is manually started.  
Default: Manual  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Pulse Mode  
Pulse Count  
When Output is set to Pulse, you can specify the manner of the pulse.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Continuous—Continuously pulses active and inactive.  
Count—Pulses an active/inactive sequence for the specified number of  
times.  
Default: Continuous  
The channel output will pulse for the specified number of times; each count  
consists of an active/inactive sequence.  
Default: 1  
Inactive Signal  
Width  
How long the channel will remain inactive during pulse mode.  
Range: 1-9999 x 100 ms  
Default: 1 (100 ms)  
Active Signal  
Width  
How long the channel will be active during the pulse mode.  
Range: 1-9999 x 100 ms  
Default: 1 (100 ms)  
Delay  
How long to delay an active-to-inactive or inactive-to-active setting after it is  
manually started.  
Range: 1-9999 x 100 ms  
Default: 1 (100 ms)  
Failsafe Action  
When there has been no I/O activity within the specified time (set in the I/O  
Interfaces, Settings on the Failsafe Timer tab) and the Failsafe Timer is  
triggered.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
None—The state of the Digital/Relay output remains the same, no change.  
Activate Output—Activates the channel.  
Deactivate Output—Deactivates the channel.  
Default: None  
260  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channels  
Relay  
Overview  
Relay channels can open or close a contact for a higher voltage circuit using a lower level control  
voltage. The Relay output channels work as a physical on/off switch, and are used to drive higher  
voltage devices with a lower controlling voltage.  
You can configure the following Relay output channel options:  
z
z
You can choose to manually activate/deactivate the Relay output.  
You can choose to manually activate/deactivate the Relay output and then specify that the Relay  
output will either pulse (you get to specify the active and inactive pulse times) continuously or  
for a specified number of pulse counts.  
z
z
You can choose to manually activate/deactivate the Relay output and then specify a delay before  
the output goes from inactive to active or active to inactive.  
You can also specify a failsafe action that can either active or inactivate the Relay output when  
the failsafe timer is triggered (see Failsafe Timer Functionality on page 249 for more  
information).  
In an industrial freezer warehouse, the IOLAN A4R2 is used to monitor humidity transducers, which  
are used to help prevent freezer burn. If the humidity reaches a certain percentage (monitored by an  
Analog channel) a syslog message is sent to the Monitoring Application, causing the Relay channel  
to activate an internal freezer dehumidifier. The Relay channel is deactivated when the Analog  
channel sends a clear syslog message to the Monitoring Application and the Relay channel is  
deactivated.  
A4D2  
Relay  
Network  
Analog  
Relay I/O  
Relay  
IOLAN  
Monitoring  
Application  
Industrial  
Freezers  
Analog  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Channels  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Description  
Provide a description of the channel, making it easier to identify.  
Data Options: Maximum 20 characters, including spaces  
Output  
Specify how the channel output will be handled.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Manual—You must manually manipulate the channel output.  
Pulse—Activates and deactivates the channel output activity in intervals  
after it is manually activated.  
z
z
Inactive-to-Active Delay—The channel output will remain inactive for  
the specified time interval after it is manually started.  
Active-to-Inactive Delay—The channel output will go inactive after the  
specified time interval after it is manually started.  
Default: Manual  
Pulse Mode  
Pulse Count  
When Output is set to Pulse, you can specify the manner of the pulse.  
Data Options:  
z
z
Continuous—Continuously pulses active and inactive.  
Count—Pulses an active/inactive sequence for the specified number of  
times.  
Default: Continuous  
The channel output will pulse for the specified number of times; each count  
consists of an active/inactive sequence.  
Default: 1  
Inactive Signal  
Width  
How long the channel will remain inactive during pulse mode.  
Range: 1-9999 x 100 ms  
Default: 1 (100 ms)  
262  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Active Signal  
Width  
How long the channel will be active during the pulse mode.  
Range: 1-9999 x 100 ms  
Default: 1 (100 ms)  
Delay  
How long to delay an active-to-inactive or inactive-to-active setting after it is  
manually started.  
Range: 1-9999 x 100 ms  
Default: 1 (100 ms)  
Failsafe Action  
When there has been no I/O activity within the specified time (set in the I/O  
Interfaces, Settings on the Failsafe Timer tab) and the Failsafe Timer is  
triggered.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
None—The state of the Digital/Relay output remains the same, no change.  
Activate Output—Activates the channel.  
Deactivate Output—Deactivates the channel.  
Default: None  
Digital I/O Extension  
Overview  
The Digital I/O extension feature connects a digital input signal to digital output(s)/relay(s) and/or a  
TCP/IP application over an IP network. Therefore, when the state of the digital input changes, you  
can also change the state of the digital output or relay channel or output serial signal pin on a local  
I/O channel(s), other IOLAN I/O channels, other IOLAN serial signal pins, or the data can be sent to  
an application(s).  
For example, when the door opens (I/O digital input sensor) in a factory, a light goes on in the  
reception office (remote IOLAN relay channel), and the door open/close is logged by an application  
on a remote host.  
Warehouse  
IOLAN  
Reception  
Network  
IOLAN  
Remote Host  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Channels  
Functionality  
The Digital I/O extension feature requires the digital input to be connected to one or more digital  
outputs/relays (local or on another IOLAN model), output serial signal pins, and/or TCP/IP  
applications. In order to create a successful connection between the input and output or application,  
one side must be must be set to Listen for connection and the other side must be set to Connect to.  
When the state of an input channel changes, a message is sent to all sessions currently associated with  
that channel.  
When the IOLAN is communicating to an application, there is no need for the output channel or  
application to respond to messages from the input channel. Each input channel is reported  
individually, so the receiving application gets the status only at the point at which the channel state  
has changed.  
The message format (from input channel to output channel/application) consists of 20 bytes per  
status; 10 bytes are currently used and 10 are being reserved for future use.  
Message Type Input Number IOLAN MAC  
Current Alarm Current Status  
Reserved  
(1 Byte) (1 Byte) Address (6 Bytes) State (1 Byte) of Input (1 Byte) (10 Bytes)  
z
z
Message type: (1 Byte)  
z
z
0 = Digital input status  
1 = Serial I/O status  
Input number: (1 Byte)  
z
z
Digital input will be 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent the channel number  
Serial I/O will be 5 = DSR, 6 = DCD, or 7 = CTS  
z
z
MAC Address of the IOLAN sending the input information. (6 Bytes)  
Current Alarm State: (1 Byte)  
z
z
0 = Not in alarm  
1 = In Alarm  
z
z
Current Status of Input: (1 Byte)  
z
z
0 = Inactive for digital input.  
1 = Active for digital input.  
Reserved for future use. Reserved bytes will have the value 0x00. (10 Bytes)  
Applications should be written in such a way so that they look at the Message type byte to determine  
the format of the message. If the application encounters a Message type it does not recognize, it  
should discard the message and read the next 20 byte block.  
264  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Field Descriptions  
The Local connection option is different depending on whether you are configuring a Digital Input  
or a Digital Output/Relay channel. The Local connection option for Digital Input lists all the local  
Digital Output channels or output serial signal pins that it is associated with. Digital Input can be  
connected to multiple local Digital Output or Relay channels or output serial signal pins. However, a  
Digital Output can only be associated with one Digital Input channel or input serial signal pin. The  
Local connection option for Digital Output configures the specific local Digital Input channel or  
input serial signal pin on the same IOLAN that it is to be connected to.  
For a description of the SSL/TLS parameters (not available when Local connection is configured),  
see SSL/TLS Settings Tab Field Descriptions on page 123.  
Digital Input/DSR/DCD/CTS  
Digital Output/Relay/DTR/RTS  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable I/O  
extension  
When enabled, the digital channel can be connected to:  
z
A Digital output or relay (if the I/O model supports relay) channel on the  
same IOLAN  
z
z
Output Serial Signal Pins (DTR/RTS)  
A Digital output channel on another IOLAN(s) or output serial signal pins  
(DTR/RTS) on another IOLAN(s)  
z
A TCP/IP application(s) running on a host on the network  
Default: Disabled  
Listen for  
connection  
When enabled, the channel/serial signal pin will wait for connections to be  
initiated by another I/O channel or a TCP/IP application.  
Default: Enabled  
Input TCP Port  
The TCP port that the channel/serial signal pin will use to listen for incoming  
connections.  
Default: 2000 for channel 1, then increments by one for each channel  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Allow Multiple  
When this option is enabled, multiple I/O channels and/or TCP/IP applications  
Hosts to Connect can connect to this channel/serial signal pin.  
Default: Disabled  
Connect to  
When enabled, the channel/serial signal pin initiates communication to another  
I/O channel or a TCP/IP application.  
Default: Enabled  
Host Name  
TCP Port  
The configured host or another IOLAN that the I/O channel will connect to.  
Default: None  
The TCP Port that the channel/serial signal pin will use to communicate to  
another IOLAN or a TCP/IP application.  
Default: 2000 for channel 1, then increments by one for each channel  
Connect to Multiple When enabled, input channel or serial signal pin can communicate to multiple  
Hosts  
hosts running a TCP/IP application or I/O channels.  
Default: Disabled  
Define Additional Click this button to define the hosts/IOLANs that this channel or serial signal  
Hosts Button  
pin will connect to. This button is also used to define the Primary/Backup host  
functionality.  
Local connection When this option is enabled, the input or output, depending on how the channel  
or serial signal pin is configured, will be associated with another local IOLAN  
I/O channel or serial signal pin.  
z
When the channel is configured as digital input or when configuring an  
input serial signal pin, the Output Channels parameter displays all the  
local digital output signals or relays that it is associated with.  
z
When the channel is configured as digital output, you must select a local  
digital input channel or input serial signal pin on the IOLAN.  
Note that the Failsafe Action is not compatible this option.  
Default: Disabled  
Enable TCP  
Keepalive  
Enables a per-connection TCP keepalive feature. After the configured number  
of seconds, the connection will send a gratuitous ACK to the network peer,  
thus either ensuring the connection stays active OR causing a dropped  
connection condition to be recognized.  
This parameter needs to be used in conjunction with Monitor Connection  
Status Interval parameter found in the Serial, Advanced, Advanced Settings  
tab. The interval specifies the inactivity period before "testing" the connection.  
Default: Disabled  
266  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channels  
Adding/Editing Additional Hosts  
You can define a list of hosts that the I/O channel will communicate to or a primary/backup host.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Define additional When this option is enabled, you can define up to 49 hosts/IOLANs that the  
hosts to connect to I/O channel or serial signal pin will attempt communicate to. With this mode of  
operation, the I/O channel will connect to multiple hosts/IOLANs  
simultaneously.  
Default: Enabled  
Add Button  
Edit Button  
Delete Button  
Click the Add button to add a host to the list of hosts that will be receiving  
communication from the I/O channel or serial signal pin.  
Highlight an existing host and click the Edit button to edit a host in the list of  
hosts that will be receiving communication from the I/O channel.  
Click the Delete button to delete a host to the list of hosts that will be receiving  
communication from the I/O channel or serial signal pin.  
Define a primary When this option is enabled, you need to define a primary host that the I/O  
host and backup... channel will communicate to and a backup host, in the event that the I/O  
channel loses communication to the primary host. The I/O channel will first  
establish a connection to the primary host. Should the connection to the  
primary host be lost (or never established), the I/O channel will establish a  
connection the backup host. Once connected to the backup, the I/O channel will  
attempt to re-establish a connection to the Primary host, once this is  
successfully done, it gracefully shuts down the backup connection.  
Default: Disabled  
Primary Host  
TCP Port  
Specify a preconfigured host that the I/O channel or serial signal pin will  
communicate to.  
Default: None  
Specify the TCP port that the I/O channel or serial signal pin will use to  
communicate to the Primary Host.  
Default: 2000 for channel 1, then increments by one for each channel  
Backup Host  
TCP Port  
Specify a preconfigured host that the I/O channel or serial signal pin will  
communicate to if the I/O channel cannot communicate with the Primary Host.  
Default: None  
Specify the TCP port that the channel or serial signal pin will use to  
communicate to the Backup Host.  
Default: 0  
Adding/Editing a Multihost Entry  
When you click the Add or Edit button, the Host Entry window appears. The hosts in the multihost  
list must already be defined (see Host Table on page 98 to learn how to create a host). If you add a  
host that was defined with its fully qualified domain name (FQDN), it must be resolvable by your  
configured DNS server.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Host Name  
Specify the preconfigured host that will be in the multihost list.  
Default: None  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Channels  
TCP Port  
Specify the TCP port that the I/O channel or serial signal pin will use to  
communicate to the Host.  
Default: 0  
268  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channels  
Temperature  
Temperature input channels monitor RTD or thermocouple temperature sensors inputs for the most  
common ranges. You can also configure severity alarms that can send an email, a syslog message,  
and/or an SNMP trap when an alarm is triggered or cleared; See Alarm Settings on page 271 for  
more information about the alarms.  
RTD ranges are:  
z Pt100 a=385 -50 to 150C  
z Pt100 a=385 0 to 100C  
z Pt100 a=385 0 to 200C  
z Pt100 a=385 0 to 400C  
z Pt100 a=392 -50 to 150C  
z Pt100 a=392 0 to 100C  
z Pt100 a=392 0 to 200C  
z Pt100 a=392 0 to 400C  
z Pt1000 a=385 -40 to 160C  
z NiFe604 a=518 -80 to 100C  
z NiFe604 a=518 0 to 100C  
z Pt100 a=385 -200 to 200C z Pt100 a=392 -200 to 200C  
IEC RTD 100 ohms.=0.00385  
JIS RTD 100 ohms.=0.00392  
Thermocouple ranges are:  
z B 500 to 1800C  
z E 0 to 1000C  
z J 0 to 760C  
z K 0 to 1370C  
z R 500 to 1750C  
z S 500 to 1750C  
z T -100 to 400C  
In the following example, a Temperature I/O IOLAN is used to monitor industrial freezer temperature  
o
sensors, with an alarm set to send a syslog message if the temperature rises above 31 C.  
T4  
Network  
Temperature I/O  
IOLAN  
Monitoring  
Application  
Industrial  
Freezers  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Description  
Provide a description of the channel, making it easier to identify.  
Data Options: Maximum 20 characters, including spaces  
Type  
Specify the type of sensor you are using to measure temperature.  
Data Options: RTD, Thermocouple  
Default: RTD  
Range  
Specify the temperature range that you want to measure.  
Data Options:  
z
RTD—Pt100 a=385 -50 to 150C, Pt100 a=385 0 to 100C,  
Pt100 a=385 0 to 200C, Pt100 a=385 0 to 400C,  
Pt100 a=385 -200 to 200C, Pt100 a=392 -50 to 150C,  
Pt100 a=392 0 to 100C, Pt100 a=392 0 to 200C,  
Pt100 a=392 0 to 400C, Pt100 a=392 -200 to 200C,  
Pt1000 a=385 -40 to 160C, NiFe604 a=518 -80 to 100C,  
NiFe604 a=518 0 to 100C  
z
Thermocouple—B 500 to 1800C, E 0 to 1000C,  
J 0 to 760C, K 0 to 1370C, R 500 to 1750C,  
S 500 to 1750C, T -100 to 400C  
Default: RTD is Pt100 a=385 -50 to 150C. Thermocouple is J 0 to 760C.  
s
Alarm Settings  
Button  
Click the Alarm Settings button to specify the trigger and clear levels for the  
alarms. Notice that the Analog Alarm Settings window has two alarm  
configuration views, a basic alarm view and an advanced alarm view.  
See Alarm Settings on page 271 for field descriptions.  
270  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Alarm Settings  
Analog and Temperature input models support an Alarm mechanism in which you can specify up to  
five severity levels of alarm triggers and clear levels; the alarm triggers/clear levels can activate in  
either increasing or decreasing severity levels.  
Each time an alarm is triggered or cleared, you can specify any combination of the following to be  
initiated:  
z
z
z
An SNMP trap  
An email message  
A message to syslog  
Basic Analog Alarm Settings  
The basic Analog Alarm Settings window allows you to configure one severity alarm, whereas the  
advanced window allows you to configure up to five severity alarm levels.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Trigger alarm when Specify the value that will trigger an alarm, the measurement is based on the  
input value is  
Type and Range that you specify. This value must not fall within the scope of  
the value used to clear an alarm.  
Clear alarm when Specify that value that will clear an alarm, the measurement is based on the  
input value is  
Type and Range that you specify. This value must not fall within the scope of  
the value used to trigger an alarm.  
Send Email Alert When enabled, sends an email alert to an email account(s) set up in the System  
settings when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The email alert data includes the  
severity level and the value that caused the alarm to trigger or clear. The Email  
Alert is associated with Level Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Channels  
Send Syslog Alert When enabled, sends a message to syslog when an alarm is triggered or  
cleared. The syslog entry includes the severity level and the value that caused  
the alarm to trigger or clear. The syslog message is associated with Level  
Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
Send SNMP Alert When enabled, sends an SNMP trap when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The  
trap consists of the severity level and whether the alarm was triggered or  
cleared.  
Default: Disabled  
Advanced Analog Alarm Settings  
The advanced Analog Alarm Settings window expands the basic alarm settings options to up to five  
severity levels.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Trigger Type  
If the Trigger Type is Low, an alarm is triggered when the input drops below  
the specified Trigger value; other severity level trigger values must decrease in  
value with each subsequent level. If the Trigger Type is High, an alarm is  
triggered when the input is higher than the specified Trigger value; other  
severity level trigger values must increase in value with each subsequent level.  
Clear Mode  
Level 1-5  
To clear an alarm, the input must drop below the specified value when Trigger  
Type is High or go above the specified value when Trigger Type is Low.  
Defines the Level severity settings for up to five levels. If the Trigger Type is  
Low, an alarm is triggered when the input drops below the specified Trigger  
value; other severity level trigger values must decrease in value with each  
subsequent level. If the Trigger Type is High, an alarm is triggered when the  
input is higher than the specified Trigger value; other severity level trigger  
values must increase in value with each subsequent level.  
272  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channels  
Trigger  
If the Trigger Type is Low, an alarm is triggered when the input drops below  
the specified Trigger value; other severity level trigger values must decrease in  
value with each subsequent level. If the Trigger Type is High, an alarm is  
triggered when the input is higher than the specified Trigger value; other  
severity level trigger values must increase in value with each subsequent level.  
Clear  
Email  
To clear an alarm, the input must drop below the specified value when Trigger  
Type is High or go above the specified value when Trigger Type is Low.  
When enabled, sends an email alert to an email account(s) set up in the System  
settings when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The email alert data includes the  
severity level and the value that caused the alarm to trigger or clear. The Email  
Alert is associated with Level Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
Syslog  
SNMP  
When enabled, sends a message to syslog when an alarm is triggered or  
cleared. The syslog entry includes the severity level and the value that caused  
the alarm to trigger or clear. The syslog message is associated with Level  
Critical.  
Default: Disabled  
When enabled, sends an SNMP trap when an alarm is triggered or cleared. The  
trap consists of the severity level and whether the alarm was triggered or  
cleared.  
Default: Disabled  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O UDP  
I/O UDP  
Industrial applications often monitor the status of I/O devices such as sensors, alarms, relays, etc. by  
polling for I/O data. The IOLAN’s I/O UDP feature can help to minimize network traffic by  
broadcasting I/O status to industrial applications on specified intervals, providing I/O status in a  
timely manner.  
The IOLAN’s I/O UDP broadcast feature sends the status of attached I/O devices to defined hosts on  
the network. Depending upon the IOLAN model and the configuration of the I/O channels, the UDP  
packet contains the current status and/or data of each enabled I/O channel or serial pin signal.  
UDP Unicast Format  
PC applications must be able to interpret the UDP packet to obtain I/O channel status and data. This  
section provides the detailed structure of the UDP datagram and its data format.  
UDP Broadcast Packet  
Version Total Packet Length Analog Section Digital/Relay Section Serial Pin Signal Section  
(1 Byte)  
(2 Bytes)  
Each section, with the exceptions of the Version and Total Packet Length sections, is comprised of its  
own subset of bytes.  
Note:  
All 2 byte values are in big Endian (network) order. All 4 byte values are IEEE 754 single  
precision floating point numbers in big Endian (network) order.  
z
z
z
Version—The current version of the format of I/O UDP broadcast packet.  
Total Packet Length—The total length of the UDP packet.  
Analog Section—The Analog Section of the UDP packet, which contains data/status of the  
Analog I/O channels. The Analog Channel Data subsection (within the Analog Section) will only  
exist if the channel(s) is enabled.  
z
z
Digital/Relay Section—The Digital/Relay Section of the UDP packet, which contains status of  
Digital and Relay I/O channels. The Channel Data subsection within the Digital/Relay Section  
will always be present.  
Serial Pin Signal Section—The Serial Pin Signal Section of the UDP packet, which contains the  
status of the IOLAN’s serial port’s control signal pins. The Serial Pin Signal Data subsection  
within the Serial Signal Pins Section will always be present.  
274  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I/O UDP  
Analog Section  
The Analog Section of the UDP packet is comprised of I/O data for each enabled Analog channel.  
If the IOLAN I/O model does not support Analog channels, the Analog Channel Data  
subsection of the Analog Section will NOT be present in the UDP packet.  
Section Channel  
Length Enabled  
Analog Channel Data (for each enabled channel)  
2 Bytes  
1 Byte  
curRawValue minRawValue maxRawValue curEngValue minEngValue maxEngValue  
2 Bytes  
2 Bytes  
2 Bytes  
4 Bytes  
4 Bytes  
4 Bytes  
z
z
Section Length—The total length of the Analog section (this value will vary, the field length is 2  
Bytes). This value will vary because it will contain one Analog Channel Data subsection  
(18 bytes) for each Analog channel that is enabled.  
Channel Enabled—The Channel Enabled field is 1 byte in least significant bit order, for each  
channel. If the channel is enabled, the bit is set to 1. If the channel is disabled, the bit is set to 0  
(zero).  
Channel Enabled (1 Byte, one bit for each channel)  
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1  
z
Analog Channel Data—Consists of Analog Channel Data for each enabled Analog channel on  
the IOLAN. If an Analog channel is disabled, there is no data for that channel. Therefore, the  
Analog Section will contain the Section Length value, the Channel Enabled value, and 18 bytes  
of I/O data for each enabled Analog channel. For example, an IOLAN I/O model with four  
Analog channels that has only three of those Analog channels enabled will contain 54 bytes of  
Analog Channel Data (18 bytes * 3 Analog channels).  
The following values make up the Analog Channel Data for each enabled Analog channel:  
z
z
z
z
curRawValue—The current raw value received by the channel.  
minRawValue—The minimum raw value received by the channel until it is cleared.  
maxRawValue—The maximum raw value received from the channel until it is cleared.  
curEngValue—The current raw value that has been converted to voltage/current for Analog  
or Celsius/Fahrenheit for Temperature.  
z
z
minEngValue—The minimum raw value that has been converted to voltage/current for  
Analog or Celsius/Fahrenheit for Temperature until it is cleared.  
maxEngValue—The maximum raw value that has been converted to voltage/current for  
Analog or Celsius/Fahrenheit for Temperature until it is cleared.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I/O UDP  
Digital/Relay Section  
The Digital/Relay Section of the UDP packet provides the status of Digital and Relay channels. The  
data for the status of each channel is represented by 1 byte, with each bit representing a channel (least  
significant bit format).  
The Digital/Relay Channel Data subsection is present in the UDP packet regardless of  
whether or not the IOLAN model supports Digital/Relay channels.  
Length Channel  
Enabled  
Digital/Relay Channel Data (1 Byte, one bit for each channel)  
2 Bytes  
1 Byte  
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1  
z
z
Length—The length of Digital/Relay Section within the UDP packet (this value will always be 2  
Bytes).  
Channel Enabled—This is based on the configuration of the Digital/Relay channels. The  
Channel Enabled field is 1 byte in least significant bit order, for each channel. If the channel is  
enabled, the bit is set to 1. If the channel is disabled, the bit is set to 0 (zero).  
Channel Enabled (1 Byte, one bit for each channel)  
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1  
z
Digital/Relay Channel Data—Each bit represents a channel status, 1 for on or 0 for off (unless  
the channel has been configured to be inverted, in which case 0 is on and 1 if off).  
Serial Pin Signal Section  
The Serial Pin Signal Section of the UDP packet provides the status of the serial pin signals from the  
IOLAN’s serial port. Each serial pin signal (DSR, DTR, CTS, etc.) is mapped to a bit in the 1-byte  
data section.  
The Serial Pin Signal Data subsection is present in the UDP packet regardless of whether or  
not the serial port is configured for the Control I/O profile or the serial pin signals are  
enabled.  
Length  
Pin  
Enabled  
Serial Pin Signal Data (1 Byte, one bit for each signal)  
RTS DTR CTS DCD  
2 Bytes  
1 Byte  
DSR  
z
z
Length—The total length of the Serial Pin Signal Data (this value will always be 2 Bytes).  
Pin Enabled—This based upon the configuration of the signal pins on the serial port. When the  
serial port profile is set to Control I/O and a serial pin signal(s) is enabled, the bit is set to 1. For  
any serial pin signals that are disabled, the bit is set to 0 (zero) and any data associated with those  
serial pin signals should be ignored.  
Pin Enabled (1 Byte, one bit for each serial pin signal)  
RTS  
DTR  
CTS  
DCD  
DSR  
z
Serial Pin Signal Data—1 byte with each bit being set to high (1) or low (0) for the appropriate  
serial pin signals.  
276  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
I/O Modbus Slave  
UDP Unicast Example  
For an example of the I/O UDP unicast, see the sample program, ioudpbcast.c, found on your CD-  
ROM.  
I/O Modbus Slave  
If you have a Modbus serial or TCP application, it can access I/O connected to the IOLAN when the  
I/O Global Modbus Slave is enabled. You must supply a unique UID for the IOLAN, as it will act as  
a Modbus Slave.  
There are three ways your Modbus Application can connect to the IOLAN to access I/O.  
Modbus Serial Application Connected to the Serial Port  
Your Modbus serial application can be connected right to the IOLAN serial port to access I/O.  
UID: 15  
Serial  
Power  
IOLAN  
PC running a  
Modbus Serial  
Application  
I/ODigital  
Output  
Modbus Serial Application Connected to the Network  
If you want to access the I/O from a LAN connection, you can install TruePort on the PC running the  
Modbus serial application as described in TruePort I/O on page 283 and connect to the IOLAN over  
the network.  
UID: 15  
Power  
Network  
IOLAN  
PC running a  
Modbus Serial  
I/ODigital  
Application  
Output  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Modbus I/O Access  
Modbus TCP Application  
If you have a Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII program, you can access the I/O by connecting to the  
IOLAN over the network.  
UID: 15  
IOLAN  
Power  
Network  
PC running a  
Modbus RTU  
or ASCII  
I/ODigital  
Output  
Application  
Modbus I/O Access  
The section defines the function codes and registers you will need to access the I/O through Modbus  
TCP, Modbus serial, or Modbus serial/TruePort.  
Function Codes  
The following function codes are supported by the IOLAN:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
01 read coils  
03 read multiple holding registers  
04 read input registers  
05 write coil  
06 write single register  
08 diagnostics (echo the request)  
15 force multiple coils  
16 write multiple registers  
There are four Modbus data models:  
Discrete Input  
Coils  
Not used  
Digital Input (DI), Alarm state for DI, Digital Output (DO). All coils  
are Boolean values and are 1 byte.  
Input Registers (IR)  
Holding Registers  
Analog Input (AI), Alarm state for AI. All Input Registers are 2 bytes  
long.  
Status (R), Control value (R/W or W). Holding Registers with _ENG  
registers are 4 bytes long, all other Holding Registers are 2 bytes  
long.  
All coil/register values are in decimal.  
278  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Modbus I/O Access  
I/O Coil/Register Descriptions  
This section contains descriptions of I/O coils:  
z
z
z
MB_REG_DI_SENSOR—Status of Digital input. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive. If Invert Signal is  
configured on, 0 is Active, 1 is Inactive. If input is Latched, returns latched status.  
MB_REG_DI_SENSOR_ALARM_STATE—Indication if input is in alarm state. 1 is In Alarm  
state, 0 is Not in Alarm state. A write of any value clears the alarm state.  
MB_REG_DO_SENSOR—Status of Digital output. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive. If Invert Signal  
is configured on, 0 is Active, 1 is Inactive.  
This section contains descriptions of I/O holding registers:  
z
MB_REG_HR_DI_SENSOR_LATCH—The latch status of the Digital input. 1 is Latched, 0 is  
Not latched. A write of any value will clear the latch.  
z
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_ISW—Inactive Signal Width. This is how long the  
channel will remain inactive during pulse mode in increments of 100ms. Valid values are 1-9999.  
The default is 1 (100 ms).  
z
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_ASW—Active Signal Width. This is how long the  
channel will be active during the pulse mode in increments of 100ms. Valid values are 1-9999.  
The default is 1 (100 ms).  
z
z
z
z
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_COUNT—The number of times the channel output  
will pulse. Each count consists of an active/inactive sequence. The default is 1 cycle.  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_ALARM_LATCH—Used to reset a latched alarm state. A write  
of any value will clear the alarm latch for the specific Analog input.  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_MAX—Used to reset the Analog input maximum value reached.  
A write of any value will reset the maximum.  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_MIN—Used to reset the Analog input minimum value reached. A  
write of any value will reset the minimum.  
This section contains descriptions of I/O input registers:  
z
MB_REG_IR_CURR_ENG—The current value of an Analog or Temperature input converted  
to appropriate units. For Analog, this will be in voltage or current, depending on the  
configuration. For the Temperature, this value will be in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on  
configuration.  
z
z
z
z
z
z
MB_REG_IR_MIN_ENG—The minimum converted value ever reached on this input since the  
IOLAN was re-started or a manual clear was issued.  
MB_REG_IR_MAX_ENG—The maximum converted value ever reached on this input since  
the IOLAN was re-started or a manual clear was issued.  
MB_REG_IR_CURR_RAW—The current raw value received from the Analog to Digital  
converter. This is a hexadecimal value in the range of 0 -0xFFFF.  
MB_REG_IR_MIN_RAW—The minimum raw value ever reached on this input since the  
IOLAN was re-started or a manual clear was issued.  
MB_REG_IR_MAX_RAW—The maximum converted value ever reached on this input since  
the IOLAN was re-started or a manual clear was issued.  
MB_REG_IR_ALARM_LEVEL—This gives the current alarm severity level for the  
corresponding Analog input. Severity levels range from 0 (not in alarm) to 5 (highest alarm  
severity).  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus I/O Access  
Serial Port Coil/Register Descriptions  
This section contains descriptions of serial port coils:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
MB_REG_DI_DSR—The status of the DSR input signal. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive. If Invert  
Signal is configured on, 0 is Active, 1 is Inactive. If input is Latched, returns latched status.  
MB_REG_DI_DSR_ALARM_STATE—The alarm state of DSR input signal. 1 is In Alarm  
state, 0 is Not in Alarm state. A write of any value clears the alarm state.  
MB_REG_DI_DCD—The status of DCD line. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive. If Invert Signal is  
configured on, 0 is Active, 1 is Inactive.  
MB_REG_DI_DCD_ALARM_STATE—The alarm state of DCD input signal. 1 is in Alarm  
state, 0 is Not in Alarm state. A write of any value clears the alarm state.  
MB_REG_DI_CTS—The status of CTS input signal. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive. If Invert Signal  
is configured on, 0 is Active, 1 is Inactive.  
MB_REG_DI_CTS_ALARM_STATE—The alarm state of CTS input signal. 1 is Alarm, 0 is  
Not in Alarm. A write of any value clears the alarm state.  
z
z
MB_REG_DO_DTR—The status of DTR output signal. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive.  
MB_REG_DO_RTS—The status of RTS output signal. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive.  
This section contains descriptions of serial port holding registers:  
z
z
z
MB_REG_HR_DI_DSR_LATCH—The latched status for the DSR signal. 1 is Latched, 0 is  
Not Latched. A write any value will clear the latch.  
MB_REG_HR_DI_DCD_LATCH—The latched status for the DCD signal. 1 is Latched, 0 is  
Not Latched. A write any value will clear the latch.  
MB_REG_HR_DI_CTS_LATCH—The latched status for the CTS signal. 1 is Latched, 0 is  
Not Latched. A write any value will clear the latch.  
A4/T4 Registers  
The following registers are supported by the IOLAN A4 and T4 Input models:  
Data Model  
A1/T1 A2/T2 A3/T3 A4/T4 R/W  
Holding Registers:  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_ALARM_LATCH 2049  
2050  
2114  
2178  
2051  
2115  
2179  
2052  
2116  
2180  
W
W
W
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_MAX  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_MIN  
2113  
2177  
Input Registers:  
MB_REG_IR_CURR_ENG  
MB_REG_IR_MIN_ENG  
MB_REG_IR_MAX_ENG  
MB_REG_IR_CURR_RAW  
MB_REG_IR_MIN_RAW  
MB_REG_IR_MAX_RAW  
MB_REG_IR_ALARM_LEVEL  
2080  
2082  
2084  
2086  
2087  
2088  
2089  
2112  
2114  
2116  
2118  
2119  
2120  
2121  
2144  
2146  
2148  
2150  
2151  
2152  
2153  
2176  
2178  
2180  
2182  
2183  
2184  
2185  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
280  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Modbus I/O Access  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers  
The following coils and registers are supported by the IOLAN A4D2 and A4R2 I/O models:  
Data Model  
Coils:  
A1  
A2  
A3 A4 D1/R1 D2/R2 R/W  
MB_REG_DI_SENSOR  
-----  
-----  
-----  
----- ----- ----- 6149  
----- ----- ----- 6213  
----- ----- ----- 6661  
6150  
6214  
6662  
R
MB_REG_DI_SENSOR_ALARM_STATE  
MB_REG_DO_SENSOR  
R/W  
R/W  
*
Holding Registers:  
MB_REG_HR_DI_SENSOR_LATCH  
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_ISW  
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_ASW  
-----  
-----  
-----  
----- ----- ----- 6149  
----- ----- ----- 6213  
----- ----- ----- 6277  
----- ----- ----- 6341  
6150  
6214  
6278  
6342  
-----  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
W
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_COUNT -----  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_ALARM_LATCH 2049 2050 2051 2052 -----  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_MAX  
MB_REG_HR_AI_CLEAR_MIN  
2113 2114 2115 2116 -----  
2177 2178 2179 2180 -----  
-----  
W
-----  
W
Input Registers:  
MB_REG_IR_CURR_ENG  
MB_REG_IR_MIN_ENG  
MB_REG_IR_MAX_ENG  
MB_REG_IR_CURR_RAW  
MB_REG_IR_MIN_RAW  
MB_REG_IR_MAX_RAW  
MB_REG_IR_ALARM_LEVEL  
2080 2112 2144 2176 -----  
2082 2114 2146 2178 -----  
2084 2116 2148 2180 -----  
2086 2118 2150 2182 -----  
2087 2119 2151 2183 -----  
2088 2120 2152 2184 -----  
2089 2121 2153 2185 -----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
*For DI alarm state, read will get state, write will clear alarm.  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modbus I/O Access  
D4/D2R2 Registers  
The following coils and registers are supported by the IOLAN D4 and D2R2 I/O models:  
Data Model  
Coils:  
MB_REG_DI_SENSOR  
D1  
D2  
D3/R1 D4/R2  
R/W  
6145  
6209  
6657  
6146  
6210  
6658  
6147  
6211  
6659  
6148  
6212  
6660  
R
MB_REG_DI_SENSOR_ALARM_STATE  
MB_REG_DO_SENSOR  
R/W  
R/W  
*
Holding Registers:  
MB_REG_HR_DI_SENSOR_LATCH  
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_ISW  
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_ASW  
6145  
6209  
6273  
6146  
6210  
6274  
6338  
6147  
6211  
6275  
6339  
6148  
6212  
6276  
6340  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
MB_REG_HR_DO_SENSOR_PULSE_COUNT 6337  
*For DI alarm state, read will get state, write will clear alarm.  
Serial Pin Signals  
The following coils and registers are supported by the IOLAN I/O models:  
Data Model  
Coils:  
Pin  
R/W  
MB_REG_DI_DSR  
4225  
4289  
4353  
4417  
4481  
4545  
4673  
4737  
R
MB_REG_DI_DSR_ALARM_STATE  
MB_REG_DI_DCD  
R/W  
R
MB_REG_DI_DCD_ALARM_STATE  
MB_REG_DI_CTS  
R/W  
R
MB_REG_DI_CTS_ALARM_STATE  
MB_REG_DO_DTR  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
MB_REG_DO_RTS  
Holding Registers:  
MB_REG_HR_DI_DSR_LATCH  
MB_REG_HR_DI_DCD_LATCH  
MB_REG_HR_DI_CTS_LATCH  
4097  
4609  
5121  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
282  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TruePort I/O  
TruePort I/O  
You can see a sample API I/O over TruePort program called ioapiotp.c on the CD-ROM.  
TruePort/Modbus Combination  
If you have a Modbus serial application running on a PC that is connected to a network, you can use  
TruePort as a virtual serial connection to communicate with the IOLAN over the network to access  
I/O data. You also have the option of enabling SSL as a security option to encrypt the data that is  
communicated between the IOLAN and the host machine (SSL/TLS must be configured in the Server  
settings and on the TruePort host).  
UID: 15  
Power  
Network  
PC running a  
Modbus Serial  
Application/  
TruePort  
IOLAN  
I/ODigital  
Output  
The host running TruePort must be in Modbus/ASCII or Modbus/RTU mode.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TruePort I/O  
API Over TruePort Only  
If you have a custom application that talks to a serial port, you can use TruePort as a virtual serial  
port to communicate with the IOLAN over the network to access I/O data using the Perle API. You  
also have the option of enabling SSL as a security option to encrypt the data that is communicated  
between the IOLAN and the host machine (SSL/TLS must be configured in the Server settings and  
on the TruePort host). See Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort on page 285 for more information on  
the API.)  
Power  
Network  
IOLAN  
PC running  
Custom  
I/ODigital  
Output  
Application (API)/  
TruePort  
The host running TruePort must be in I/O API mode.  
284  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort  
Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort  
Introduction  
Analog and Digital I/O data, as well as output control, can be accessed in several ways. To have  
access from an application running on a workstation or server, the I/O Applications Program Interface  
(API) provided within Trueport can be used. This API uses a command/response format to get or set  
data on each individual I/O channel register. A sample program (ioapiotp.c) demonstrating typical  
usage can be found on the IOLAN product CD-ROM.  
Setup  
After TruePort has been properly installed and configured on the workstation or server and initiated  
from the application, it will setup a connection to the appropriate IOLAN. It will then be available to  
relay commands to the IOLAN and communicate responses back the application. TruePort will create  
a COM port to which the application can write commands to and read responses from. Since all  
communications are done via this COM port, the application need only use standard serial  
communication interface calls.  
The following steps should be taken:  
1. Install the Trueport software on the server or workstation on which the application will be  
running.  
2. Configure the virtual communication port (COM) (see Trueport User Guide for details).  
3. Run the application. Typically the application will:  
a. Open the COM port.  
b. Send Commands to the COM port using standard write commands.  
c. Read Responses from the COM port using standard read commands.  
All commands are forwarded to the IOLAN over the network where the specific I/O  
channel registers are modified or read, and then responses are sent back to TruePort  
where they will be made available to be read from the COM port.  
d. Once the desired operations are completed, the COM port can be closed.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort  
Format of API Commands  
There are two groups of commands:  
z
z
Get Commands—Retrieve values of the I/O channel registers  
Set Commands—Set values on the I/O channel registers.  
All commands need to be written to the COM port as a single write.  
I/O Channel registers are all assigned unique addresses, which need to be referenced in all of the  
commands. Please refer to the documentation specific you the applicable mode, for the list and  
addresses of all the registers.  
Model  
A4  
Go to...  
A4/T4 Registers on page 280  
A4/T4 Registers on page 280  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers on page 281  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers on page 281  
D4/D2R2 Registers on page 282  
D4/D2R2 Registers on page 282  
T4  
A4D2  
A4R2  
D4  
D2/R2  
Get Commands  
The following tables show the general structure to be used for Get commands.  
Note:  
Numeric values provided in the API documentation are in Hexadecimal (Hex) format.  
Command Format  
Byte(s)  
# of Bytes  
Value  
1
1
Command Code:  
z
z
z
0x01 – Get “coils” (Boolean register)  
0x03 – Get “holding registers” (R/W registers)  
0x04 – Get “input registers” (R only register)  
2-3  
4-5  
2
2
Starting register number (see A4/T4 Registers on page 280,  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers on page 281, or D4/D2R2 Registers on page 282  
for this value).  
Number of registers to read. If this value is greater than 1, the response  
will contain the values of multiple consecutive registers.  
Response Format  
Byte(s)  
# of Bytes  
Value  
1
1
Command that this is a response to. If an error has been detected, the  
command value will have the high bit set (OR with 0x80). For  
example: The command is 0x04, so the command field in the response  
would be 0x84.  
2
1
n
Length of data (in bytes) starting in next byte.  
Requested register values.  
3-n  
286  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort  
Example 1: Read the status of the first digital input (DI1) on a D2R2 unit.  
DI1 sensor is a coil register with the decimal value of 6145 (hex 0x1801).  
Request: 0x01 0x18 0x01 0x00 0x01  
Response: 0x01 0x01 0x01 (Digital input 1 is active)  
Example 2: Read the values for the Inactive Signal Width, Active Signal Width, and Pulse  
count for the second digital output (DO2) on a D4 unit.  
DO2, Inactive Signal Width is a holding register with the decimal value of 6210 (hex 0x1842).  
Request: 0x03 0x18 0x42 0x00 0x03  
Response: 0x03 0x06 0x00 0x0A 0x00 0x11 0x00 0x0F  
(Inactive =10*100ms, Active= 17*100ms, and Pulse count = 15)  
Example 3: Read the raw current, minimum and maximum values of the third Analog input  
(A3) on an A4D2 unit.  
A3 current raw value is an input register with the decimal value of 2150 (hex 0x0866).  
Request: 0x04 0x08 0x86 0x00 0x03  
Response: 0x04 0x06 0x10 0x03 0x0F 0x30 0x10 0x20  
(Current = 0x1003, Minimum = 0x0F30, and Maximum = 0x1020)  
Set Commands  
The following tables show the general structure to be used for set commands.  
Numeric values provided in the API documentation are in Hexadecimal (Hex) format.  
Command Format  
Byte(s)  
# of Bytes  
Value  
1
1
Command Code (in hex):  
z
z
0x0F – Set “Boolean registers” (R/W coils)  
0x10 – Set “holding registers” (read/write registers)  
2-3  
4-5  
2
2
Starting register number (see A4/T4 Registers on page 280,  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers on page 281, or D4/D2R2 Registers on page 282  
for this value).  
Number of registers to set. If this value is greater than 1, the response  
will contain the values of multiple consecutive registers.  
6
1
n
The length of the data (in bytes) to be written to the registers.  
Data to be written to the registers.  
7-n  
If accessing registers which are 2 or 4 bytes, the data is in Network  
order (Big endian) format (that is, MSB, LSB).  
For Boolean registers, the value field will be a bit field with the LSBit  
corresponding to the IO channel referenced by the starting register.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessing I/O Data Via TruePort  
Successful Response Format  
Byte(s)  
# of Bytes  
Value  
1
2
1
2
Command code (from request).  
Starting register number (see A4/T4 Registers on page 280,  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers on page 281, or D4/D2R2 Registers on page 282  
for this value) from request.  
4
2
Number of registers written.  
Unsuccessful Response Format  
Byte(s)  
# of Bytes  
Value  
1
1
Command that this is a response to. If an error has been detected, the  
command value will have the high bit set (OR with 0x80). For  
example: The Command is 0x10, so the command field in the response  
would be 0x90.  
1
1
Error code, see Error Codes on page 289.  
Example 1: Turn on the first relay on a D2R2 unit.  
The first relay (R1) is a digital out coil register with a decimal value of 6659 (hex 0x1A03).  
Request: 0x0F 0x1A 0x03 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x01  
Response: 0x0F 0x1A 0x03 0x00 0x01  
Example 2: Turn on the first and second relay on a D2R2 unit.  
The first relay (R1) is a digital out coil register with a decimal value of 6659 (hex 0x1A03).  
Request: 0x0F 0x1A 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x01 0x03 (03 = “00000011” which sets R1 and R2 to 1)  
Response: 0x0F 0x1A 0x03 0x00 0x02  
Note:  
When reading or writing consecutive “Boolean” (coils) registers, the values of the registers  
are combined into a single byte as shown by the example above. Two registers (coils) are  
being written but the length of the data is 1 byte. The one byte contains the value for both  
registers as follows:  
288  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
I/O SNMP Traps  
Error Codes  
Code Name  
Description  
01 Illegal Function  
The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for  
the server (or slave).  
02 Illegal Data  
Address  
The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for  
the server (or slave).  
03 Illegal Data Value A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for  
server (or slave).  
04 Slave Device  
Failure  
An unrecoverable error occurred while the server (or slave) was  
attempting to perform the requested action.  
I/O SNMP Traps  
When you enable SNMP traps for Digital and Analog inputs, a value is returned when an alarm  
triggers or clears. This section decodes the SNMP specific trap numbers. The value returned from the  
trap will be the I/O channel number that is generating the trap.  
Specific  
Trap #  
Alarm  
Description  
0
1
IO_DI_ALARM_SENSOR  
IO_DI_ALARM_SERIAL_DSR  
IO_DI_ALARM_SERIAL_DCD  
IO_DI_ALARM_SERIAL_CTS  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL1  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL2  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL3  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL4  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL5  
IO_DI_ALARM_SENSOR_CLEAR  
Trap for the Digital input Trigger.  
Trap for the Digital input DSR serial pin Trigger.  
Trap for the Digital input DCD serial pin Trigger.  
Trap for the Digital input CTS serial pin Trigger.  
Trap for Analog input Alarm Level 1.  
Trap for Analog input Alarm Level 2.  
Trap for Analog input Alarm Level 3.  
Trap for Analog input Alarm Level 4.  
Trap for Analog input Alarm Level 5.  
Trap for Digital input trigger Clear Mode.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
IO_DI_ALARM_SERIAL_DSR_CLEAR Trap for Digital input DSR serial pin trigger Clear  
Mode.  
11  
12  
IO_DI_ALARM_SERIAL_DCD_CLEAR Trap for Digital input DCD serial pin trigger Clear  
Mode.  
IO_DI_ALARM_SERIAL_CTS_CLEAR Trap for Digital input CTS serial pin trigger Clear  
Mode.  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL1_CLEAR  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL2_CLEAR  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL3_CLEAR  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL4_CLEAR  
IO_AI_ALARM_LEVEL5_CLEAR  
Trap for the Analog input Alarm Level 1 Clear.  
Trap for the Analog input Alarm Level 2 Clear.  
Trap for the Analog input Alarm Level 3 Clear.  
Trap for the Analog input Alarm Level 4 Clear.  
Trap for the Analog input Alarm Level 5 Clear.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
I/O SNMP Traps  
290  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Clustering  
Chapter 11  
11  
Introduction  
Clustering is a way to provide access to the serial ports of many IOLANs  
through a single IP address.  
Clustering Slave List  
Overview  
The IP address that will be used to access all clustered serial ports will be that of the Master IOLAN  
in the cluster. All other IOLANs in the cluster will be referred to as Slave IOLANs. Users can also  
access slave serial ports using EasyPort Web; EasyPort Web is automatically launched when a user  
types in the IP address of the Master IOLAN in a web browser. If the user has admin privileges, the  
WebManager will first be displayed with an option to proceed to EasyPort Web.  
The Clustering Slave List window displays the slave IOLAN entries and the number of ports on  
those slave IOLANs.  
No special configuration is required on the Slave IOLANs to enable this functionality.  
The following buttons are available:  
Add Button  
Click this button to display a window to configure and add a new Slave  
IOLAN’s configuration to the clustering group.  
See Adding Clustering Slaves on page 292 for more information.  
Delete Button  
Select a Slave IOLAN and click this button to delete it from the clustering  
group.  
Advanced Button Select a Slave IOLAN and click this button to configure the individual Slave  
IOLAN’s serial ports.  
See Advanced Clustering Slave Options on page 293 for more information.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Clustering Slave List  
Adding Clustering Slaves  
Overview  
When you add a clustering slave IOLAN entry, you are adding the IOLAN that users will access  
through this master IOLAN.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Server Name  
Specify a name for the slave IOLAN in the clustering group. This name does  
not have to correspond to the proper host name, as it is just used within the  
IOLAN.  
Field Format: Maximum 15 alphanumeric characters, including spaces  
IP Address  
Specify the IP address of the slave IOLAN in the clustering group.  
Field Format: IPv4  
Number of Ports  
Specify the number of ports in the Slave IOLAN that you are adding to the  
clustering group.  
Data Options: 1, 2, 4, 8, 18, 24, 36, 48  
Default: 1  
Starting Slave TCP Specify the first TCP Port number (as specified in the slave IOLAN’s serial  
Port  
port configuration) on the slave host.  
Default: 10001, and increments by one for each serial port  
Starting Master  
TCP Port  
Specify the TCP port number you want to map the first slave IOLAN DS Port  
number to. This number should not be a port number that is already in use by  
the master IOLAN.  
Default: 1024, and then increments by one for each new slave entry  
Protocol  
Specify the protocol that will be used to access the slave IOLAN port.  
Data Options: SSH, Telnet  
Field Format: Telnet  
292  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Clustering Slave List  
Advanced Clustering Slave Options  
Overview  
The Advanced button provides a means of configuring each individual serial port’s name, connection  
protocol, and port association in the clustered IOLAN slave. The Clustering Slave Settings window  
displays each clustered serial port slave entry, you need to click the Edit button to configure the  
individual serial port settings.  
If you click the Retrieve Port Names button, the DeviceManager will connect to the clustering slave  
IOLAN and download all the serial port names--you can change the names and other settings when  
you click the Edit button.  
Editing Clustering Slave Settings  
Change the individual serial port settings Slave Port Settings window.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Port Name  
Specify a name for the port.  
Default: A combination of the port number, the @ symbol, and the IP address;  
for example, [email protected].  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Clustering Slave List  
Slave TCP Port  
Specify the TCP Port number configured on the Slave IOLAN that is  
associated to the port number you are configuring.  
Range: 1-99999  
Master TCP Port Specify the TCP port number you want to map to the Slave IOLAN TCP Port.  
User’s will use this TCP port number to access the Slave IOLAN’s port.  
Default: 1024, and then increments by one for each new slave entry  
Protocol  
Specify the protocol that will be used to access the port.  
Data Options: SSH, Telnet  
Default: Telnet  
294  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Option  
Card  
Chapter 12  
12  
Introduction  
SCS models have a built-in option card slot that supports either a Perle  
IOLAN modem card (purchased separately) or Perle PCI Adapter card  
(purchased separately) for use with a user supplied wireless WAN card.  
Option Card Settings  
Overview  
The Option Card settings allow you to configure the option card slot for either a Perle IOLAN  
modem card or a Perle PCI Adapter/wireless WAN card.  
Functionality  
The Perle IOLAN modem card or Perle PCI Adapter/wireless WAN card slide into the PCI slot as  
described in Installing a Perle PCI Card on page 395.  
Configuring the IOLAN Modem Card  
The IOLAN Modem card Configure button automatically takes you to the Terminal serial port  
profile, although you can set and configure any serial port profile appropriate for modem use. See the  
Chapter 7, Configuring Serial Ports on page 113 for information on the configuration options for the  
serial port profile that fits your modem usage.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring a Wireless WAN Card  
Configuring a Wireless WAN Card  
Overview  
SCS IOLAN models support a wireless WAN card that can be installed to permit access to the  
IOLAN via the internet or other WAN network. When the PCI card type has been configured to be a  
Wireless WAN card, the serial port associated with the wireless WAN card is automatically set to  
PPP. No other PPP configuration is typically required. The wireless WAN card will establish a GPRS  
data connection over the service provider’s GSM network. The service provider will assign an IP  
address to your wireless connection. This address may be public or private and it may be dynamically  
or statically assigned, depending on the type of account established with the service provider. If a  
static, public IP address has been assigned, the IOLAN will be directly accessible via that IP address.  
If a dynamic, public IP address has been assigned, you may access your IOLAN with the assistance  
of a dynamic DNS service provider. These service providers provide a method of accessing your  
device server using a standard URL (for example, yourcompany.dyndns.org), when the IP address  
assigned by the Wireless provider is dynamic. The IOLAN SCS supports dynamic DNS updates to  
DynDNS.com (see www.DynDNS.com for more information).  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Card  
Specify the wireless WAN card you are using.  
Data Options:  
z
Sierra Wireless AirCard 881—You are using a Sierra Wireless AirCard  
881 WAN card.  
z
Sony Ericsson PC300—You are using a Sony Ericsson PC300 wireless  
WAN card.  
z
z
z
Sierra Wireless—You are using a Sierra wireless WAN card.  
Sony Ericsson—You are using a Sony Ericsson wireless WAN card.  
Use Standard Driver—If the wireless WAN card you are using is not  
listed, try the standard driver.  
z
Use Custom Driver—A custom driver downloaded from the Perle  
website.  
Default: Sierra Wireless AirCard 881  
296  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring a Wireless WAN Card  
APN  
Specify the APN required by your internet provider to access their network.  
See the internet provider documentation for more information.  
User Name  
Password  
Specify the name required by your internet provider to access their network.  
Specify the password required by your internet provider to access their  
network.  
Phone Number  
Specify the phone number provided by your service provider to access their  
wireless network.  
Field Format: Probably similar to *99***1#  
Initialization String Specify the initialization string required by your internet service provider for  
your wireless WAN card.  
When you click the Advanced button, the Remote Access (PPP) profile is displayed. The wireless  
WAN card uses PPP to communicate with its wireless provider. See Remote Access (PPP) Profile on  
page 181 for information on how to configure PPP.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring a Wireless WAN Card  
298  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the System  
Chapter 13  
13  
Introduction  
This chapter describes the alerts (email and syslog) that can be configured  
for the IOLAN and the advanced options (SNMP, time, custom  
applications/plugins, and other miscellaneous configuration options) that  
you will want to look at to see if they are required for your implementation.  
Alerts  
Email Alerts  
Overview  
Email notification can be set at the Server and/or Line levels. You can set email notification at these  
levels because it is possible that the person who administers the IOLAN might not be the same person  
who administers the serial device(s) attached to the IOLAN port. Therefore, email notification can be  
sent to the proper person(s) responsible for the hardware.  
Functionality  
Email notification requires an SMTP host that is accessible by the IOLAN to process the email  
messages sent by the IOLAN. When you enable email notification at the Server level, you can also  
use those settings at the serial port level, or you can configure email notification specifically for each  
serial port. When you choose an event Level, you are selecting the lowest notification level; for  
example, if you select Level Error, you will get notifications for all events that trigger Error, Critical,  
Alert, and Emergency messages. The level order, from most inclusive to least inclusive, is as  
follows: Debug, Info, Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert, Emergency.  
The following events trigger an email notification on the System for the specified Level:  
z
Reboot, Alert Level  
z
z
z
IOLAN System Failure, Error Level  
Authentication Failure, Notice Level  
Successful Login, Downloads (all), Configuration Save Commands, Info Level  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Alerts  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Enable Email Alert Enables/disables a global email alerts setting. Even if this option is disabled,  
you can still configure individual serial port email alerts. When this option is  
enabled, individual serial ports can inherit these email alerts settings.  
Default: Disabled  
Level  
Choose the event level that triggers an email notification.  
Data Options: Emergency, Alert, Critical, Error, Warning, Notice, Info,  
Debug  
Default: Emergency  
To  
An email address or list of email addresses that will receive the email  
notification.  
Subject  
From  
A text string, which can contain spaces, that will display in the Subject field of  
the email notification.  
This field can contain an email address that might identify the IOLAN name or  
some other value.  
Reply To  
The email address to whom all replies to the email notification should go.  
Outgoing Mail  
Server  
The SMTP host (email server) that will process the email notification request.  
This can be either a host name defined in the IOLAN host table or the SMTP  
host IP address.  
300  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alerts  
Syslog  
Overview  
The IOLAN can be configured to send system log messages to a syslog daemon running on a remote  
host if the Syslog service is activated. You can configure a primary and secondary host for the syslog  
information and specify the level for which you want syslog information sent.  
You must ensure that the Syslog Client service in the Security, Services window is enabled  
(by default it is enabled) for these settings to work.  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Primary Host  
The first preconfigured host that the IOLAN will attempt to send system log  
messages to; messages will be displayed on the host’s monitor.  
Default: None  
Secondary Host  
If the IOLAN cannot communicate with the primary host, then the IOLAN will  
attempt to send system log messages to this preconfigured host; messages will  
be displayed on the host’s monitor.  
Default: None  
Level  
Choose the event level that triggers a syslog entry.  
Data Options: Emergency, Alert, Critical, Error, Warning, Notice, Info, Debug  
Default: Emergency  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Management  
Management  
SNMP  
Overview  
If you are using SNMP to manage/configure the IOLAN, or to view statistics or traps, you must set  
up a User in SNMP version 3 or a Community in SNMP version 1,2 to allow your SNMP manager to  
connect to the IOLAN; this can be done in the DeviceManager, WebManager, CLI, or Menu. You  
must then load the perle-sds.MIB (found on the CD-ROM packaged with the IOLAN) file into your  
SNMP manager before you connect to the IOLAN.  
Ensure that the SNMP service found in the Security, Services page is enabled (by default it  
is enabled).  
Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Contact  
The name and contract information of the person who manages this SMNP  
node.  
Location  
The physical location of the SNMP node.  
Community  
The name of the group that devices and management stations running SNMP  
belong to.  
302  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Management  
Internet Address The IP address of the SNMP manager that will send requests to the IOLAN. If  
the address is 0.0.0.0, any SNMP manager with the Community name can  
access the IOLAN. If you specify a network address, for example  
172.16.0.0, any SNMP manager within the local network with the  
Community name can access the IOLAN.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Permissions  
Permits the IOLAN to respond to SNMP requests.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
None—There is no response to requests from SNMP.  
Readonly—Responds only to Read requests from SNMP.  
Readwrite—Responds to both Read and Write requests from SNMP.  
Default: None  
V3 Read-Write  
User  
Specified user can view and edit SNMP variables.  
V3 Read-Write  
Security Level  
Select the security level for the Read-Writer user. This must match the  
configuration set up in the SNMP manager.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
None—No security is used.  
Auth—User authentication is used.  
Auth/Priv—User authentication and privacy (encryption) settings are  
used.  
Default: None  
V3  
V3 Read-Write  
Auth Algorithm  
Specify the authentication algorithm that will be used for the read-write user.  
Data Options: MD5, SHA  
Default: MD5  
V3 Read-Write  
Auth Password  
Type in the read-write user’s authentication password.  
Retype the user’s authentication password.  
V3 Read-Write  
Confirm Password  
V3 Read-Write  
Privacy Algorithm  
Specify the read-write user’s privacy algorithm (encryption).  
Data Options: DES, AES  
Default: DES  
V3 Read-Write  
Privacy Password  
Type in the read-write user’s privacy password.  
Retype the privacy password.  
V3 Read-Write  
Confirm Password  
V3 Read-Only User Specified user can only view SNMP variables.  
V3 Read-Only  
Security Level  
Select the security level for the Read-Only user. This must match the  
configuration set up in the SNMP manager.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
None—No security is used.  
Auth—User authentication is used.  
Auth/Priv—User authentication and privacy (encryption) settings are  
used.  
Default: None  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
V3 Read-Only Auth Specify the authentication algorithm that will be used for the read-only user.  
Algorithm  
Data Options: MD5, SHA  
Default: MD5  
V3 Read-Only Auth Type in the read-only user’s authentication password.  
Password  
V3 Read-Only  
Retype the user’s authentication password.  
Confirm Password  
V3 Read-Only  
Privacy Algorithm  
Specify the read-only user’s privacy algorithm (encryption).  
Data Options: DES, AES  
Default: DES  
V3 Read-Only  
Privacy Password  
Type in the read-only user’s privacy password.  
Retype the privacy password.  
V3 Read-Only  
Confirm Password  
Trap  
The trap receiver is the network management system (NMS) that should  
receive the SNMP traps. This NMS must have the same SNMP community  
string as the trap sender. The IOLAN supports SNMP traps for restart and  
SNMP community authentication error.  
Internet Address Defines the hosts (by IP address) that will receive trap messages generated by  
the IOLAN. Up to four trap hosts can be defined.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Time  
Overview  
You can set standard and summer time (daylight savings time) in the IOLAN. You can specify the  
summer time settings as absolute, on a fixed date and time, or relative, on something like the third  
day of the third week at this time in June.  
Functionality  
The IOLAN has a real-time internal clock, allowing the date and time to be set and viewed. It will  
maintain the time over a short power outage and after reboots of the IOLAN. If you do not set the  
time, it will start the clock at the factory set time.  
When you set the IOLAN’s time, the connection method and time zone settings can affect the actual  
internal clock time that is being set. For example, if you are connecting to the IOLAN through the  
DeviceManager and your PC’s time zone is set to Pacific Standard Time (GMT -8:00) and the  
IOLAN’s time zone is set to Eastern Standard Time (GMT -5:00), the IOLAN’s time is actually three  
hours ahead of your PC’s time. Therefore, if you set the IOLAN’s time to 2:30 pm in the  
DeviceManager, the IOLAN’s actual internal clock time is 5:30 pm. This is the only configuration  
method that interprets the time and converts it between time zones, as necessary.  
304  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Management  
Network Time Tab Field Descriptions  
You can configure your SNTP client in the IOLAN to automatically synchronize the IOLAN’s time.  
Configure the following parameters:  
SNTP Mode  
The SNTP mode.  
Data Options:  
z
z
None—SNTP is turned off.  
Unicast—Sends a request packet periodically to the Primary host. If  
communication with the Primary host fails, the request will be sent to the  
Secondary host.  
z
z
Multicast—Listen for any broadcasts from an SNTP server and then  
synchronizes its internal clock to the message.  
Anycast—Sends a request packet as a broadcast on the LAN to get a  
response from any SNTP server. The first response that is received is used  
to synchronize its internal clock and then operates in Unicast mode with  
that SNTP server.  
Default: None  
SNTP Version  
Version of SNTP.  
Range: 1-4  
Default: 4  
Primary Host  
The name of the primary SNTP server from the IOLAN host table. Valid with  
Unicast and Multicast modes, although in Multicast mode, the IOLAN will  
only accept broadcasts from the specified host SNTP server.  
Secondary Host  
The name of the secondary SNTP server from the IOLAN host table. Valid  
with Unicast and Multicast modes, although in Multicast mode, the IOLAN  
will only accept broadcasts from the specified host SNTP server.  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
Time Zone/Summer Time Tab Field Descriptions  
You can configure an automatic summer time (daylight savings time) time change.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Time Zone Name The name of the time zone to be displayed during standard time.  
Field Format: Maximum 4 characters and minimum 3 characters (do not use  
angled brackets < >)  
Time Zone Offset The offset from UTC for your local time zone.  
Field Format: Hours hh (valid -12 to +14) and minutes mm (valid 0 to 59  
minutes)  
Summer Time  
Name  
The name of the configured summer time zone; this will be displayed during  
the summer time setting. If this parameter is not set, then the summertime  
feature will not work.  
Field Format: Maximum 4 characters and minimum 3 characters (do not use  
angled brackets < >)  
Summer Time  
Offset  
The offset from standard time in minutes. Valid values are 0 to 180.  
Range: 0-180  
Default: 60  
Summer Time  
Mode  
You can configure the summer time to take effect:  
z
z
None—No summer time change.  
Fixed—The summer time change goes into effect at the specified time  
every year. For example, April 15 at 1:00 pm.  
z
Recurring—The summer time changes goes into effect every year at same  
relative time. For example, on the third week in April on a Tuesday at 1:00  
pm.  
Default: None  
Fixed Start Date  
Fixed End Date  
Sets the exact date and time in which the IOLAN’s clock will change to  
summer time (daylight saving time) hours.  
Sets the exact date and time in which the IOLAN’s clock will end summer time  
hours and change to standard time.  
306  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
Recurring Start  
Date  
Sets the relative date and time in which the IOLAN’s clock will change to  
summer time (daylight saving time) hours. Sunday is considered the first day of  
the week.  
Recurring End Date Sets the relative date and time in which the IOLAN’s clock will end summer  
time hours and change to standard time. Sunday is considered the first day of  
the week.  
Custom App/Plugin  
Overview  
You can create custom applications for the IOLAN by using the Perle SDK. See the SDK  
Programmer’s Guide (the SDK and guide are accessible via a request form located on the Perle  
website at www.perle.com/supportfiles/SDK_Request.shtml) for information about the  
functions that are supported. You must download the program and any ancillary files to the IOLAN  
and set the Serial Port Profile to Custom App/Plugin to run a custom application. You must also  
specify the program executable in the Command Line parameter.  
A custom application or plugin can be run on the serial port. In this situation, the application will start  
once the serial port is activated and operate solely on the context of that serial port and any network  
communications related to that serial port. You could run a different custom application on each serial  
port. The serial port custom application or plugin is configured by specifying the Custom  
App/Plugin profile for the serial port.  
The system level custom application or plugin will begin execution immediately following the system  
startup. It runs on the context of the whole system and can access network communications as well as  
any or all serial ports.  
Field Description  
Configure the following parameter:  
Command Line  
The name of the application that has been already been downloaded to the  
IOLAN, plus any parameters you want to pass to the program. For example,  
using sample outrawprogram (this is sample program supplied with the  
SDK), you would type:  
outraw -s 0 192.168.2.1:10001 Acct:10001  
if you were starting the application on the Server (notice the -s 0parameter  
specifies serial port 1 to this particular application).  
Field Format: Maximum of 80 characters  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Management  
Advanced  
Overview  
Review the configuration options in the Advanced page to determine if any of them apply to your  
implementation.  
Login Tab Field Descriptions  
Configure the following parameters:  
Use System Name Displays the System Name field value instead of default product name. When  
in Prompts  
enabled, the Server Name is displayed in the IOLAN login prompt, CLI  
prompt, WebManager login screen, and the heading of the Menu.  
Default: Disabled  
Display Login  
Banner  
This parameter concerns the banner information (product name/software  
version). This banner information is presented to a user with a login prompt.  
For security reasons, you can turn off the display of this information.  
Default: Disabled  
Use Custom Login When set, and a custom language file is in use, the login prompt will use the  
Prompt  
string defined in the language file as the login prompt instead of the default  
prompt, login:.  
Default: Disabled  
Bypass Login  
Password  
When set, authorized users who do not have a password set, with the exception  
of the Admin user, WILL NOT be prompted for a password at login with Local  
Authentication.  
Default: Disabled  
Use a Generic  
WebManager  
Login Screen  
When set, and the user connects to the IOLAN using WebManager, the  
WebManager login screen that is displayed is generic — the Perle banner,  
IOLAN model name, and firmware version are not displayed to the user.  
Default: Disabled  
Password Retry  
Limit  
The number of attempts a user is allowed to enter a password for a serial port  
connection from the network, before the connection is terminated and the user  
has to attempt to login again. For users logging into the serial port, if this limit  
is exceeded, the serial port is disabled for 5 minutes. A user with Admin level  
rights can restart the serial port, bypassing the timeout, by issuing a kill on the  
disabled serial port.  
Default: 3  
308  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Management  
Bootup Files Tab Field Descriptions  
You must have a TFTP server running on any host that you are uploading or downloading files  
to/from. When you specify the file path, the path must be relative to the default path set in your TFTP  
server software.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Firmware Host  
The host name or IP address of the server that contains the firmware file. If you  
use a host name, it must exist in the IOLAN’s host table or be resolved by  
DNS.  
Field Format: Resolvable host name, IPv4 address, IPv6 address  
Firmware File  
The path and file name, relative to the default path of your TFTP server  
software, of the update software for the IOLAN that will be loaded when the  
IOLAN is rebooted.  
Configuration Host The host name or IP address of the server that contains the configuration file. If  
you use a host name, it must exist in the IOLAN’s host table or be resolved by  
DNS.  
Field Format: Resolvable host name, IPv4 address, IPv6 address  
Configuration File The path and file name, relative to the default path of your TFTP server  
software, of the configuration file for the IOLAN that will be loaded when the  
IOLAN is rebooted.  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
Message of the Day (MOTD) Tab Field Descriptions  
The message of the day is displayed when users log into the IOLAN through a telnet or SSH session  
or through WebManager or EasyPort Web.  
There are two ways to retrieve the message of the day to be displayed to users when they log into the  
IOLAN:  
z
The message of the day file is retrieved from a TFPT server every time a user logs into the  
IOLAN. You must have a TFTP server running on any host that you are uploading or  
downloading files to/from when using TFTP. When you specify the file path, the path must be  
relative to the default path set in your TFTP server software.  
z
The message of the day file is downloaded to the IOLAN and retrieved locally every time a user  
logs into the IOLAN. You can download an MOTD file to the IOLAN in the DeviceManager by  
selecting Tools, Advanced, Custom Files and then selecting the Download Other File option  
and browse to the MOTD file. In WebManager, select Administration, Custom Files and select  
the Other File option and browse to the MOTD file. After the MOTD is downloaded to the  
IOLAN, you must specify the MOTD file name in the Filename field to access it as the message  
of the day (no TFTP Host parameter is required when the file is internal).  
Configure the following parameters:  
TFTP Host  
The host that the IOLAN will be getting the Message of the Day file from.  
Field Format: Resolvable host name, IPv4 address, IPv6 address  
Filename  
The path and file name, relative to the default path of your TFTP server  
software, of the file that contains a string that is displayed when a user connects  
to the IOLAN. The IOLAN will look for the file internally (it must already be  
downloaded), if only the file is specified (no TFPT host) or the file cannot be  
found on the specified TFPT host.  
Display MOTD in When enabled, displays the Message of the Day to users who are logging into  
WebManager/  
EasyPort Web  
WebManager or EasyPort Web.  
Default: Disabled  
310  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
TFTP Tab Field Descriptions  
You must have a TFTP server running on any host that you are uploading or downloading files  
to/from.  
TFTP file transfers send via UDP packets. When the packet delivery is interrupted for any  
reason and a timeout occurs, that packet is resent if the retry count allows it. Therefore, if a  
very large file is being transferred and is interrupted, the entire file is not resent, just the part  
of the file that was not received.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Retry  
The number of times the IOLAN will retry to transmit a TPFT packet to/from a  
host when no response is received. A value of 0 (zero) means that the IOLAN  
will not attempt a retry should TFTP fail.  
Range: 0-5  
Default: 5  
Timeout  
The time, in seconds, that the IOLAN will wait for a successful transmit or  
receipt of TFTP packets before retrying a TFTP transfer.  
Range: 3-10  
Default: 3 seconds  
Console Port Tab Field Descriptions  
This tab is found on rack mount models and is used to configure the Admin/Console port.  
Configure the following parameters:  
x
Baud Rate  
Specifies the baud rate of the line connected to the dedicated console port.  
Data Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200  
Default: 9600  
Flow Control  
For IOLAN models that have a dedicated console port, defines how the data  
flow is handled.  
Data Options:  
z
z
z
Soft—Data flow control is handled by the software.  
Hard—Data flow control is handled by the hardware.  
None—There is no data flow control.  
Default: None  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management  
312  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the RPS, I/O  
Channels, and IPsec  
Tunnels  
14  
Chapter 14  
Introduction  
The Control section appears when the IOLAN is connected to a Remote Power Switch and/or an I/O  
model or you want to control the IPsec tunnel.  
RPS Control  
Overview  
When a Remote Power Switch’s (RPS) console port is attached to the IOLAN’s serial port and the  
serial port is configured for the Power Management profile, you will be able to control the RPS’s  
power plugs either universally or individually (power on/off the whole RPS or individual plugs).  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available:  
On Button  
Off Button  
Cycle Button  
Turns all the RPS plugs on.  
Turns all the RPS plugs off.  
Turns all the RPS plugs off and then on.  
Reset to Default  
State Button  
Resets all the RPS plugs to the default state as configured in the Power  
Management profile settings.  
Plug Control ButtonDisplays a window that allows you to manage the individual plugs on the RPS.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
RPS Control  
Plug Control  
Overview  
When you click the Plug Control button, you can power on/off individual plugs.  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available:  
On Button  
Off Button  
Cycle Button  
OK Button  
Turns the selected plug on.  
Turns the selected plug off.  
Turns the selected plug off and then on.  
Closes the window.  
314  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Port Power Control  
Serial Port Power Control  
Overview  
The Serial Port Power Control window allows you to manage the power plugs that have been  
associated with the serial devices connected to the IOLAN.  
Field Descriptions  
The following buttons are available:  
On Button  
Off Button  
Cycle Button  
Turns the selected plug on.  
Turns the selected plug off.  
Turns the selected plug off and then on.  
Power Plug Status Displays a window that provides the plug status for every plug associated with  
Button the serial port.  
Power Plug Status  
This Power Plug Status window displays the status of all the plugs associated with a serial port.  
Click OK to close this window.  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I/O Channels  
I/O Channels  
Overview  
When the DeviceManager is connected to an I/O model IOLAN, the I/O Status/Control option is  
available. You can view the I/O status and manually control such options as clearing alarms, clearing  
minimum/maximum values, resetting the channel(s), and activating/deactivating output.  
The following buttons are available:  
Reset Channel  
Button  
Resets the highlighted channel (click on a channel to highlight it).  
Clear Alarm  
Button  
Clears the alarm. Note that if the condition that tripped the alarm still exists, the  
alarm will not look like it’s cleared, but will reflect the appropriate alarm level  
severity. Alarm Level 0 means that the alarm has not been triggered.  
Clear Latched  
Input Button  
Clears the latched value.  
Clear Minimum  
Value Button  
Clears the minimum value.  
Clears the maximum value.  
Manually activates the channel output.  
Clear Maximum  
Value Button  
Activate Output  
Button  
Deactivate Output Manually deactivates the channel output.  
Button  
Reset All Channels Resets all the channels.  
Button  
Refresh Button  
Resets the highlighted channel (click on a channel to highlight it).  
316  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPsec Tunnel Control  
IPsec Tunnel Control  
You can start, stop, and restart all the IPsec tunnels. When you start the IPsec tunnels, the Boot  
Action configured for each IPsec tunnel is what determines its state.  
The following buttons are available:  
Start Button  
Stop Button  
Restart Button  
Starts all IPsec VPN tunnels.  
Stops all IPsec VPN tunnels.  
Stops and then starts all IPsec VPN tunnels.  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPsec Tunnel Control  
318  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Administration  
Chapter 15  
15  
Introduction  
This chapter addresses the functions that the Admin user or a user with Admin Level privileges might  
do. This chapter uses the DeviceManager as the configuration method described in most  
administrative functions. As a general rule, administrative functions are accessed from the menu bar  
in the DeviceManager and under the Administration option in the WebManager’s navigation tree.  
Managing Configuration Files  
Saving Configuration Files  
When you connect to the IOLAN using either DeviceManager or WebManager, the IOLAN’s active  
configuration file is loaded into the configurator. To save a backup of the configuration file locally,  
do the following:  
z
In DeviceManager:  
1. From the menu bar, select File, Save As.  
2. In the Save As dialog box, specify a name and format for the file. Notice that you can save  
the file as either a .dmeor a .txt file. Either file format can be imported into the  
DeviceManager and downloaded to the IOLAN in the future. The .dmeis a binary file and  
the .txt file is a text file that can be viewed in any text editor.  
3. Click Save.  
z
In WebManager:  
1. In the navigation tree, select the Administration option.  
2. In the configuration area, click the Backup/Restore button.  
3. In the Backup group box, select the format (Binary or Text) in which you want to save the  
file. Either file format can be imported into the DeviceManager and downloaded to the  
IOLAN in the future.  
4. Click the Backup Configuration button.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Managing Configuration Files  
Downloading Configuration Files  
You can download a configuration file to the IOLAN by doing the following:  
z
In DeviceManager:  
1. Connect to the IOLAN to retrieve the current configuration file.  
2. Open the configuration file you want to download to the IOLAN by selecting File, Import  
Configuration from a File and then browsing to the configuration file. This will replace the  
retrieved configuration file.  
3. Select Tools, Download Configuration to IOLAN or click the Download All Changes  
button.  
4. Reboot the IOLAN.  
z
In WebManager:  
1. In the navigation tree, select the Administration option.  
2. In the configuration area, click the Backup/Restore button.  
3. In the Restore group box, browse to the configuration file that you want to download to the  
IOLAN.  
4. Click the Restore Configuration button.  
5. Reboot the IOLAN.  
320  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Managing Configuration Files  
Downloading Configuration Files to Multiple IOLANs  
You can download a configuration file to multiple IOLANs at the same time by doing the following  
in DeviceManager (DeviceManager is the only configurator that does this function):  
1. Select Tools, Download Configuration to Multiple IOLANs.  
2. Specify the IOLANs that you want to download the configuration to:  
Enter the following information for each IOLAN that you want to configure with the same  
configuration file:  
IP Address  
Enter the IP address of the IOLAN that you want to download the  
configuration to.  
Field Format: IPv4 or IPv6 address  
Server Name  
The name of the IOLAN. The IOLAN name that you put in this field is  
passed into the configuration before it is downloaded to the IOLAN and  
cannot be left blank.  
Password  
Enter the Admin user password for the IOLAN.  
Reboot Server  
Determines whether or not the IOLAN is rebooted after it has received the  
new configuration. The new configuration definitions will not go into  
effect until the IOLAN is rebooted.  
3. Click Add to add the IOLAN to the download list. You can also click on the IOLAN entry and  
edit any information and then click Update to make the edits permanent.  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Managing Configuration Files  
4. Click the Download> button to start the download process. A status window will display with  
the configuration download status.  
Uploading Configuration Files  
When you upload a configuration to the DeviceManager, you are uploading the IOLAN’s working  
configuration file. In most other configurators (the exception being SNMP), you are always seeing  
the working configuration file.  
In DeviceManager, select Tools, Upload Configuration from IOLAN. The working configuration  
file will automatically be loaded into the DeviceManager.  
Specifying a Custom Factory Default Configuration  
When you receive the IOLAN, it comes with a factory default configuration that the IOLAN can be  
reset to at any time. Administrators might find it useful to customize the factory default configuration  
file, so that if the IOLAN gets reset to its factory defaults, it will be reset to defaults that the  
Administrator specified.  
There are two ways you can set the custom factory default configuration:  
z
Download a file to the IOLAN—You can download a custom factory default file to the IOLAN  
using any of the configuration methods. In DeviceManager, you must connect to the IOLAN and  
then select Tools, Advanced, Custom Files, Custom Factory Default Configuration and then  
specify the file. In WebManager, you must connect to the IOLAN and then select  
Administration, Reset, Factory Defaults, Set Current Configuration as Factory Default.  
z
Download the current configuration to the IOLAN—You can specify the configuration that  
you are working with/on as the custom factory default configuration using any of the  
configuration methods (you must be connected to the IOLAN). In DeviceManager, select Tools,  
Advanced, Set Factory Default to IOLAN. In WebManager, select Administration, Reset,  
Factory Defaults, Get and Set Factory Default Configuration File.  
322  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Downloading IOLAN Firmware  
Resetting the IOLAN to the Default Configuration  
The RESET button is available on all IOLAN models (except medical unit models). The button  
allows you to reset the IOLAN to its Perle or custom factory default configuration. The Power/Ready  
LED color and the resetting of the IOLAN default configuration vary depending on how long you  
press and hold the RESET button, as shown in the table below.  
When you press and  
hold the RESET  
button for...  
LED color  
IOLAN system status  
Less than 3 seconds  
Blinking amber  
Reboots  
Between 3 and 10  
seconds  
Blinking amber, then turns Reboots and resets the configuration to the  
solid amber when you factory default (either the Perle or custom  
release the RESET button default configuration)  
Over 10 seconds  
Blinking amber, then turns Reboots and resets the configuration to the  
solid amber when you  
Perle factory default configuration  
release the RESET button  
Downloading IOLAN Firmware  
To upgrade the IOLAN firmware (software):  
z
In DeviceManager, select Tools, Advanced, Download Firmware to IOLAN. You can browse  
to the firmware location. Once the firmware download is complete, you will be prompted to  
reboot the IOLAN. You can choose to reboot the IOLAN at another time by selecting Tools,  
Reset, Reboot IOLAN.  
z
In WebManager, under the Administration option, select Update Firmware. Either browse to  
the firmware file and then click the Upload button or configure the TFTP server and click the  
Upload button. Note: If you use the TFTP option, the specified TFTP server must be on the same  
subnet as the IOLAN.  
Upgrading the firmware does not affect the IOLAN’s configuration file or downloaded custom files.  
Calibrating I/O  
All I/O channels are factory calibrated and should not need recalibration during initial use. However  
should calibration be required, you can recalibrate in DeviceManager or WebManager. In  
DeviceManager, you calibrate the I/O channel(s) by selecting Tools, I/O Channels, Calibrate. In  
WebManager, you calibrate the I/O channel(s) by selecting I/O Channels, Calibrate.  
Calibrating Analog Input  
To calibrate an Analog input channel, read the section that applies to the type of input you are  
calibrating. Note that calibration will be done for the active channel configuration; for example, if  
Channel A1 is set to voltage, you cannot calibrate it for current. The voltage range configured for this  
channel will also dictate what is being calibrated. For example, if this channel is configured for a  
range of +/-10V, calibrating this channel will calibrate all channels which are configured for +/-10V.  
During the calibration process, you will be asked to apply the minimum and maximum configured  
range value to the channel; for example, to calibrate for voltage +/- 10V, you will be prompted to first  
apply -10V and then +10V to the channel.  
Also, you cannot actively calibrate disabled channels (although, for Voltage, if you enable the  
channel and then set it for a range that has already been calibrated for another channel, it will also be  
calibrated).  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Calibrating I/O  
Calibrating Voltage  
When calibrating the IOLAN Analog input for voltage, you will need a calibration meter that is better  
than .1% volts precision. When you calibrate one channel, all voltage channels are automatically  
calibrated for that range; if another channel is set for a different range, you will need to calibrate that  
channel separately, but all channels that use that range are also automatically calibrated.  
Calibrating Current  
When calibrating the IOLAN Analog input for current, you will need a calibration meter that is better  
than .1% current precision. Each channel needs to be calibrated individually.  
Calibrating Temperature Input  
To calibrate an Analog (Temperature) input channel, read the section that applies to the type of input  
you are calibrating. Note that calibration will be done for the active channel configuration; for  
example, if Channel A1 is set to thermocouple, you cannot calibrate it for RTD. During the  
calibration process, you will be asked to apply the minimum and maximum range value to the  
channel in either mV or Ohms; for example, to calibrate for thermocouple J 0 to 760C, you will be  
prompted to first apply -80mV and then +80mV to the channel.  
Also, you cannot actively calibrate disabled channels (although if you enable the channel and then set  
it for the type of thermocouple or RTD that has already been calibrated on another channel, it will  
also be calibrated).  
Calibrating Thermocouple  
When calibrating the IOLAN Analog input for thermocouple, you will need a calibration meter that is  
better than .15% accuracy. When you calibrate one channel, all thermocouple channels are  
automatically calibrated for that range; if another channel is set for a different range, you will need to  
calibrate that channel separately, but all channels that use that range are automatically calibrated.  
Calibrating RTD  
When calibrating the IOLAN Analog input for RTD, you will need a resistor that is better than .05%  
Ohms accuracy. When you calibrate one channel, all RTD channels are automatically calibrated for  
that range; if another channel is set for a different range, you will need to calibrate that channel  
separately, but all channels that use that range are automatically calibrated.  
324  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Calibrating I/O  
Calibrating Analog Channels  
Analog Input can be calibrated for Analog and Temperature IOLAN models.  
Select the channel you want to calibrate. This example uses an A4 model that has channel A1 set to  
Current with a Range of 0 to 20mA.  
If you have not disabled confirmation messages (Tools, Options in DeviceManager only), you will  
get prompted to verify channel calibration.  
Click Yes to proceed with calibration. You are now prompted to apply 0 mA to the positive (+) and  
negative (-) terminals. Once that is done, click Yes to proceed.  
You are now prompted to apply 20 mA to the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals. Once that is  
done, click Yes to proceed.  
Once calibration is successfully completed, click OK to finish the process.  
Resetting Calibration Data  
You can reset the I/O channels calibrations to the factory calibrations in DeviceManager by selecting  
Tools, I/O Channels, Reset Calibrate Data or in WebManager by selecting Administration, Reset,  
I/O Calibration.  
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the IOLAN’s Date and Time  
Setting the IOLAN’s Date and Time  
When you set the IOLAN’s time, the connection method and time zone settings can affect the actual  
internal clock time that is being set. For example, if you are connecting to the IOLAN through the  
DeviceManager and your PC’s time zone is set to Pacific Standard Time (GMT -8:00) and the  
IOLAN’s time zone is set to Eastern Standard Time (GMT -5:00), the IOLAN’s time is actually three  
hours ahead of your PC’s time. Therefore, if you set the IOLAN’s time to 2:30 pm in the  
DeviceManager, the IOLAN’s actual internal clock time is 5:30 pm. This is the only configuration  
method that interprets the time and converts it between time zones, as necessary.  
All other configuration methods set the IOLAN’s internal clock time to the time specified, with no  
interpretation.  
To set the IOLAN’s system clock in DeviceManager, select Tools, Advanced, Set Unit Time/Date  
and in WebManager select Administration, Date/Time. The Set Date/Time window is displayed.  
Configure the following parameters:  
Date  
The IOLAN’s date. The format of the IOLAN’s date is dependent on the  
Windows operating system and regional settings.  
Time  
The IOLAN’s internal clock time, based on your PC’s time zone. For example,  
if your PC’s time zone is set to Pacific Standard Time (GMT -8:00) and the  
IOLAN’s time zone is set to Eastern Standard Time (GMT -5:00), the  
IOLAN’s time is three hours ahead of your PC’s time. If you set the IOLAN’s  
time to 2:30 pm, the IOLAN’s actual internal clock time is 5:30 pm.  
Use the PCs  
Date/Time  
When enabled, sets the IOLAN’s time to the PCs time.  
Default: Enabled  
This option is unique to the DeviceManager.  
Rebooting the IOLAN  
When you download any file (configuration, keys, certificates, firmware, etc.) to the IOLAN, you  
must reboot the IOLAN for it to take effect by selecting Tools, Reset, Reboot Server in  
DeviceManager and Administration, Reboot Unit in WebManager.  
Resetting the IOLAN to Factory Defaults  
You can reset the IOLAN to its factory default configuration by selecting Tools, Reset, Reset to  
Factory Default in DeviceManager and Administration, Reset, Factory Defaults in WebManager.  
The IOLAN will automatically reboot itself with the Perle factory default or custom factory default  
configuration.  
326  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Resetting the SecurID Node Secret  
Resetting the SecurID Node Secret  
If you are using SecurID external authentication, you can select Tools, Reset, Reset SecurID Node  
Secret in DeviceManager and Administration, Reset, SecurID Secret in WebManager to reset the  
node secret. You do not need to reboot the IOLAN for this to take effect, it works instantly.  
Language Support  
Two language files, in addition to English, are supplied on the supplemental CD, French and German.  
You can use any of these language files to create a translation into a language of your choice. You  
can download the language file (whether the language is supplied or translated) into the IOLAN and  
select the Language option of Custom Language or Customlang (custom language), making the  
Menu and CLI field labels display in the desired language.  
You can view Menu or CLI in one other language only (as well as English). If you download another  
language file, this new language will replace the first language you downloaded.  
You can revert to English at any time; the English language is stored permanently in the IOLAN and  
is not overwritten by your new language. Each user logged into the IOLAN can operate in either  
English or the downloaded language.  
Loading a Supplied Language  
This section describes how to download a language file using the CLI, since it is the least intuitive  
method. French and German language files are provided on the supplemental CD.  
To load one of the supplied languages into the IOLAN, so the Menu or CLI fields appear in another  
language, do the following:  
1. Open the supplemental CD and identify the language file, either Iolan_ds_French.txtor  
Iolan_ds_German.txt, or supply one of your own translated files.  
2. Copy the language file to a host machine on the network; place it in the main file system or on  
the main hard drive.  
3. Either use the TFTP defaults in the IOLAN or, configure as necessary, TFTP in the IOLAN.  
4. In the CLI of the IOLAN, enter the host IP address and file name; for example,  
netload customlang 172.16.4.1 /temp/Iolan_ds_French.txt  
The IOLAN will download the language file via TFTP.  
In DeviceManager select Tools, Advanced, Custom Files and then select Download Custom  
Language File and browse to the language file. In WebManager select Administration, Custom  
Files and then specify the Custom Language File option and browse to the language file.  
5. To set an individual user to the new language, go to the Users menu and, in the Language field  
select Customlang. In the CLI (only) you can set individual users or all users to the new  
language; see the set user *command.  
6. The user will see the change of language when he/she logs out (Main Menu, Sessions Menu,  
Logout) and logs back into the IOLAN. If, as Admin user, you change your language setting to  
Customlang, you will see the text menus display in the new language when you save and exit  
the Change User form. Users with Level Normal can also change their display language.  
If you download a new software version, you can continue to use your language unchanged;  
however, we recommend translating the new strings, which will be added to the end of the  
language file. A Reset to Factory Defaults will reload the Customlang as English.  
On successful download, the Customlang in the IOLAN will be overwritten by the new  
language.  
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Language Support  
Translation Guidance  
To help you with your translation, of supplied ASCII text language files we offer the following  
guidance:  
z
The IOLAN will support languages other than English (and the supplied German and French  
languages). The English language file, english.txt, displays the character length of each line  
at the beginning of the line. If a translated line goes over that character length, it will be  
displayed truncated in the Menu or CLI.  
z
Translate line for line, do not omit lines if you do not know the translation; leave the original  
untranslated text in place. Also, you must maintain the same sequential order of lines. It is a good  
practice to translate the file using a text editor that displays line numbers, so you can periodically  
verify that the line sequence has not changed from the original file (by comparing it to the  
original file).  
z
z
z
Keep all translations in quotes, otherwise the line will not display properly.  
Each line must end with a carriage return.  
If a line contains only numbers, for example 38400, leave that line in place, unchanged (unless  
you are using a different alphabet).  
Software Upgrades and Language Files  
If you receive a software upgrade for the IOLAN, the language files supplied on the supplemental  
diskette/CD might also have been updated. We will endeavour to provide a list of those changes in  
another text file on the same supplemental CD.  
The upgrade of your software (firmware) will not change the display of the language in the  
Menu or CLI.  
If you are already using one of the supplied languages, French or German, you probably want to  
update the language file in the IOLAN. Until you update the IOLAN with the new language file, new  
text strings will appear in English.  
If you are already using a language translated from an earlier version, you probably want to amend  
your translation. When a language file is updated, we will try to maintain the following convention:  
1. New text strings will be added to the bottom of the file (not inserted into the body of the existing  
file).  
2. Existing text strings, if altered, will be altered in sequence; that is, in their current position in the  
file.  
3. The existing sequence of lines will be unchanged.  
4. Until you have the changes translated, new text strings will appear in the Menu or CLI in  
English.  
328  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Downloading Terminal Definitions  
Downloading Terminal Definitions  
All terminal types can be used on the IOLAN. Some terminal types which are not already defined in  
the IOLAN, however, are unable to use Full Screen mode (menus) and may not be able to page  
through sessions properly. When installed, the IOLAN has several defined terminal types—Dumb,  
WYSE60, VT100, ANSI, TVI925, IBM3151, VT320, and HP700.  
If you are not using, or cannot emulate, any of these terminal types, you can add up to three  
additional terminal definitions to the IOLAN. The terminal definitions can be downloaded from a  
TCP/IP host.  
To download terminal definitions, follow these steps:  
1. Decide which TCP/IP host you are going to use. It must be a machine with enabled.  
2. Configure TFTP in the IOLAN as necessary.  
3. Select Tools, Advanced, Custom Files from the menu bar in DeviceManager and  
Administration, Custom Files in WebManager.  
4. From the File Type drop-down, select Download Terminal Definition. Select the terminal  
definition option 1, 2, or 3 and then browse to the terminal definition file that is being  
downloaded to the IOLAN.  
5. In the Terminal profile, select the Terminal Type Termx that you custom defined.  
Creating Terminal Definition Files  
To create new terminal definition files, you need to copy and edit the information from the terminfo  
database.  
1. On a UNIX host, change directory to /usr/lib/terminfo/x(where x is the first letter of the  
required terminal type). For a Wyse60, for example, you would enter the command  
cd /usr/lib/terminfo/w.  
2. The termcap files are compiled, so use the command infocmp termfileto read the required  
file (for example: infocmp wy60).  
3. Check the file for the attribute xmc#n(where n is greater than or equal to 1). This attribute will  
corrupt menu and form displays making the terminal type unsuitable for using Menu mode.  
4. If the terminal definition is suitable, change to a directory of your choice.  
5. Rename and copy the file to the directory specified at step 4. using the command  
infocmp termfile > termnwhere n is greater than or equal to 1; (for example,  
infocmp wy50 > term1). Make sure the file has global read and execute permission for its  
entire path.  
6. Edit the file to include the following capabilities in this format:  
term=  
acsc=  
bold=  
civis=  
clear=  
cnorm=  
cup=  
rev=  
rmacs=  
rmso=  
smacs=  
smso=  
page=  
circ=  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Resetting Configuration Parameters  
For example:  
term=AT386 | at386| 386AT |386at |at/386 console  
acsc=jYk?lZm@qDtCu4x3  
bold=\E[1m  
civis=  
clear=\E[2J\E[H  
cnorm=  
cup=\E[%i%p1%02d;%p2%02dH  
rev=\E4A  
rmacs=\E[10m  
rmso=\E[m  
smacs=\E[12m  
smso=\E[7m  
page=  
circ=n  
As you can see from the example, capabilities which are not defined in the terminfo file must  
still be included (albeit with no value). Each entry has an 80 character limit.  
On some versions of UNIX, some of the capabilities are appended with a millisecond delay  
(of the form $<n>). These are ignored by the IOLAN and can be left out.  
The ‘acsc’ capability, if defined, contains a list of character pairs. These pairs map the  
characters used by the terminal for graphics characters to those of the standard (VT100)  
character set.  
Include only the following character pairs:  
jx, kx, lx, mx, qx, tx, ux and xx  
(where x must be substituted by the character used by the terminal). These are the box-  
drawing characters used to display the forms and menus of Menu mode. They must be  
entered in this order.  
The last two capabilities will not be found in the terminfo file. In the page field you must  
enter the escape sequence used by the terminal to change screens. The circ field defines  
whether the terminal can use previous page and next page control sequences. It must be set  
to y or n. These capabilities can be found in the documentation supplied with the terminal.  
Resetting Configuration Parameters  
You can reset the IOLAN to its factory default settings (this will reset it to the Perle factory default or  
custom factory default settings, depending on what has been configured) through any of the following  
methods:  
z
You can push in the recessed button at the back of the IOLAN hardware for three to ten seconds  
(pushing it in and then quickly releasing will just reboot the IOLAN)  
z
z
z
DeviceManager, select Tools, Reset, Reset to Factory Defaults  
CLI, at the command line type, reset factory  
WebManager, select Administration, Reset, Factory Default, and then click the Reset to  
Factory Defaults button  
z
z
Menu, select Network Configuration, Reset to Factory Defaults  
SNMP, in the adminInfo folder, Setthe adminFunction variable to 2  
330  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Lost Admin Password  
Lost Admin Password  
If the Admin user password is lost, there are only two possible ways to recover it:  
z
z
reset the IOLAN to the factory defaults  
have another user that has admin level rights, if one is already configured, reset the Admin  
password  
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Lost Admin Password  
332  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applications  
Chapter 16  
16  
Introduction  
This chapter provides examples of how to integrate the IOLAN within different network  
environments or applications. Each scenario provides an example of a typical setup and describes the  
configuration steps to achieve the IOLAN functionality feature.  
Configuring Modbus  
This sections provides a brief overview of the steps required to configure the IOLAN for your  
Modbus environment. You can read the Modbus Gateway Settings on page 334 and Modbus Serial  
Port Settings on page 335 sections for more specific information about the Modbus settings.  
Overview  
This section describes the high-level steps required to configure the IOLAN as a Modbus Master or  
Slave Gateway.  
Configuring a Master Gateway  
To configure a Master Gateway (Modbus Master connected to the serial side of the IOLAN), do the  
following:  
1. Set the serial port that is connected to the serial Modbus Master to the Modbus Gateway profile.  
2. In the Modbus Gateway profile on the General tab, set the Mode to Modbus Master.  
3. Still on the General tab, click the Destination Slave IP Mappings button to map the Modbus  
Slave’s IP addresses and their UIDs that the serial Modbus Master will attempt to communicate  
with.  
4. For specialized configuration options, select the Advanced tab and configure as required.  
Configuring a Slave Gateway  
To configure a Slave Gateway (Modbus Master resides on the TCP/Ethernet network), do the  
following:  
1. Set the serial port that is connected to the serial Modbus Slave(s) to the Modbus Gateway  
profile.  
2. In the Modbus Gateway profile on the General tab, set the Mode to Modbus Slave.  
3. Still on the General tab, specify the Modbus Slave UIDs that the TCP Modbus Master will  
attempt to communicate with.  
4. Still on the General tab, click the Advanced Slave Settings button to configure global Slave  
Gateway settings.  
5. For specialized configuration options, select the Advanced tab and configure as required.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Configuring Modbus  
Modbus Gateway Settings  
The scenarios in this section are used to illustrate how the IOLAN’s Modbus Gateway settings are  
incorporated into a Modbus device environment. Depending on how your Modbus Master or Slave  
devices are distributed, the IOLAN can act as both a Slave and Master Gateway(s) on a multiport  
IOLAN or as either a Slave or Master Gateway on a single port IOLAN.  
Modbus Master Gateway  
The IOLAN acts as a Master Gateway when the Modbus Master is connected to a serial port on the  
IOLAN. Each Modbus Master can communicate to UIDs 1-247.  
Modbus Slave  
Serial  
Master Gateway  
EIA-232  
TCP  
Network  
EIA-422/485  
IOLAN  
Modbus Master  
Modbus Slave  
Modbus Slave  
Modbus Master  
Modbus Slave Gateway  
The IOLAN acts as a Slave Gateway when the Modbus Master resides on the TCP/Ethernet network  
and the Modbus Slaves are connected to the serial ports on the IOLAN. Note: The IOLAN provides a  
single gateway to the network-attached Modbus Masters. This means that all Modbus Slaves attached  
to the IOLAN’s serial ports must have a unique UID. Multiple Masters on the network can  
communicate with these Modbus Slaves. Note: If a transaction is in progress to a Modbus Slave,  
other requests to that same device will be queued until that transaction is complete.  
Modbus Master  
Serial  
Modbus Slave  
Slave Gateway  
EIA-232  
TCP  
Network  
EIA-422/485  
IOLAN  
Modbus Slave  
Modbus Slave  
Modbus Master  
Modbus Slave  
334  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Modbus  
Modbus Serial Port Settings  
Modbus Master Settings  
When the Modbus Masters is attached to the IOLAN’s serial port, configure that serial port to the  
Modbus Gateway profile acting as a Modbus Master. You must configure the Modbus TCP Slaves  
on the TCP/Ethernet side so the IOLAN can properly route messages, using the Modbus Slave’s  
UIDs, to the appropriate TCP-attached devices.  
Modbus Slave  
IP: 10.10.10.12  
UID: 23  
Master Gateway  
Serial  
EIA-232  
TCP  
Network  
IOLAN  
IP: 10.10.10.10  
EIA-422/485  
Modbus Master  
Modbus Slave  
IP: 10.10.10.11  
UID: 22  
Serial Port 1  
Modbus Master  
To configure the Modbus Master on serial port 1, do the following:  
1. Select the Modbus Gateway profile for serial port 1.  
2. On the General tab, enable the Modbus Master parameter.  
3. Click the Destination Slave IP Mappings button and click the Add button in the Destination  
Slave IP Mappings window.  
4. Configure the Destination Slave IP Mappings window as follows:  
The IOLAN will send a request and expect a response from the Modbus Slave with an IP  
Address of 10.10.10.11 on Port 502 with UID 22 and from the Modbus Slave with and IP  
Address of 10.10.10.12 on Port 502 with UID 23 (remember when Type is set to Host, the  
IOLAN increments the last octet of the IP address for each UID specified in the range).  
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Modbus  
Modbus Slave Settings  
When you have Modbus Slaves on the serial side of the IOLAN, configure the serial port to the  
Modbus Gateway profile acting as a Modbus Slave. There is only one Slave Gateway in the IOLAN,  
so all Modbus serial Slaves must be configured uniquely for that one Slave Gateway; all serial  
Modbus Slaves must have unique UIDs, even if they reside on different serial ports, because they all  
must be configured to communicate through the one Slave Gateway.  
Modbus Master  
Slave Gateway  
Serial Port 1  
TCP  
Network  
EIA-422/485  
IOLAN  
IP: 10.10.10.10  
Modbus Slave  
Modbus Master  
UID: 7  
Modbus Slave  
Modbus Slave  
UID: 6  
UID: 8  
To configure the Modbus Gateway on serial port 1, do the following:  
1. Select the Modbus Gateway profile for serial port 1.  
2. On the General tab, enable the Modbus Slave parameter.  
3. Still on the General tab, specify the UID Range as 6-8as shown below:  
4. Click the Advanced Slave Settings button to verify that the default settings are acceptable.  
336  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring PPP Dial On Demand  
Configuring PPP Dial On Demand  
The IOLAN can be configured to access remote networks via modems connected to the serial  
interface of the IOLAN. By configuring the IOLAN for the Remote Access (PPP) profile, data that  
is destined for the remote network will initiate a modem connection to the remote network to route  
the data to its appropriate destination.  
172.16.0.0  
PPP Local IP Addr: 195.16.20.23  
PPP Remote IP Addr: 195.16.20.24  
Network  
IOLAN  
Local Host  
204.16.0.0  
Example shows IOLAN  
configuration  
Network  
Remote Host  
204.16.25.72  
If you want to configure a serial port to use PPP dial on demand, do the following:  
1. Create an entry for the modem and its initialization string (Serial, Advanced, Modems tab).  
2. Set the serial port to Remote Access (PPP).  
3. In Remote Access (PPP), select the Advanced tab. Enable the Connect option and select Dial  
Out. Set the Modem parameter to the modem you just added. Enter the Phone number that the  
modem will be calling.  
4. Still on the Advanced tab, set the Idle Timeout parameter to a value that is not zero (setting this  
value to zero creates a permanent connection).  
5. On the General tab, enter one of the following:  
z
z
A Local and/or Remote IPv4 Address  
A Local and/or Remote IPv6 Interface Identifier  
Note that this IP address or interface identifier should be on its own unique network; that is, not  
part of the local or remote networks.  
In this example, the local network has an IPv4 address of 172.16.0.0/16 and the remote network  
has an IPv4 address of 204.16.0.0/16, so we arbitrarily assigned the PPP IPv4 Local IP Address  
as 195.16.20.23and the PPP IPv4 Remote IP Address as 195.16.20.24.  
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Printers  
6. Next you need to create a gateway and destination route entry. Select Network, Advanced, and  
the Route List tab.  
For the destination, if you want the connection to be able to reach any host in the remote  
network, set the Type to Network and specify the network IP address and subnet/prefix bits; if  
you want the connection to go directly to a specific remote host, set the Type to Host and specify  
the host’s IP address.  
We want a specific host to the be destination, so we configured the Type as Host:  
We also need to create a Gateway entry using the same PPP IPv4 local IP address. Any traffic  
that goes through the gateway will automatically cause PPP to dial out:  
Setting Up Printers  
The IOLAN can communicate with printers on its serial ports using LPD and RCP protocols, as well  
as print handling software using TCP/IP.  
Remote Printing Using LPD  
When setting up a serial line that access a printer using LPD, do the following:  
1. Set the serial port to Printer and configure the Speed, Flow Control, Stop Bits, Parity, and Bits  
parameters so that they match the printer’s port settings.  
2. Save your settings and restart the serial port.  
3. Verify that LPD has been configured on the network host. To configure LPD on the network  
host, you need to know the name or IP address of the IOLAN and the print queue, either  
raw_p<port_number>for a raw data connection or ascii_p<portnumber>for an ASCII  
character connection. You can optionally append _dor _f to the queue name to add a  
<control d>or <form feed>to the end of the print job.  
338  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting Up Printers  
Remote Printing Using RCP  
When setting up a serial port that accesses a printer using RCP, do the following:  
1. Set the serial port to Printer and configure the Speed, Flow Control, Stop Bits, Parity, and Bits  
parameters so that they match the printer’s port settings.  
2. Save your settings and restart the serial port.  
3. To execute a print job, use either of the following syntaxes:  
rcp <filename> <ip_address>:p<#>  
or  
rcp <filename> <IOLAN_Name>:p<#>  
where <#>is the IOLAN serial port number.  
Remote Printing Using Host-Based Print Handling Software  
Printers connected to the IOLAN can be accessed by TCP/IP hosts using print handling software.  
1. Set the serial port to TCP Sockets. Enable the Listen for connection option. On the Hardware  
tab, configure the Speed, Flow Control, Stop Bits, Parity, and Bits parameters so that they  
match the printer’s port settings.  
2. Save your settings and restart the serial port.  
3. The print handling software needs to know the Name of the IOLAN and the TCP Port number  
assigned to the printer serial port.  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
You can configure the IOLAN to act as a Virtual Private Network (VPN) gateway using the IPsec  
protocol. Any of the following scenarios can be configured using one IOLAN and a host/server  
running IPsec software or two IOLANs, each acting as the VPN gateway. All the examples have NAT  
Traversal (NAT_T) enabled, since both VPN gateways are running through routers.  
IOLAN-to-Host/Network  
The following example shows how to configure an IPsec tunnel between serial devices connected to  
the IOLAN and a host/network. NAT Traversal (NAT_T) is enabled in this example (on both sides)  
because the VPN tunnel is going private network to public network to private network. This example  
uses an RSA signature for the authentication method, so the steps required to configure the  
authentication are in this example.  
Unencrypted  
Data  
External IP Address  
196.15.23.56  
External IP Address  
199.24.23.88  
Right  
Remote VPN  
Gateway  
Router  
Router  
Internet  
192.168.45.99  
172.16.45.99  
172.16.45.1  
Left  
192.168.45.45  
IPsec Tunnel--Encrypted Data  
Unencrypted  
Data  
192.168.45.87  
192.168.45.12  
1. Configure the IPsec tunnel in the IOLAN:  
340  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
2. Use a utility (for example, Openswan’s newhostkey/showhostkey utilities) to generate the RSA  
signature public key. Copy the public key portion to a file using the following format:  
<description>=<keydata>  
or just  
<keydata>  
For example:  
# RSA 1024 bits scs48_vpn Tue Jan 3 15:29:33 2006  
leftrsasigkey=0sAQOEmzSTdNv1ZUJW9UmPtUY84gM5AGEAOq9gUwFqnOUsESfnuXlxPe+Mc+uf  
XYvg1vxYZ0XhdIh1FwFeeIQLyRvD447mjriMFjJfheMUtHqOZhvWSE18ZfGEXNOo7yagZqLzjxu9  
XJIA2SAGV+/LL3epPqW2fV5ORxVrf7uWn7I5FQ==  
Note that the pound sign (#) indicates a comment line and all characters in that line are ignored.  
The key value itself should not have an carriage returns.  
3. In the DeviceManager, select Tools, Advanced, Keys and Certificates. In the WebManager,  
select Tools, Administration, Keys/Certificates. Download the RSA signature file to the  
DeviceManager, specifying the IPsec tunnel it’s for:  
4. In the same Keys and Certificates window, upload the IOLAN’s RSA signature public key:  
Install the IOLAN’s public key in the remote VPN gateway for the Serial_Devices IPsec tunnel.  
5. Enable the IPsec service found in Security, Services.  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
Network-to-Network  
The following examples shows how to configure a network-to-network IPsec tunnel. This example  
uses the X.509 Certificate authentication method, so it includes the configuration requirements for the  
X.509 certificate. NAT Traversal (NAT_T) is enabled in this example (on both sides) because the  
VPN tunnel is going private network to public network to private network. Notice also that the serial  
devices connected to the IOLAN can be accessed by the VPN tunnel, since they are included in the  
network configuration as part of the 172.16.45.0 subnetwork.  
External IP Address  
199.15.23.56  
External IP Address  
196.15.23.56  
Right  
Remote VPN  
Gateway  
Router  
Router  
Left  
Internet  
192.168.45.99  
172.16.45.99  
172.16.45.1  
192.168.45.45  
IPsec Tunnel--Encrypted Data  
Unencrypted  
Data  
Unencrypted  
Data  
172.16.45.84  
172.16.45.23  
192.168.45.87  
192.168.45.12  
1. Configure the IPsec tunnel in the IOLAN:  
2. Click the Remote Validation Criteria button and enable and populate the fields that are required  
for the remote X.509 certificate validation. If you just want to validate the X.509 certificate  
signer, you do not need to enable any of the remote validation criteria fields.  
342  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
3. If the signer of the remote X.509 certificate has not already been included in the CA list file that  
has already been downloaded to the IOLAN, you need to add (append) the signer of the X.509  
certificate to the CA list file and then download the file to the IOLAN by selecting Tools,  
Advanced, Keys and Certificates. In the Keys and Certificates window, select Download  
SSL/TLS CA and the file name and click OK. Note that this file must be a concatenation of all  
certificate signers required for any SSL/TLS, LDAP, SSH, and/or IPsec connections.  
4. Enable the IPsec service found in Security, Services.  
Host-to-Host  
The following example shows how to configure two IOLANs to work as VPN gateways for a host-to-  
host IPsec tunnel. NAT Traversal (NAT_T) is enabled in this example (on both sides) because the  
VPN tunnel is going private network to public network to private network. In this example, both of  
the IOLAN VPN gateways have a DHCP assigned IP address.  
External IP Address  
196.15.23.56  
External IP Address  
199.24.23.88  
Right  
IOLAN VPN  
Gateway  
Left  
IOLAN VPN  
Gateway  
Router  
Router  
DHCP assigned IP  
DHCP assigned IP  
Internet  
192.168.45.99  
172.16.45.99  
Unencrypted  
Data  
Unencrypted  
Data  
IPsec Tunnel--Encrypted Data  
192.168.45.87  
172.16.45.23  
1. The following window configures the Left IOLAN VPN Gateway:  
%defaultrouteis entered for the Local IP Address because the IP address is DHCP assigned  
and is therefore subject to change.  
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
2. The following window configures the Right IOLAN VPN Gateway:  
%defaultrouteis entered for the Local IP Address because the IP address is DHCP assigned  
and is therefore subject to change.  
%anyis entered for the Remote IP Address to indicate that it will accept a VPN connection  
from any host/network; this is necessary because the Left IOLAN VPN gateway is DHCP  
assigned and cannot be known.  
Also note that Boot Action on the Left IOLAN VPN gateway is set to Start, meaning that it will  
try to initiate the VPN connection, while the Boot Action on the Right IOLAN VPN gateway is  
set to Add, which will listen for a VPN connection request.  
3. Enable the IPsec service found in Security, Services.  
344  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
VPN Client-to-Network  
The following example shows how to configure a VPN client-to-network IPsec tunnel. In this  
example, the IOLAN will accept VPN connections from multiple VPN clients on private networks  
that want to access the public 199.24.0.0 subnetwork through the VPN gateway. NAT Traversal  
(NAT_T) is disabled in this example (on both sides) because the VPN tunnel is going private network  
to public network.  
Initiate Communication  
VPN Client  
Broadband  
Router  
Router  
Right  
Internet  
199.24.10.10  
172.16.45.99  
199.24.10.1  
172.16.45.45  
IPsec Tunnel--Encrypted Data  
Unencrypted  
Data  
199.24.45.87  
199.24.45.12  
Configure the IPsec tunnel in the IOLAN:  
The Remote IP Address field is %anyto allow any VPN client to communicate in the IPsec tunnel  
that can validate the Secret. Also, the Remote Host/Network field is configured for 0.0.0.0to  
allow any remote peer private IP address (RFC 1918—10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0./12, 192.168.0.0/16)  
access to the IPsec tunnel. Lastly, the Boot Action is set to Add to listen for an IPsec tunnel  
connection.  
Enable the IPsec service found in Security, Services.  
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring a Virtual Private Network  
346  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RADIUS and TACACS+  
Appendix  
A
A
Introduction  
This chapter describes the parameters that can be passed to the IOLAN when a user logs into the  
IOLAN (serial port set to profile Terminal) from external authentication RADIUS and TACACS+  
servers.  
RADIUS  
Although RADIUS can be used strictly for external authentication, it can also be used to configure  
line and user parameters. Therefore, when a user is being authenticated using RADIUS, it is possible  
that the user’s configuration is a compilation of the parameters passed back from RADIUS, the  
IOLAN parameters if the user has also been set up as a local user in the IOLAN, and the Default  
User’s parameters for any parameters that have not been set by either RADIUS or the user’s local  
configuration.  
Supported RADIUS Parameters  
This section describes the attributes which will be accepted by the IOLAN from a RADIUS server in  
response to an authentication request.  
Type  
Name  
Description  
1
2
User-Name  
User-Password  
The name of the user to be authenticated.  
The password of the user to be authenticated.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
RADIUS  
Type  
Name  
Description  
6
Service-Type  
Indicates the service to use to connect the user to  
the IOLAN. A value of 6 indicates administrative  
access to the IOLAN. Supported values are:  
z
z
1—Login  
3—Callback-Login  
Equivalent to the IOLAN User Service set by  
Type 15, Login-Service.  
z
z
2—Framed  
4—Callback-Framed  
Equivalent to the IOLAN User Service set by  
Type 7, Framed-Protocol.  
z
z
7—NAS prompt  
9—Callback NAS-prompt  
Equivalent to IOLAN User Service DSLogin.  
z
z
6—Administrative User  
11—Callback Administrative User  
Equivalent to IOLAN User Service DSLogin  
and the User gets Admin privileges.  
7
Framed-Protocol  
The link layer protocol to be used by this user.  
Determines the User Service when Service-Type is  
set to Framed or Callback-Framed. Supported  
values are:  
z
z
1—PPP  
2—SLIP  
8
Framed-IP-Address  
Framed-IP-Netmask  
Framed-MTU  
The IP Address to be assigned to this user for PPP  
or SLIP.  
9
The subnet to be assigned to this user for PPP or  
SLIP.  
12  
Attribute indicates the Maximum Transmission  
Unit (MTU) to be configured for the user, when it is  
not negotiated by some other means such as PPP.  
13  
Framed-Compression  
Indicates a compression protocol to be used for the  
PPP or SLIP link. Supported value is:  
z
1—Van Jacobson TCP/IP compression.  
14  
15  
Login-Host  
Indicates the host with which the user can connect  
to when the Service-Type is set to 1(Login) or 3  
(Callback-Login).  
Login-Service  
Indicates the IOLAN User Service to use to  
connect the user a host. Supported values are:  
z
z
z
z
z
0—Telnet  
1—Rlogin  
2—TCP Clear  
5—SSH  
6—SSL Raw  
348  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RADIUS  
Type  
Name  
Description  
16  
Login-TCP-Port  
Indicates the TCP port with which the user is to be  
connected when the Service-Type is set to 1(Login)  
or 3(Callback-Login).  
19  
20  
26  
Callback-Number  
Callback-ID  
Specifies the callback phone number. This is the  
same implementation as 20(Callback-ID), but  
takes precedence if 20is set.  
Specifies the callback phone number. This is the  
same implementation as 19(Callback-Number), but  
19takes precedence if both are set.  
Vendor-Specific  
Perle’s defined attributes for line access rights and  
user level. See Perle RADIUS Dictionary Example  
on page 352 for an example of this file.  
Line Access Rights for port n (where n is the line  
number):  
Name: Perle-Line-Access-Port-n  
Type: 100 + n  
Data Type: Integer  
Value: Disabled (0), ReadWrite(1), ReadInput(2),  
ReadInputWrite (3), ReadOutput (4),  
ReadOutputWrite (5), ReadOutputInput (6),  
ReadOutputInputWrite (7)  
Name: Perle-User-Level  
Type: 100  
Data Type: Integer  
Value: Admin(1), Normal(2), Restricted(3),  
Menu(4)  
Name: Perle-Clustered-Port-Access  
Type: 99  
Data Type: Integer  
Value: Disabled(0), Enabled(1)  
27  
28  
Session-Timeout  
Idle-Timeout  
Maximum number of seconds the user will be  
allowed to stay logged on.  
Use this timer to close a connection because of  
inactivity. When the Idle-Timeout expires, the  
IOLAN will end the connection. The maximum  
value is 4294967 seconds (about 49 days). A value  
of 0 (zero) means the Idle-Timeout will not expire,  
so the connection is permanently open.  
96  
Framed-Interface-Id  
The remote IPv6 interface identifier for the remote  
end of the PPP link.  
RADIUS and TACACS+ 349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RADIUS  
Accounting Message  
This section describes the attributes which will be included by the IOLAN when sending an  
accounting message to the RADIUS server.  
Type  
Name  
Description  
1
4
5
6
User-Name  
NAS-IP-Address  
NAS-Port  
The name of the user to be authenticated.  
IP Address of IOLAN LAN interface.  
Port Line number of IOLAN.  
Service-Type  
Indicates the service to use to connect the user to the  
IOLAN. A value of 6 indicates administrative access to  
the IOLAN. Supported values are:  
z
z
1—Login  
3—Callback-Login  
Equivalent to the IOLAN User Service set by Type  
15, Login-Service.  
z
z
2—Framed  
4—Callback-Framed  
Equivalent to the IOLAN User Service set by Type  
7, Framed-Protocol.  
z
z
7—NAS prompt  
9—Callback NAS-prompt  
Equivalent to IOLAN User Service DSPrompt.  
z
z
6—Administrative User  
11—Callback Administrative User  
Equivalent to IOLAN User Service DSPrompt and the  
User gets Admin privileges.  
40  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
Acct-Status-Type  
Acct-Input-Octets  
Acct-Output-Octets  
Acct-Session-ID  
Acct-Authentic  
Indicates if this is the beginning or end of a session.  
Supported values are: 1 = Start 2 =Stop.  
Number of bytes which were received from the user  
during this session.  
Number of bytes where were transmitted to the user  
during this session.  
A string which identifies the session. The same string  
must be used in the start and stop messages.  
Indicates how the user was authenticated. Supported  
values are: 1 = Local 2 = RADIUS.  
Acct-Session-Time  
Acct-Input-Packets  
Number of seconds for which the user has been  
connected to a specific session.  
Number of packets which were received from the user  
during this session.  
Acct-Output-Packets Number of packets which were transmitted to the user  
during this session.  
Acct-Terminate-Cause Indicates how the session was terminated: Supported  
values include: 1 = User Request 2= Lost Carrier  
3=Lost Service 4= Idle Timeout 5= Session Timeout  
14 = Port Suspended 16 = Callback.  
350  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RADIUS  
Mapped RADIUS Parameters to IOLAN Parameters  
When authentication is being done by RADIUS, there are several Serial Port and User parameters  
that can be set by the RADIUS server. Any parameters sent by that RADIUS server that are not  
supported by the IOLAN are discarded. Below is a list of the RADIUS parameters and their IOLAN  
parameters:  
RADIUS Parameter  
IOLAN Parameter  
Service-Type  
This has no IOLAN field, although it needs  
to be set to Framed-Userin the RADIUS  
server.  
Framed-Protocol  
Framed-Address  
Set to SLIP or PPP service.  
Remote IP Address field under either SLIP  
or PPP.  
Caution: the exception to the above rule is  
a Framed-Addressvalue of  
255.255.255.254. When this value is  
specified in the RADIUS file, the unit will  
use the Remote IP address configured for a  
PPP line in the IOLAN.  
Framed-Netmask  
Framed-Compression  
Framed-MTU  
IPv4 Subnet Mask field under either SLIP  
or PPP.  
VJ Compression field under either SLIP or  
PPP.  
MTU field under SLIP.  
MRU field under PPP.  
Idle-Timeout  
Login-Service  
Idle Timeout under the serial port  
Advanced settings.  
Corresponds to one of the following User  
Service parameters: Telnet, Rlogin, TCP  
Clear, SSH, or SSL Raw.  
Session-Timeout  
Callback-Number  
Session Timeout under the serial port  
Advanced settings.  
Combination of the Enable Callback and  
Phone Number fields under User,  
Advanced settings.  
Callback-ID  
Combination of the Enable Callback and  
Phone Number fields under User,  
Advanced settings.  
RADIUS and TACACS+ 351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RADIUS  
Perle RADIUS Dictionary Example  
The IOLAN has defined Vendor Specific RADIUS attributes in order for the RADIUS server to be  
configured to support the IOLAN features of Line Access Rights and User Level. These attributes  
have been defined in Supported RADIUS Parameters on page 347 to allow the RADIUS server to be  
configured for RADIUS users to have this level of configuration.  
See below for an example of the Perle defined attributes for the RADIUS server for a 4-port IOLAN  
(although the dictionary can contain 48 ports, even if they are not all defined):  
# Perle dictionary.  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Perle Systems Ltd.  
http://www.perle.com/  
Enable by putting the line "$INCLUDE dictionary.perle" into  
the main dictionary file.  
# Version: 1.30 21-May-2008 Add attribute for clustered port access  
# Version: 1.20 30-Nov-2005 Add new line access right values for ports  
#
up to 49.  
# Version: 1.10 11-Nov-2003 Add new line access right values  
# Version: 1.00 17-Jul-2003 original release for vendor specific field  
support  
#
VENDOR Perle  
1966  
# Perle Extensions  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Clustered-Port-Access 99 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-User-Level  
100 integer Perle  
101 integer Perle  
102 integer Perle  
103 integer Perle  
104 integer Perle  
105 integer Perle  
106 integer Perle  
107 integer Perle  
108 integer Perle  
109 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-5  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-6  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-7  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-8  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-9  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-10 110 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-11 111 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-12 112 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-13 113 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-14 114 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-15 115 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-16 116 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-17 117 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-18 118 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-19 119 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-20 120 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-21 121 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-22 122 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-23 123 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-24 124 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-25 125 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-26 126 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-27 127 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-28 128 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-29 129 integer Perle  
352  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RADIUS  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-30 130 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-31 131 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-32 132 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-33 133 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-34 134 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-35 135 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-36 136 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-37 137 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-38 138 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-39 139 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-40 140 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-41 141 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-42 142 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-43 143 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-44 144 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-45 145 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-46 146 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-47 147 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-48 148 integer Perle  
ATTRIBUTE Perle-Line-Access-Port-49 149 integer Perle  
# Perle Clustered Port Access Values  
VALUE Perle-Clustered-Port-Access Disabled 0  
VALUE Perle-Clustered-Port-Access Enabled  
# Perle User Level Values  
1
VALUE Perle-User-Level  
VALUE Perle-User-Level  
VALUE Perle-User-Level  
VALUE Perle-User-Level  
Admin  
1
2
3
4
Normal  
Restricted  
Menu  
# Perle Line Access Right Values  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-1  
Disabled  
Read-Write  
Read-Input  
Read-Input-Write  
Read-Output  
Read-Output-Write  
Read-Output-Input  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Read-Output-Input-Write 7  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-2  
Disabled  
Read-Write  
Read-Input  
Read-Input-Write  
Read-Output  
Read-Output-Write  
Read-Output-Input  
Read-Output-Input-Write 7  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-3  
Disabled  
Read-Write  
Read-Input  
Read-Input-Write  
Read-Output  
Read-Output-Write  
Read-Output-Input  
Read-Output-Input-Write 7  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
RADIUS and TACACS+ 353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TACACS+  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
VALUE Perle-Line-Access-Port-4  
Disabled  
Read-Write  
Read-Input  
Read-Input-Write  
Read-Output  
Read-Output-Write  
Read-Output-Input  
Read-Output-Input-Write 7  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
...  
TACACS+  
Although TACACS+ can be used strictly for external authentication, it can also be used to configure  
Serial Port and User parameters. Therefore, when a user is being authenticated using TACACS+, it is  
possible that the user’s configuration is a compilation of the parameters passed back from the  
TACACS+ authentication server, the User’s IOLAN parameters if the user has also been set up as a  
local user in the IOLAN, and the Default User’s parameters for any parameters that have not been set  
by either TACACS+ or the User’s local configuration.  
User and Serial Port parameters can be passed to the IOLAN after authentication for users accessing  
the IOLAN from the serial side and users accessing the IOLAN from the Ethernet side connections.  
Accessing the IOLAN Through a Serial Port Users  
This section describes the attributes which will be accepted by the IOLAN from a TACACS+ server  
in response to an authentication request for Direct Users.  
Name  
Value(s)  
Description  
priv-lvl  
12-15 (Admin)  
8-11 (Normal)  
4-7 (Restricted)  
0-3 (Menu)  
The IOLAN privilege level.  
Perle_User_Service  
0 (Telnet)  
1 (Rlogin)  
2 (TCP_Clear)  
3 (SLIP)  
Corresponds to the User Service setting in  
the IOLAN.  
If no value is specified, DSPrompt is the  
default User Service.  
4 (PPP)  
5 (SSH)  
6 (SSL_Raw)  
service = telnet  
Settings when Perle_User_Service is set to 0.  
Settings when Perle_User_Service is set to 1.  
{
addr =  
port =  
}
IPv4 or IPv6 address  
TCP port number  
service = rlogin  
{
addr =  
}
IPv4 or IPv6 address  
354  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TACACS+  
Name  
Value(s)  
Description  
service = tcp_clear  
Settings when Perle_User_Service is set to 2.  
Settings when Perle_User_Service is set to 3.  
{
addr =  
port =  
}
IPv4 or IPv6 address  
TCP port number  
service = slip  
{
routing =  
true (Send and Listen)  
false (None)  
addr =  
}
IPv4 or IPv6 address  
service = ppp  
{
Settings when Perle_User_Service is set to 4.  
routing =  
true (Send and Listen)  
false (None)  
addr =  
port =  
IPv4 or IPv6 address  
TCP port number  
ppp-vj-slot-compression true or false  
callback-dialstring phone number, no  
punctuation  
}
service = ssh  
Settings when Perle_User_Service is set to 5.  
Settings when Perle_User_Service is set to 6.  
{
addr =  
port =  
}
IPv4 or IPv6 address  
TCP port number  
service = ssl_raw  
{
addr =  
port =  
}
IPv4 or IPv6 address  
TCP port number  
RADIUS and TACACS+ 355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TACACS+  
Accessing the IOLAN Through a Serial Port User Example Settings  
The following example shows the parameters that can be set for users who are accessing the IOLAN  
from the serial side. These settings should be included in the TACACS+ user configuration file.  
Service = EXEC  
{
priv-lvl = x  
# x = 12-15 (Admin)  
# x = 8-11 (Normal)  
# x = 4-7 (Restricted)  
# x = 0-3 (Menu)  
timeout=x  
# x = session timeout in seconds  
idletime=x  
# x = Idle timeout in seconds  
Perle_User_Service = x  
# x = 0 Telnet  
# x = 1 Rlogin  
# x = 2 TCP_Clear  
# x = 3 SLIP  
# x = 4 PPP  
# x = 5 SSH  
# x = 6 SSL_RAW  
# If not specified, command prompt  
}
# Depending on what Perle_User_Service is set to  
service = telnet  
{
addr = x.x.x.x  
port = x  
}
# ipv4 or ipv6 addr  
# tcp_port #  
service = rlogin  
{
addr = x.x.x.x  
}
# ipv4 or ipv6 addr  
service = tcp_clear  
{
addr = x.x.x.x  
port = x  
}
# ipv4 or ipv6 addr  
# tcp_port #  
service = slip  
{
routing=x  
# x = true (Send and Listen)  
# x = false (None)  
# ipv4 addr  
addr = x.x.x.x  
}
356  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TACACS+  
service = ppp  
{
routing=x  
# x = true (Send and Listen)  
# x = false (None)  
addr = x.x.x.x  
# ipv4 or ipv6 addr  
ppp-vj-slot-compression = x # x =true or false  
callback-dialstring = x # x = number to callback on  
}
service = ssh  
{
addr = x.x.x.x # ipv4 or ipv6 addr  
port = x  
}
# tcp_port #  
service = ssl_raw  
{
addr = x.x.x.x # ipv4 or ipv6 addr  
port = x  
}
# tcp_port #  
Accessing the IOLAN from the Network Users  
This section describes the attributes which will be accepted by the IOLAN from a TACACS+ server  
in response to an authentication request for Reverse Users. The TACACS+ serviceneeds to be set  
to EXEC/raccessor just raccesson the well known port.  
Name  
Value(s)  
Description  
priv-lvl  
12-15 (Admin)  
8-11 (Normal)  
4-7 (Restricted)  
0-3 (Menu)  
The IOLAN privilege level.  
Perle_Line_Access_#  
# = port number  
0 (Disabled)  
For the specified line, provides the User’s  
Line Access rights.  
1 (ReadWrite)  
2 (ReadInput)  
3 (ReadInputWrite)  
4 (ReadOuptut)  
5 (ReadOutputWrite)  
6 (ReadOutputInput)  
7 (ReadOuputWrite)  
timeout  
idletime  
0-4294967  
0-4294967  
Session timeout in seconds.  
Idle timeout in seconds.  
Perle_Clustered_Port_Access 0 (Disabled)  
1 (Enabled)  
Control access to clustered ports.  
RADIUS and TACACS+ 357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TACACS+  
Accessing the IOLAN from the Network User Example Settings  
The following example shows the parameters that can be set for users who are accessing the IOLAN  
from the Ethernet side. These settings should be included in the TACACS+ user configuration file.  
# Settings for telnet/SSH access  
service = raccess  
{
priv-lvl = x  
# x = 12-15 (Admin)  
# x = 8-11 (Normal)  
# x = 4-7 (Restricted)  
# x = 0-3 (Menu)  
Perle_Line_Access_i=x # i = port number  
# x = 0 (Disabled)  
# x = 1 (Read/Write)  
# x = 2 (Read Input)  
# x = 3 (Read Input/Write)  
# x = 4 (Read Output)  
# x = 5 (Read Output/Write)  
# x = 6 (Read Output/Input)  
# x = 7 (Read Output/Write)  
timeout=x  
# x = session timeout in seconds  
idletime=x  
# x = Idle timeout in seconds  
Perle_Clustered_Port_Access=x # x = 0 (Disabled)  
# x = 1 (Enabled)  
}
Users who are accessing the IOLAN through WebManager or DeviceManager and are being  
authenticated by TACACS+ must have the Admin privilege level and the TACACS+ service  
level must be set to EXEC.  
# Settings for WebManager and DeviceManager access  
service=EXEC  
{
priv-lvl = 12  
# x = 12-15 (Admin)  
Perle_Line_Access_i=x # i = port number  
# x = 0 (Disabled)  
# x = 1 (Read/Write)  
# x = 2 (Read Input)  
# x = 3 (Read Input/Write)  
# x = 4 (Read Output)  
# x = 5 (Read Output/Write)  
# x = 6 (Read Output/Input)  
# x = 7 (Read Output/Write)  
Perle_Clustered_Port_Access = 1 # enable clustered port access  
}
358  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSL/TLS Ciphers  
Appendix  
B
B
Introduction  
This appendix contains a table that shows valid SSL/TLS cipher combinations.  
Valid SSL/TLS Ciphers  
This chart displays all of the valid SSL/TLS combinations.  
SSL  
Ver.  
Key-  
Exchange  
Key-  
Full Name  
Authentication Encryption Size HMAC  
ADH-AES256-SHA  
DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA  
DHE-DSS-AES256-SHA  
AES256-SHA  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA  
SSLv2 Kx=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA  
SSLv2 Kx=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA  
SSLv2 Kx=RSA  
SSLv2 Kx=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA  
Au=None  
Au=RSA  
Au=DSS  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=DSS  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=None  
Au=RSA  
Au=DSS  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=DSS  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=DSS  
Au=RSA  
Enc=AES  
Enc=AES  
Enc=AES  
Enc=AES  
256  
256  
256  
256  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA  
EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA  
DES-CBC3-SHA  
Enc=3DES 168  
Enc=3DES 168  
Enc=3DES 168  
Enc=3DES 168  
DES-CBC3-MD5  
ADH-AES128-SHA  
DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA  
DHE-DSS-AES128-SHA  
AES128-SHA  
Enc=AES  
Enc=AES  
Enc=AES  
Enc=AES  
Enc=RC2  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=DES  
Enc=DES  
Enc=DES  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
64  
RC2-CBC-MD5  
DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA  
RC4-SHA  
RC4-MD5  
RC4-MD5  
RC4-64-MD5  
EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA  
EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA  
DES-CBC-SHA  
56  
56  
56  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Valid SSL/TLS Ciphers  
SSL  
Ver.  
Key-  
Exchange  
Key-  
Full Name  
Authentication Encryption Size HMAC  
DES-CBC-MD5  
SSLv2 Kx=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=RSA  
Au=DSS  
Enc=DES  
Enc=DES  
Enc=DES  
Enc=DES  
Enc=RC2  
56  
40  
40  
40  
40  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=SHA1  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=MD5  
Mac=MD5  
EXP-EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA  
EXP-EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA  
EXP-DES-CBC-SHA  
EXP-RC2-CBC-MD5  
ADH-DES-CBC3-SHA  
ADH-DES-CBC-SHA  
EXP-ADH-DES-CBC-SHA  
ADH-RC4-MD5  
SSLv3 Kx=DH(512)  
SSLv3 Kx=DH(512)  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
Au=None  
Au=None  
Au=None  
Au=None  
Au=None  
Enc=3DES 168  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
Enc=DES  
Enc=DES  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=RC2  
Enc=RC4  
Enc=RC4  
56  
40  
128  
40  
40  
40  
40  
SSLv3 Kx=DH(512)  
SSLv3 Kx=DH  
EXP-ADH-RC4-MD5  
EXP-RC2-CBC-MD5  
EXP-RC4-MD5  
SSLv3 Kx=DH(512)  
SSLv2 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA  
SSLv3 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA  
SSLv2 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA  
EXP-RC4-MD5  
360  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Virtual Modem AT  
Commands  
Appendix  
C
C
Virtual Modem Initialization Commands  
Virtual Modem initialization commands are only supported on IOLAN firmware and  
configurators version 3.2 or higher.  
You can initialize the modem connection using any of the following commands:  
Command  
Description  
Options  
ATQn  
Quiet mode. Determines if result codes will be n=0, no result codes will be sent.  
sent to the connected terminal. Basic results  
codes are OK, CONNECT, RING, NO  
(default)  
n=1, result codes will be sent.  
CARRIER, and ERROR.  
Setting quiet mode also suppresses the “RING”  
message for incoming calls.  
ATVn  
ATEn  
Verbose mode. Determines if result codes are  
displayed as text or numeric values.  
n=0, display as numeric values.  
n=1, display as text. (default)  
Echo mode. Determines whether characters sent n=0, disable echo.  
from the serial device will be echoed back by  
the IOLAN when VModem is in “command”  
mode.  
n=1, enable echo. (default)  
+++ATH  
ATA  
Hang up. This command instructs the IOLAN to  
terminate the current session and go into  
“command” mode.  
Answer call. Instructs the VModem to accept  
connection requests. VModem will give the  
terminal up to 3 minutes to answer the call. If  
the ATA is not received within 3 minutes, all  
pending sync messages will be discarded.  
ATI0  
ATI3  
ATS0  
Return the modem manufacturer name.  
Return the modem model name.  
Sets the value of the S0 register. The S0 register Register=0, sets “manual answer”  
controls the “auto answer” behavior.  
mode  
In “manual” mode, the IOLAN will not accept Register=1-255, “auto answer”  
incoming sessions until an ATA is issued by the mode (default)  
serial device. In “auto answer” mode, the  
IOLAN will automatically accept an incoming  
connection request.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Virtual Modem Initialization Commands  
Command  
Description  
Options  
AT&Z1  
Set command allows the user to store an IP  
address and port number or phone number to  
use when making a connection. The user will  
issue an ATDS1 to cause the IOLAN to initiate  
the connection.  
AT&Sn  
AT&Rn  
Sets the behavior of IOLAN’s DTR signal.  
(DSR from a DCE perspective)  
n=0, DTR signal always high.  
(default)  
n=2, DTR signal acts as DCD.  
n=3, DTR signal acts as RI.  
Sets the behavior of IOLAN’s RTS signal. (CTS n=0, RTS always high. (default).  
from a DCE perspective)  
n=3, RTS signal acts as DCD.  
If line is configured for hardware flow control,  
n=4, RTS signal acts as RI.  
the RTS is used for this purpose and the setting  
of this command is ignored.  
AT&Cn  
Sets the behaviour of the DCD signal.  
n=0, DCD always on.  
n=1, DCD follows state of  
connection (off when no  
connection, on when TCP  
connection exists). (default)  
AT&F  
ATS2  
Sets the modes back to the factory defaults. This  
is a hard-coded default configuration which  
does not look at any user configuration.  
Sets the value of the S2 register. The S2 register  
controls which character is used to enter  
“command” mode. (this is the potential  
replacement for the +++ (default) in front of the  
ATH command).  
This register will hold the hex value of the  
“escape” character. Any value > 27 will disable  
the ability to escape into “command” mode.  
ATS12  
Sets the value of the S12 register. The S12  
register controls the minimum length of idle  
time which must elapse between the receipt of  
the escape character and the A (first character of  
the ATH sequence). Units are 1/50th of a  
second. The default is 50 = 1 second.  
ATO  
(ATD with no phone number) Establishes a  
connection using the IP and port specified in the  
telephone number field.  
ATDS1  
Establishes a connection using the IP and port  
(or phone number) specified in the Phone  
Number field (stored by the AT&Z1 command).  
362  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pinouts and Cabling  
Diagrams  
Appendix  
D
D
Serial Pinouts  
DB25 Male  
This section defines the pinouts for the DB25 male connection used on the 1-port IOLAN. The power  
out pin (Pin 9) is available in the SDS model only.  
Pin 1  
Pin 13  
Pin 14  
Pin 25  
The following table provides pinout information:  
EIA-485  
Full Duplex  
EIA-485  
Half Duplex  
Pinout EIA-232  
Shield  
2 (out) TxD  
3 (in) RxD  
4 (out) RTS  
EIA-422  
1
Shield  
Shield  
Shield  
5 (in)  
6 (in)  
7
CTS  
DSR  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
8 (in)  
9
DCD  
Power out  
Power in  
Power out  
Power in  
CTS-  
Power out  
Power in  
Power out  
Power in  
12  
13  
14  
TxD+  
TxD+  
TxD-  
DATA+  
DATA-  
15  
TxD-  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Serial Pinouts  
EIA-485  
Full Duplex  
EIA-485  
Half Duplex  
Pinout EIA-232  
EIA-422  
RTS+  
18  
19  
RTS-  
20 (out) DTR  
21  
22  
25  
RxD+  
RxD-  
CTS+  
RxD+  
RxD-  
The power in pin (pin 12) can be 9-30V DC.  
DB25 Female  
This section defines the pinouts for the DB25 female connection used on the 1-port IOLAN. The  
power out pin (Pin 9) is available in the SDS model only.  
Pin 13  
Pin 1  
Pin 25  
Pin 14  
The following table provides pinout information:  
EIA-485  
Full Duplex  
EIA-485  
Half Duplex  
Pinout EIA-232  
EIA-422  
1
Shield  
RxD  
Shield  
Shield  
Shield  
2 (in)  
3 (out) TxD  
4 (in) CTS  
5 (out) RTS  
6 (out) DTR  
7
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
8 (in)  
9
DCD  
Power out  
Power in  
Power out  
Power in  
RTS-  
Power out  
Power in  
Power out  
Power in  
12  
13  
14  
RxD+  
RxD+  
364  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Pinouts  
EIA-485  
Full Duplex  
EIA-485  
Half Duplex  
Pinout EIA-232  
EIA-422  
RxD-  
15  
RxD-  
18  
CTS+  
CTS-  
19  
20 (in) DSR  
21  
22  
25  
TxD+  
TxD-  
RTS+  
TxD+  
TxD-  
DATA+  
DATA-  
The power in pin (pin 12) can be 9-30V DC.  
RJ45  
The RJ45 serial connector is available on IOLAN rack mount, desktop, Sun/Cisco, and medical unit  
models. The RJ45 pinouts vary depending on the IOLAN model. See the appropriate section for the  
RJ45 pinout information specific to your IOLAN model.  
Number  
of Pins See...  
IOLAN model  
desktop (1-port, 2-port, and 4-port) 10  
RJ45 (for desktop and rack mount models) on  
page 366  
rack mount  
8
RJ45 (for desktop and rack mount models) on  
page 366  
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C 8  
(Sun/Cisco)  
RJ45 (for SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C  
models) on page 367  
SDS8C/SDS16C/SDS32C (Electric 8  
Utility models)  
RJ45 (for SDS32C/SDS16C/SDS8C Electric  
Utility models) on page 368  
medical unit models  
10  
RJ45 (for medical unit models) on page 369  
Pinouts and Cabling Diagrams 365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Pinouts  
RJ45 (for desktop and rack mount models)  
This section defines the pinouts for the RJ45 connection. 1-port, 2-port, and 4-port desktop IOLAN  
models have a 10-pin RJ45 connector and all rack mount IOLAN models have an 8-pin RJ45  
connector.  
Pin 1  
Pin 10  
The following table provides pinout information:  
Pinout Pinout  
10-pin 8-pin  
EIA-485  
Full Duplex Half Duplex  
EIA-485  
EIA-232  
Power In  
DCD  
EIA-422  
1
Power In  
Power In  
TxD+  
Power In  
DATA+  
DATA-  
GND  
2 (in)  
3 (out)  
4 (in)  
5 (out)  
6 (in)  
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RTS  
TxD+  
DSR  
TxD  
TxD-  
RxD+  
GND  
RxD-  
TxD-  
RxD+  
GND  
RxD-  
RxD  
GND  
8 (in)  
9 (out)  
10  
CTS  
DTR  
Power out  
Power out  
Power out  
Power out  
The power in pin (Pin 1) can be 9-30V DC. The 2-port IOLAN has power in on Port 2 only. The 4-  
port IOLAN has power in on Port 4 only.  
366  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Serial Pinouts  
RJ45 (for SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C models)  
This section defines the pinouts for the RJ45 connection for the SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C  
(Sun/Cisco) models only.  
Pin 8  
Pin 1  
The following table provides pinout information, including the different pinouts for the Admin port  
and serial ports:  
Pinout EIA-232  
EIA-232  
Serial Ports  
8-pin  
Admin Port  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DCD (in)  
RTS (out)  
DSR (in)  
TxD (out)  
RxD (in)  
GND  
RTS (out)  
DTR (out)  
TxD (out)  
GND  
GND  
RxD (in)  
DSR (in)  
CTS (in)  
CTS (in)  
DTR (out)  
Pinouts and Cabling Diagrams 367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Pinouts  
RJ45 (for SDS32C/SDS16C/SDS8C Electric Utility models)  
This section defines the pinouts for the RJ45 connection for the Electric Utility models. The serial  
ports can be set to operate in EIA-232, EIA-422 or EIA-485 mode. The table provides the pinout for  
each of the modes of operation. The console port is an EIA-232 dedicated port. It’s pinout is detailed  
in a separte table below.  
Pin 8  
Pin 1  
The following table provides pinout information for the seial ports:  
EIA-485  
Full Duplex Half Duplex  
EIA-485  
Pin#  
EIA-232  
RTS (out)  
DTR(out)  
TxD (out)  
GND  
EIA-422  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TxD+  
TxD+  
DATA+  
TxD-  
GND  
GND  
RxD+  
TxD-  
GND  
GND  
RxD+  
DATA-  
GND  
GND  
GND  
RxD (in)  
DSR (in)  
CTS (in)  
RxD-  
RxD-  
The following table provides pinout information for the console port  
Pinout EIA-232  
8-pin  
Admin Port  
DCD (in)  
RTS (out)  
DSR (in)  
TxD (out)  
RxD (in)  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CTS (in)  
DTR (out)  
368  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Pinouts  
RJ45 (for medical unit models)  
This section defines the pinouts for the RJ45 connection for the medical unit models.  
Pin 10  
Pin 1  
The following table provides pinout information:  
Pinout  
10-pin EIA-232  
1
2
DTR (out)  
TxD (out)  
3
RxD (in)  
4
DCD (in)  
5
RTS (out)  
6
CTS (in)  
7
low current output (-12V) (out)  
8
low current output (+12V) (out)  
9
GND  
10  
Shield  
DB9 Male (Serial Only)  
This section defines the pinouts for the DB9 male connection used on the 1-port IOLAN that is serial  
only (not I/O).  
The following table provides pinout information:  
Pinout  
9-pin  
EIA-422/485 EIA-485  
Full Duplex Half Duplex  
EIA-232  
DCD  
RxD  
1 (in)  
2 (in)  
3 (out)  
4 (out)  
5
RxD+  
TxD  
TxD+  
TxD+/RxD+  
GND  
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
GND  
RxD-  
6 (in)  
7
8 (in)  
9
CTS  
TxD-  
TxD-/RxD-  
Pinouts and Cabling Diagrams 369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Power Over Ethernet Pinouts  
DB9 Male I/O  
This section defines the pinouts for the DB9 male connection used on the 1-port IOLAN I/O models.  
The following table provides pinout information:  
Pinout  
9-pin  
EIA-422/485 EIA-485  
Full Duplex Half Duplex  
EIA-232  
DCD  
RxD  
1(in)  
2 (in)  
3 (out)  
4 (out)  
5
RxD+  
TxD  
TxD-  
TxD-/RxD-  
GND  
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
GND  
RxD-  
TxD+  
6 (in)  
7
TxD+/RxD+  
8 (in)  
9
CTS  
Power Over Ethernet Pinouts  
This section defines the pinouts for the RJ45 Ethernet connection used on the IOLAN SDS P or  
IOLAN SCS P models.  
Pin 1  
Pin 8  
The following table provides pinout information:  
Pinout  
Standard  
Tx+  
802.3AF Unit-4 Wire 802.3AF Unit-8 Wire  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Tx+/+Voltage  
Tx-/+Voltage  
Rx+/-Voltage  
Tx+  
Tx-  
Tx-  
Rx+  
Rx+  
N/C  
+Voltage  
+Voltage  
Rx-  
N/C  
Rx-  
Rx-/-Voltage  
N/C  
-Voltage  
-Voltage  
N/C  
370  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams  
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams  
This section shows how to create EIA-232 cables that are compatible with the Device Server.  
Terminal DB25 Connector  
The following diagrams show how the null modem cable should be configured when connecting to a  
terminal DB25.  
DB25 Male  
IOLAN DS1  
DB25 (DTE)  
Terminal DB25  
(DTE)  
2 (TxD)  
3 (RxD)  
2 (TxD)  
3 (RxD)  
4 (RTS)  
5 (CTS)  
4 (RTS)  
20 (DTR)  
7 (GND)  
6 (DSR)  
5 (CTS)  
6 (DSR)  
7 (GND)  
20 (DTR)  
DB25 Female  
IOLAN DS1  
DB25 (DCE)  
Terminal DB25  
(DTE)  
3 (TxD)  
2 (RxD)  
3 (RxD)  
2 (TxD)  
5 (RTS)  
4 (CTS)  
5 (CTS)  
4 (RTS)  
20 (DTR)  
7 (GND)  
6 (DSR)  
20 (DSR)  
7 (GND)  
6 (DTR)  
Pinouts and Cabling Diagrams 371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams  
RJ45  
This cabling table does NOT apply to SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C (Sun/Cisco),  
SDS32C/SDS16C/SDS8C (Electrical Utility) or medical unit models.  
Terminal DB25  
IOLAN RJ45  
10-pin 8-pin  
(DTE)  
4
3
(DSR)  
(RTS)  
3
2
20 (DTR)  
5 (CTS)  
3 (RxD)  
2 (TxD)  
7 (GND)  
4 (RTS)  
6 (DSR)  
5
6
7
8
9
(TxD)  
(RxD)  
(GND)  
(CTS)  
(DTR)  
4
5
6
7
8
Cabling for SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C (Sun/Cisco) and SDS32C/SDS16C/SDS8C  
(Electrical Utility).  
IOLAN  
RJ45  
Terminal DB25  
(DTE)  
7 (DSR)  
1 (RTS)  
20 (DTR)  
5 (CTS)  
3 (TxD)  
6 (RxD)  
4 (GND)  
8 (CTS)  
2 (DTR)  
3 (RxD)  
2 (TxD)  
7 (GND)  
4 (RTS)  
6 (DSR)  
372  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams  
DB9 Male  
IOLAN DS1  
DB9 Male  
Terminal DB25  
(DTE)  
3 (TxD)  
3 (RxD)  
2 (TxD)  
2 (RxD)  
7 (RTS)  
8 (CTS)  
6 (DSR)  
5 (GND)  
4 (DTR)  
5 (CTS)  
4 (RTS)  
20 (DTR)  
7 (GND)  
6 (DSR)  
Pinouts and Cabling Diagrams 373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams  
Modem DB25 Connector  
The following diagrams show how a standard straight through cable should be configured when  
connecting to a DB25 modem.  
DB25 Male  
IOLAN DS1  
DB25 (DTE)  
Modem DB25  
(DCE)  
2 (TxD)  
3 (RxD)  
2 (RxD)  
3 (TxD)  
4 (CTS)  
5 (RTS)  
6 (DSR)  
7 (GND)  
8 (DCD)  
20 (DTR)  
4 (RTS)  
5 (CTS)  
6 (DSR)  
7 (GND)  
8 (DCD)  
20 (DTR)  
RJ45  
This cabling table does NOT apply to SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C (Sun/Cisco),  
SDS32C/SDS16C/SDS8C (Electrical Utility) or medical unit models.  
Modem DB25  
IOLAN RJ45  
10-pin 8-pin  
(DCE)  
2
3
(DCD)  
(RTS)  
1
2
8 (DCD)  
4 (CTS)  
6 (DSR)  
2 (RxD)  
3 (TxD)  
7 (GND)  
5 (RTS)  
20 (DTR)  
4
5
6
7
8
9
(DSR)  
(TxD)  
(RxD)  
(GND)  
(CTS)  
(DTR)  
3
4
5
6
7
8
374  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams  
DB9 Male  
IOLAN DS1  
DB9 Male  
Modem DB25  
(DCE)  
1 (DCD)  
8 (DCD)  
2 (RxD)  
3 (TxD)  
4 (DTR)  
5 (GND)  
6 (DSR)  
7 (RTS)  
8 (CTS)  
3 (TxD)  
2 (RxD)  
20 (DTR)  
7 (GND)  
6 (DSR)  
4 (CTS)  
5 (RTS)  
Pinouts and Cabling Diagrams 375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EIA-232 Cabling Diagrams  
376  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Jumpers  
Appendix  
E
E
Introduction  
The IOLAN contains jumpers that you might need to set before you configure it and put it into  
production. You can set the power out pin, pin 9, to a fixed 5V DC output or to the external adapter  
output; this can range from 9-30V DC (if an external adapter is shipped with the IOLAN, it has a 12V  
DC output); maximum output power is 1 (one) watt per a serial port. By default, the power out pin is  
set to no power. You can set the IOLAN line termination to onor off(this is offby default) if you  
are using EIA-422/485 (not applicable for I/O models).  
1-Port IOLAN DB25 Male/Female  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Power  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. To change the power pin out, locate J4. For the fixed 5V DC output, jumper pins 1 and 2. For the  
output to equal the external adapter input, jumper pins 2 and 3.  
4. To turn line termination on, locate and jumper both J1 and J9.  
5. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
377  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Introduction  
1-Port IOLAN RJ45  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Power  
Pin1  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. To change the power pin out, locate J4. For the fixed 5V DC output, jumper pins 1 and 2. For the  
output to equal the external adapter input, jumper pins 2 and 3.  
4. To turn line termination on, locate and jumper both J1 and J9.  
5. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
1-Port IOLAN RJ45 P (Power Over Ethernet)  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Power  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. To change the power pin out, locate J4. For the fixed 5V DC output, jumper pins 1 and 2. For the  
output to equal the external adapter input, jumper pins 2 and 3.  
4. To turn line termination on, locate and jumper both J7 and J8.  
5. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
378  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
1-Port IOLAN DB9  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Power  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. To turn line termination on, locate and jumper both J1 and J9.  
4. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
2-Port IOLAN SDS1M (Modem)  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Power  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. To change the power pin out, locate J4. For the fixed 5V DC output, jumper pins 1 and 2. For the  
output to equal the external adapter input, jumper pins 2 and 3.  
4. To turn line termination on, locate and jumper both J7 and J8.  
5. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
Setting Jumpers 379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
2-Port IOLAN  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Pin1  
Power  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. To change the power pin out, locate the set of three pins associated with the line you want to set  
(Line 1 is J4; Line 2 is the set the three pins just to the left of port 2). For the fixed 5V DC  
output, jumper pins 1 and 2. For the output to equal the external adapter input, jumper pins 2  
and 3.  
4. To turn line termination onfor Line 1, locate and jumper both J7 and J8 (as shown in the  
diagram). To turn line termination onfor Line 2, locate and jumper both J11 and J9.  
5. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
2-Port IOLAN RJ45 P (Power Over Ethernet)  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Pin1  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. For the fixed 5V DC output, locate and jumper J220 for Line 1 (as shown in the diagram) and/or  
jumper J221 for Line 2.  
4. To turn line termination onfor Line 1, locate and jumper both J7 and J8 (as shown in the  
diagram). To turn line termination onfor Line 2, locate and jumper both J209 and J210.  
5. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
Serial power in is not supported in the SDS2 PoE model.  
380  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
4-Port Desktop IOLAN  
To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Unplug the IOLAN from the electrical outlet and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the two side screws, one on each side, and lifting off the top of the  
case. You should see the following:  
Screw  
Power  
DIP  
Switch  
Reset  
The pin with the  
square represents  
Pin 1 --->  
RJ45  
Screw  
3. The following table describes how to jumper the pins for line termination, fixed 5V output, and  
for output equal to the external adapter input:  
Port/Line # Line Termination  
5V Output  
Input Volt Output  
J4, jumper pins 2 & 3  
J5, jumper pins 2 & 3  
1
2
3
4
Jumper J7 and J8  
Jumper J9 and J11  
J4, jumper pins 1 & 2  
J5, jumper pins 1 & 2  
Jumper J22 and J24 J10, jumper pins 1 & 2 J10, jumper pins 2 & 3  
Jumper J23 and J25 J6, jumper pins 1 & 2 J6, jumper pins 2 & 3  
4. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the two screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
Setting Jumpers 381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Digital I/O Module  
IOLANs that have Digital I/O have an input/output jumper that must be set for each channel and must  
match the software configuration for each channel. Depending on the model, the placement of the  
digital I/O board can change, so the diagram below shows how to set jumper for any digital board.To  
change the settings, do the following:  
1. Detach the IOLAN from the electrical power source and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the five side screws, two on each side plus the grounding screw,  
and lifting off the top of the case. You should see the following configuration for the digital I/O  
board:  
Channel 2/4  
J5  
Pin1  
Pin1  
J3  
Channel 1/3  
I/O  
Jumper pins 1 and 2 for Input. Jumper pins 2 and 3 for Output.  
3. To configure either Channel 1 or Channel 3 (depending on how many Digital channels your I/O  
supports and following the mylar channel definitions) for Input, jumper J3 pin 1 and 2 (as  
shown); this is the default setting. To configure either Channel 2 or Channel 4 (depending on  
how many Digital channels your I/O supports and following the mylar channel definitions) for  
Output, jumper J5 pin 2 and 3 (as shown).  
4. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the five screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
382  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
Analog Input Module  
IOLANs that have Analog Input have a voltage/current jumper that must be set for each channel and  
must match the software configuration for each channel. To change the settings, do the following:  
1. Detach the IOLAN from the electrical power source and disconnect everything from the box.  
2. Open the case by unscrewing the five side screws, two on each side plus the grounding screw,  
and lifting off the top of the case. You should see the following configuration for the analog input  
board:  
Channel 4  
Channel 2  
Channel 1  
Channel 3  
JP1  
JP2  
JP3  
JP4  
I/O  
I/O  
3. To configure Channel 1 for Voltage, no jumper should be set (as shown); this is the default  
setting. To configure Channel 2 for Current, jumper both J2 pins (as shown).  
4. Close the IOLAN case by replacing the case lid and the five screws. You can now power it on  
with the new settings.  
Setting Jumpers 383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
384  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Wiring Diagrams  
Appendix  
F
F
Wiring I/O Diagrams  
This section describes how to wire the various IOLAN I/O models.  
Digital I/O  
Make sure the Digital I/O jumpers support the software setting; see Digital I/O Module on page 382  
for jumper settings.  
Digital Input Wet Contact  
If you are using a wet contact for your Digital input, for channel D1 connect one wire to D1 and the  
other wire to GND. The power source is supplied by external sources.  
Power  
Source  
Digital Input Dry Contact  
If you are using a dry contact for your Digital input, for channel D1 connect one wire to D1 and the  
other wire to COM. The power source is supplied by the COM (common) connector.  
Power  
Source  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Wiring I/O Diagrams  
Digital Output Sink  
For a Digital output sink (ground) configuration for channel D1, follow the diagram below.  
-
Battery  
+
+
-
Device  
Digital Output Source  
For a Digital output source (voltage) configuration for channel D1, follow the diagram below.  
+
Battery  
-
-
+
Device  
386  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Wiring I/O Diagrams  
Analog Input  
Make sure the Analog jumpers support the software setting; see Analog Input Module on page 383  
for jumper settings.  
Current  
To connect channel A1 with a 2-wire shielded cable, connect the positive wire to A1+, the negative  
wire to A1-, and optionally the shield to GND.  
-
+
shield  
If you have the positive/negative wires reversed, the output will always read 0 (zero).  
Voltage  
To connect to Channel A1 with a 2-wire shielded cable, connect the positive wire to A1+, the  
negative wire to A1-, and optionally the shield to GND.  
-
+
shield  
If you have the positive/negative wires reversed, the polarity of the voltage will be reversed.  
I/O Wiring Diagrams 387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wiring I/O Diagrams  
Temperature Input  
If you are using RTD sensors, a short detected status will be displayed if the wires are connected  
improperly. RTD or thermocouple sensors will display an open detection status when the circuit is  
broken.  
Thermocouple  
To connect to Channel A1 with a 2-wire cable, connect the positive wire to A1+ and the negative  
wire to A1-; you will not be using the A1s connection.  
-
+
RTD 2-Wire  
In a 2-wire RTD configuration, connect the excite wire to A1-, the return wire to A1+, and jumper the  
sense wire from A1s with a insulated wire going to A1+.  
sense  
RTD 3-Wire  
In a 3-wire RTD configuration, connect the return wire to A1+, the excite wire to A1-, and the sense  
wire to A1s.  
388  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Wiring I/O Diagrams  
RTD 4-Wire  
In a 4-wire RTD configuration, connect the return wire to A1+, the excite wire to A1-, the sense wire  
to A1s, and leave the fourth wire disconnected.  
Relay Output  
Normally Open Contact  
To connect Relay channel R1 for a circuit that is normally inactive, connect one wire to the COM  
(common) connector and one wire to the NO (normally open) connector.  
Normally Closed Contact  
To connect relay channel R1 for a circuit that is normally active, connect one wire to the COM  
(common) connector and one wire to the NC (normally closed) connector.  
I/O Wiring Diagrams 389  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Wiring I/O Diagrams  
390  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utilities  
Appendix  
G
G
Introduction  
This chapter provides information on the TruePort and Decoder utilities.  
TruePort  
TruePort is a com port redirector utility for the IOLAN. It can be run in two modes:  
z
TruePort Full mode—This mode allows complete device control and operates exactly like a  
directly connected serial port. It provides a complete COM port interface between the attached  
serial device and the network.  
z
TruePort Lite mode—This mode provides a simple raw data interface between the device and  
the network. Although the port will still operate as a COM port, control signals are ignored. In  
this mode, the serial communications parameters must be configured on the IOLAN.  
You use TruePort when you want to connect extra terminals to a server using the IOLAN rather than  
a multi-port serial card. TruePort is especially useful when you want to improve data security, as you  
can enable an SSL/TLS connection between the TruePort host port and the IOLAN. When run on  
UNIX, TruePort allows you to print directly from a terminal to an attached printer (transparent  
printing). You can also remap the slow baud rate of your UNIX server to a faster baud rate, as shown  
below.  
Serial Connection  
Network  
Map UNIX baud  
rate 4,800 to  
230,400 for faster  
throughput  
Ethernet  
UNIX, running  
TruePort Daemon,  
baud rate 4,800  
PC  
Currently, TruePort is supported on Linux, Windows, SCO, Solaris, and others. For a complete list of  
of supported operating systems, see the Perle website.  
For more information, see the TruePort User Guide or the TruePort Installation and Configuration  
Guide for Windows NT on the CD-ROM.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
391  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
API I/O Access Over TruePort  
API I/O Access Over TruePort  
You can access IOLAN I/O data through TruePort using the Perle API. The API uses the  
command/response format. See the ioapiotp.csample program, found on the product CD-ROM,  
for an example implementation.  
API Request Format  
All data in the Request must be sent as a single write to the COM port. The API command takes the  
following format:  
Number of Bytes  
Value  
1
Function Code (in hex):  
z
z
z
z
z
01—Get read/write boolean register  
03—Get read/write register  
04—Get read only register  
15—Set read/write boolean register (0x0F)  
16—Set read/write register (0x10)  
2
Starting register number (see A4/T4 Registers on page 280,  
A4D2/A4R2 Registers on page 281, or D4/D2R2 Registers on page 282  
for this value).  
2
n
Number of registers to act on starting from the register defined in byte  
2 above.  
Data for write. Some values must be read/written as a unit consisting of  
2 consecutive registers. If the request is to write, the data to write  
follows the number of registers. If accessing registers consisting of 2  
bytes or 4 bytes, the data is in big endian (network order) format.  
API Response Format  
The API command takes the following response format:  
Number of Bytes  
Value  
1
Function code of request if no error. Most significant bit will be set if  
an error occurred.  
1
n
Length of data in response if no error occurred. If an error occurred, the  
byte will contain the error code (see the Error Codes table below).  
Data response for request (the number of bytes is dependent on the  
number and type of registers requested). If the request returns 2 or 4  
byte values, it will be in big endian (network order) format. If the  
request returns boolean values, the least significant bit (bit 0) represents  
the first value requested and bits 1 to 7 represents subsequent boolean  
values. If more than 8 boolean registers are requested, they are returned  
in successive bytes.  
392  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Decoder  
Error Codes  
Code Name  
Description  
01 Illegal Function  
The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for  
the server (or slave).  
02 Illegal Data  
Address  
The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for  
the server (or slave).  
03 Illegal Data Value A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for  
server (or slave).  
04 Slave Device  
Failure  
An unrecoverable error occurred while the server (or slave) was  
attempting to perform the requested action.  
Decoder  
If you are using Port Buffering NFS Encryption, you need to run the Decoder utility to view the port  
buffering logs. See the Readme file to install the Decoder utility on any of the following operating  
systems:  
z
Windows 98/NT/ME/2000/Server 2003/XP  
Note:  
The Windows/DOS platform restricts the converted readable file to an 8.3 filename  
limitation.  
z
z
z
z
DOS  
Solaris x86  
Solaris Sparc 32-bit/64-bit  
Linux x86 v2.4.x  
Utilities 393  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Decoder  
394  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
H
H
Introduction  
This chapter provides information about peripheral IOLAN options that can be ordered separately  
from the product. Contact your sales representative to find out how to order the products listed in this  
appendix.  
Installing a Perle PCI Card  
This sections describes how to install the Perle IOLAN modem card and the Perle PCI adapter card,  
used with a wireless WAN card, in your SCS rack mount model.  
PCI Adapter Card  
IOLAN Modem Card  
The location and brackets are slightly different for the 32-port and 48-port SCS rack mount models,  
but the basic installation concept is the same. The PCI adapter card bracket is found on the serial side  
of the 8-port/16-port/32-port models and the LED side of the 48-port model.  
Do not touch any of the components within the SCS IOLAN while performing the PCI  
adapter card installation.  
1. Unscrew the six screws on the top of the SCS IOLAN.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
395  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Installing a Perle PCI Card  
2. Unscrew the four screws along the bottom of the serial side of the SCS IOLAN. On the SCS 8-  
port/16-port/32-port models, this includes the screw that is at the bottom of the PCI face plate.  
3. Slide the top of the IOLAN off of the chassis.  
4. Carefully holding the bracket just behind the face plate, unscrew the two screws at the top of the  
8-port/16-port/32-port removable face plate or the two side screws of the 48-port removable face  
plate of the piece you just took off.  
48-port model  
32-port model  
The 8-port/16-port/32-port models are displayed below with the face plate and bracket taken  
apart.  
5. Unscrew the screw in the bracket. The 8-port/16-port/32-port bracket is shown below.  
6. Slide the PCI adapter card into the bracket.  
32-port model  
48-port model  
396  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a Perle PCI Card  
7. The black bracket should then fit on the inside of the PCI adapter card bracket. Align the adapter  
card bracket and then insert the screw and tighten it to keep it firmly in place.  
32-port model  
48-port model  
You must attach the bracket to the PCI adapter card before you slide it into the PCI slot.  
8. If you are installing the PCI Adapter card, slide the wireless WAN card into the adapter card.  
9. Slide the PCI adapter card into the PCI slot.  
10. You can now replace the top of the IOLAN chassis by aligning it and sliding it into the base. You  
can throw away the face plate, as you will not be needing it.  
48-port model  
32-port model  
11. Replace all the screws on the top and the serial side of the IOLAN. If you installed a wireless  
WAN card, you can now attach the external antenna to the card.  
Accessories 397  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
The IOLAN Starter Kit includes the following for all IOLAN models (except the medical unit  
models):  
z
z
z
z
z
z
RJ45F to DB25M DTE Crossover Adapter  
RJ45F to DB25M DCE Modem Adapter  
RJ45F to DB25F DTE Crossover Adapter  
RJ45F to DB9M DTE Crossover Adapter  
RJ45F to DB9F DTE Crossover Adapter  
Sun/Cisco RJ45M Connector Cable for Rack Mount Models  
The adapters/cable can be purchased as a kit or individually.  
RJ45F to DB25M DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45F-->DB25M DTE crossover adapter pinouts. This is  
model number DBA0011.  
RJ45F  
(TxD) 4  
DB25M DTE  
3 (RxD)  
(RxD) 5  
(GND) 6  
(DTR) 8  
2 (TxD)  
7 (GND)  
6 (DSR)  
8 (DCD)  
(DSR) 3  
(RTS) 2  
(CTS) 7  
20 (DTR)  
5 (CTS)  
4 (RTS)  
398  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB25M DCE Modem Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45FJDB25M DCE modem adapter pinouts. This is  
model number DBA0013.  
RJ45F  
(TxD) 4  
DB25M  
3 (RxD)  
(RxD) 5  
(GND) 6  
(DTR) 8  
(DSR) 3  
(DCD) 1  
(RTS) 2  
(CTS) 7  
2 (TxD)  
7 (GND)  
20 (DTR)  
6 (DSR)  
8 (DCD)  
4 (RTS)  
5 (CTS)  
Accessories 399  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB25F DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45JDB25F DTE crossover adapter pinouts. This is  
model number DBA0010.  
RJ45F  
DB25F  
3 (RxD)  
(TxD) 4  
(RxD) 5  
2 (TxD)  
(GND) 6  
(DTR) 8  
7 (GND)  
6 (DSR)  
8 (DCD)  
(DSR) 3  
(RTS) 2  
(CTS) 7  
20 (DTR)  
5 (CTS)  
4 (RTS)  
400  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB9M DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45JDB9M crossover adapter pinouts. This is model  
number DBA0021.  
RJ45F  
(TxD) 4  
DB9M  
2 (RxD)  
(RxD) 5  
(GND) 6  
(DTR) 8  
3 (TxD)  
5 (GND)  
1 (DCD)  
6 (DSR)  
(DSR) 3  
(RTS) 2  
(CTS) 7  
4 (DTR)  
8 (CTS)  
7 (RTS)  
Accessories 401  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB9F DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45FJDB9F crossover adapter pinouts. This is model  
number DBA0020.  
RJ45F  
DB9F  
2 (RxD)  
(TxD) 4  
(RxD) 5  
3 (TxD)  
(GND) 6  
(DTR) 8  
5 (GND)  
1 (DCD)  
6 (DSR)  
(DSR) 3  
(RTS) 2  
(CTS) 7  
4 (DTR)  
8 (CTS)  
7 (RTS)  
Sun/Cisco RJ45M Connector Cable for Rack Mount Models  
This is a 3 meter RJ45MJRJ45M 8-wire Sun/Cisco modular cable. The following diagram shows  
how the IOLAN RJ45M cable is configured when connecting to the supplied Sun/Cisco RJ45 cable.  
This model number is CAB0030.  
IOLAN  
RJ45M  
Sun/Cisco  
RJ45M  
(RTS) 2  
8 (CTS)  
(DSR) 3  
(TxD) 4  
(RxD) 5  
(GND) 6  
(CTS) 7  
(DTR) 8  
2 (DTR)  
6 (RxD)  
3 (TxD)  
4 (GND)  
1 (RTS)  
7 (DSR)  
402  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit  
(Adapters/Cable)  
The IOLAN Starter Kit includes the following for the SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C (Sun/Cisco)  
models:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
RJ45F to DB25M DTE Crossover Adapter  
RJ45F to DB25M DCE Modem Adapter  
RJ45F to DB25F DTE Crossover Adapter  
RJ45F to DB9M DTE Crossover Adapter  
RJ45F to DB9F DTE Crossover Adapter  
Sun/Cisco Roll-Over Adapter for Rack Mount Models  
The adapters/cable can be purchased as a kit or individually.  
RJ45F to DB25M DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45FJDB25M DTE crossover adapter pinouts. This is  
model number DBA0011C.  
RJ45F  
(TxD) 3  
DB25M DTE  
3 (RxD)  
(RxD) 6  
2 (TxD)  
(GND) 4  
(GND) 5  
7 (GND)  
(DTR) 2  
6 (DSR)  
8 (DCD)  
(DSR) 7  
(RTS) 1  
(CTS) 8  
20 (DTR)  
5 (CTS)  
4 (RTS)  
Accessories 403  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB25M DCE Modem Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45FJDB25M DCE modem adapter pinouts. This is  
model number DBA0013C.  
RJ45F  
DB25M  
2 (TxD)  
(TxD) 3  
(RxD) 6  
3 (RxD)  
7 (GND)  
(GND) 4  
(GND) 5  
(DTR) 2  
(DSR) 7  
(RTS) 1  
(CTS) 8  
20 (DTR)  
8 (DCD)  
4 (RTS)  
5 (CTS)  
404  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB25F DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45JDB25F DTE crossover adapter pinouts. This is  
model number DBA0010C.  
RJ45F  
(TxD) 3  
DB25F  
3 (RxD)  
(RxD) 6  
2 (TxD)  
(GND) 4  
(GND) 5  
7 (GND)  
(DTR) 2  
6 (DSR)  
8 (DCD)  
(DSR) 7  
(RTS) 1  
(CTS) 8  
20 (DTR)  
5 (CTS)  
4 (RTS)  
Accessories 405  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB9M DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45JDB9M crossover adapter pinouts. This is model  
number DBA0021C.  
RJ45F  
DB9M  
2 (RxD)  
(TxD) 3  
(RxD) 6  
3 (TxD)  
(GND) 4  
(GND) 5  
5 (GND)  
(DTR) 2  
1 (DCD)  
6 (DSR)  
(DSR) 7  
(RTS) 1  
(CTS) 8  
4 (DTR)  
8 (CTS)  
7 (RTS)  
406  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
RJ45F to DB9F DTE Crossover Adapter  
The following diagram shows the IOLAN RJ45FJDB9F crossover adapter pinouts. This is model  
number DBA0020C.  
RJ45F  
(TxD) 3  
DB9F  
2 (RxD)  
(RxD) 6  
3 (TxD)  
(GND) 4  
(GND) 5  
5 (GND)  
(DTR) 2  
1 (DCD)  
6 (DSR)  
(DSR) 7  
(RTS) 1  
(CTS) 8  
4 (DTR)  
8 (CTS)  
7 (RTS)  
Sun/Cisco Roll-Over Adapter for Rack Mount Models  
This is a RJ45MJRJ45F Sun/Cisco adapter. This model number is DBA0031C.  
IOLAN  
RJ45F  
Sun/Cisco  
RJ45M*  
1
2
8
7
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
*The Sun/Cisco RJ45M connector attaches to the Sun/Cisco Console port.  
Accessories 407  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SCS48C/SCS32C/SCS16C/SCS8C Starter Kit (Adapters/Cable)  
408  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Appendix  
I
I
Introduction  
This chapter provides information that can help resolve problems with the IOLAN.  
Hardware Troubleshooting  
The Power/Ready LED stays red after a boot (See Power/Ready LED Labels on page 410 for the  
LED label on your IOLAN unit.):  
If the IOLAN Power/Ready LED is red and stays red for over 10 seconds, you have a hardware  
problem that might require factory service. First, try the following:  
z
z
In Console mode for desktop models or viewing the Console port in rack mount models, see if  
you need to reload the firmware, which can be found either on the CD-ROM that came with the  
IOLAN or on the Perle website, www.perle.com/downloads(when you access the webpage,  
select your specific IOLAN model).  
If the bootloader option does not appear when you reboot the IOLAN (to load new firmware),  
you need to make arrangements to return the IOLAN.  
If you purchased the IOLAN less than 30 days before this problem appears, contact your distributor;  
otherwise, see the Perle web site (www.Perle.com) for factory service information.  
No factory service can be performed on IOLANs that have not been registered.  
The Power/Ready LED blinks red (See Power/Ready LED Labels on page 410 for the LED label  
on your IOLAN unit.):  
z
Good Boot: When the IOLAN cycles through a good boot, the LED blinks for several seconds  
and then stays a solid green.  
z
Non-critical Error Boot: When the IOLAN cycles through a boot and a non-critical error  
occurs, such as a bad port, the LED will blink red briefly before displaying a solid green. You  
should reboot the IOLAN while monitoring the Console port to view the error information.  
z
z
Critical Error Boot: When the IOLAN cycles through a boot and a critical error occurs, such as  
corrupted firmware, the LED continues to blink red. View the diagnostic information displayed  
on the terminal connected to the Console port for information on how to correct the problem.  
Fatal Error Boot: When the IOLAN cycles through a boot and a fatal error occurs, the LED  
stays a solid red).  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
409  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Communication Issues  
Power/Ready LED Labels  
The Power/Ready LED label varies depending on the IOLAN model, as shown in the table below.  
IOLAN Model LED Label  
Desktop  
Power/Ready  
System Ready  
Rack mount  
Medical unit  
Communication Issues  
General communication checks and practices are as follows:  
z
Are your cables connected and correctly configured? If you are using EIA-232, see EIA-232  
Cabling Diagrams on page 371 to verify that your cables are correctly configured.  
z
Can you ping your host? If you can ping but packet loss is reported, ping another host/device on  
the same network. This will tell you whether the problem is specific to the host/device or general  
to the network.  
z
After entering or changing IP information for your IOLAN, reboot the IOLAN (does not apply  
when using BOOTP or DHCP). Once the IOLAN has rebooted, other network devices should be  
able to communicate with it (ping, telnet, etc.). Also, protocols such as ARP and proxy-ARP will  
work properly.  
z
z
Use the show routescommand (command line only) or view the Routes statistics. Is there a  
route to the host?  
If the WebManager or DeviceManager cannot communicate with the IOLAN, verify that the  
Server Services HTTP and/or HTTPS are enabled for WebManager and DeviceManagerD is  
enabled for DeviceManager. If you are using only HTTPS, the connection URL must start with  
https://.  
DeviceManager Problems  
Error Message: 16 bit Windows Subsystem - C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\AUTOEXEC.NT. The  
system file is not suitable for running MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows applications. Choose  
'Close' to terminate the application.  
The error message can be misleading, because it is displayed even if the AUTOEXEC.NTfile is  
actually missing.  
To verify whether you have the file, type %windir%/system32/in the address bar of an Explorer  
window. If there is no AUTOEXEC.NTfile proceed as follows:  
1. Browse to %windir%/repair/(usually C:\WINDOWS\repair).  
2. Right-click and Copy the AUTOEXEC.NTfile.  
3. Browse to %windir%/system32/(usually C:\WINDOWS\System32).  
4. Right-click inside the window and Paste the file.  
The error condition described here may also be the result of corruption of the AUTOEXEC.NTfile, in  
which case the above procedure may be helpful to restore a valid file.  
If the above procedure does not fix the DeviceManager installation problem, see  
http://support.microsoft.com/?kbid=324767 for the official Microsoft explanation.  
410  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Host Problems  
Host Problems  
Cannot access a host by name:  
z
If using DNS or if DNS is required, ensure a nameserver is configured on your IOLAN and is  
accessible (ping it).  
z
If not using DNS, verify that the host is configured in the Host Table. Check access to the host  
by pinging it using the host’s IP address.  
Cannot access a host on a local network, verify:  
z
z
z
The network address is correct.  
The subnet mask is set correctly and reflects the network configuration.  
The broadcast address is set correctly and reflects the network configuration.  
Cannot access a host on a remote network:  
z
Use the show routecommand to verify that there is a route to the remote host. If no gateway is  
specified, verify that a default gateway is specified. Ping the default gateway to check if it is  
working.  
z
Consider the situation beyond the gateway; for example, are intermediate gateways and the  
remote host available? Also, check the messages returned by the pingcommand; for example,  
that a particular host or gateway is unreachable.  
Gateways added into the gateway table are ignored by the IOLAN:  
z
Have you used BOOTP and entered a single static gateway in the bootptab file entry? If yes, the  
other gateways will be ignored.  
Access to host lost after a few minutes.  
z
If the route to this host goes through routers, make sure those routers are all sending RIP packets  
across the networks.  
RADIUS Authentication Problems  
User is waiting up to 60 seconds before login is accepted or denied and Authentication is set to  
RADIUS. User has entered User Name and Password, and has pressed Enter.  
z
Check RADIUS configuration of primary and secondary authentication/accounting hosts  
specified, if you have retry and timeout values greater than the default, the IOLAN will be  
spending time trying each of these hosts and keeping the user waiting.  
z
Adjust RADIUS configuration: specify just one host, reduce Timeout and Retry values to the  
default or less than default.  
You cannot progress beyond the login and password prompts when authentication is set to  
RADIUS:  
z
On the RADIUS host, check the secret (password), you should see it displayed in clear text in the  
RADIUS clients file. If you are unsure whether it is the same secret which you entered in the  
IOLAN, go to the IOLAN and re-enter a new secret.  
z
On the RADIUS host, verify that there is only one entry for a particular user; do not have  
multiple entries of the same user name (even if the passwords are different).  
Troubleshooting 411  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Login Problems  
Login Problems  
You cannot obtain a login on any of the serial ports  
z
Connect via the Admin port and check the settings of the front-mounted ports; they have  
probably been set to a profile that does support serial connections, such as the Console  
Management profile (in CLI or Menu, ‘direct’ or ‘silent’ telnet/rlogin). Try setting the serial  
port(s) to the Terminal profile (DSlogin in CLI or Menu).  
You have lost or don't know your password (as Admin user).  
z
You must reset the IOLAN to its factory default settings using the Reset switch on the rear  
panel. There is no procedure to access the IOLAN without a password.  
Problems with Terminals  
The following section concerns problems with the appearance of data on your terminal screen.  
The IOLAN logs me out after a few minutes:  
z
Check the Idle Timer value set for the user. The default setting for the Idle Timer for all users is  
0 seconds (does not timeout).  
Corrupt data.  
z
Check your line settings (baud rate, stop bits, etc.)  
Missing data.  
z
Verify that the same type of flow control is set in both your terminal and on the IOLAN’s port.  
Error message not permitted on a dumb terminalafter typing the CLI command  
screen.  
z
Set your Line to TermtypeVT100, ANSI or WYSE60 (or other form of terminal emulation, if  
you have downloaded one). The default line type in the IOLAN is Dumb, which does not support  
the graphics characters necessary to view the text-based menus.  
Screen corruption when using the text-based menu system.  
z
z
z
Verify that the terminal setup in the IOLAN matches your terminal.  
Verify that entries in the term file match your terminal setup.  
If using a PC/computer, verify that the type of terminal emulation selected in your application  
matches those supported by the IOLAN.  
When using the function keys on your keyboard, nothing happens or your sessions keep  
swapping.  
z
Change your Hotkey Prefix character. The function keys on the keyboards of some terminals  
(like WYSE60) send character sequences which begin with ^a; unfortunately, ^a is also the  
default Hotkey Prefix, which you use to switch between sessions. A valid alternative would be  
^b (hex=02). If you are the system administrator, you can change any user’s Hotkey Prefix  
character.  
When using a downloaded terminal definition, you are having problems using arrow keys.  
Use Ctrl-K, Ctrl-J, Ctrl-H and Ctrl-L for up, down, left and right respectively.  
When switching from a session back to the text menus, both screen images are superimposed.  
Press ^r to redraw the screen.  
INIT: Error in terminal file <filename>  
z
z
z
This error indicates that you have exceeded the 80 character limit for one or more of the terminal  
capabilities defined in the reported file.  
INIT: Error on line n in terminal file <filename>  
z
You have omitted the = sign from the reported line.  
412  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Unknown IP Address  
Unknown IP Address  
You have already configured the IOLAN and you do know your password, and have lost,  
misconfigured, or don't know the IP address of the IOLAN, so you cannot obtain a successful  
login.  
z
If the IOLAN resides within the local network segment, you can use DeviceManager to find the  
IOLAN.  
z
You can connect directly to the serial port of the IOLAN, as explained in Using a Direct Serial  
Connection to Specify an IP Address on page 76.  
DHCP/BOOTP Problems  
Messages: host name too longor filename too long.  
z
The IOLAN can only accept host names of 14 characters or file names of 64 characters, so verify  
that you are not attempting to pass a string that is longer than those maximums.  
DHCP or BOOTP have been set up to configure my IOLAN, but does not seem to have done  
anything.  
z
z
Check that the server DHCP/BOOTP service is set to on, if not set it to on and reboot.  
Check that your BOOTP server is configured for your IOLAN or that your DHCP server has an  
active lease pool (scope) with at least 1 free IP address.  
You observe TFTP errors when the IOLAN boots, for example:  
TFTP: File not found : filename  
TFTP: Timed out  
This has a number of causes, including:  
z
z
z
z
The file names you specified to DHCP/BOOTP do not exist or are in the wrong place.  
The server for any of the downloadable files in your bootfile has no TFTP server running.  
Verify that lease data in your DHCP server manager is correct.  
Reset or restart the DHCP server.  
Callback Problems  
User Callback is On, and a number is configured for the line, but the IOLAN is not calling the  
user back:  
z
z
z
Verify that the phone number is entered under the user (not the line).  
Verify that the callback Phone Number is valid.  
Verify that the modem at the user’s end is set to ‘auto-answer’.  
Language Problems  
In a customized language, the text strings appear in the wrong place in the Menu, CLI, or  
WebManager.  
Check the original ASCII text file you used to translate to your customised language. The  
z
sequence of the line much match exactly (be aware that comments don’t affect line sequence, but  
can affect the actual line that the strings appear on). So, if you strip out all comments, if the  
original file says line 1000 should be string none, then line 1000 (stripped of comments) should  
be the translated version of none.  
Troubleshooting 413  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Modem Problems  
Modem Problems  
The IOLAN is not initializing the modem.  
z
Check your Line Service is set to SLIP or PPP. If your line service is set to any other type, the  
IOLAN will not initialize a modem. You will need to configure the modem manually.  
PPP Problems  
The link fails on start-up when there are remote IP addresses set for both a user (Framed IP  
value) and a line (Remote IP address).  
z
Check the IP address set for the user; this is used in preference to the IP address set for a line. If  
there is a problem with the user’s IP address, negotiation will fail; the IOLAN will not use the  
line’s IP address as an alternative.  
The link fails on start-up and security (either PAP or CHAP) is enabled on the line.  
z
Check the remote client/device has the same setting; that is, PAP if the IOLAN is using PAP.  
The IOLAN does not perform negotiation with the remote end over PAP or CHAP.  
At the remote end, the client software locks up when security (CHAP) is enabled on the line.  
z
Disable CHAP re-challenge parameter (challenge_interval) in the IOLAN. Some PPP client  
software does not work when receiving CHAP re-challenges.  
PPP is not running successfully over your 485 half-duplex environment.  
PPP is incompatible with half-duplex; it must be run over a full-duplex environment.  
z
Printing Problems  
The print job fails to print on the device attached to the serial port.  
z
On the line where the printer is attached, set Line Service to Printer. Print jobs will not print  
when the line service is set incorrectly.  
When using RCP, the network host receives a rejection message from the IOLAN. The result is  
that the print job does not take place.  
z
Print using LPD  
or  
z
Modify the printer interface scripts on the network host to overcome this weakness of RCP. The  
modification will force the network host to continue trying to send the print job when the  
IOLAN’s printer port is busy.  
Long Reboot Cycle  
Rebooting the IOLAN takes a long time.  
If you are not using DHCP/BOOTP, disable this within the Server Services; otherwise, the IOLAN  
waits to timeout for a request to DHCP/BOOTP.  
414  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SSL/TLS  
SSL/TLS  
If you are experiencing problems obtaining a successful SSL/TLS connection, you can set your  
Syslog Level to Notice and view the syslog for the following messages:  
Line not SSL enabled. Abort connection when a user who is configured for Service SSL_RAW  
tries to login on the serial port.  
The user has been configured for an SSL_RAW connection, but the line has not been configured to  
enable SSL. To resolve this, either enable the line for SSL or change the user's Service to  
TCP_CLEAR if SSL is not wanted.  
Could not obtain peer's certificate.  
z
User has selected a cipher key exchange of ADH (anonymous Diffie-Hellman) and enabled Peer  
verification. ADH does not use certificates so they will not be sent in an SSL/TLS handshake.  
Disable Peer Verification or change to a cipher suite that uses certificates.  
z
User has selected Peer Verification on the configured SSL/TLS server and has not configured a  
certificate for the client. Either disable peer verification on the SSL/TLS server or configure a  
certificate for the SSL/TLS client.  
SSL_accept failed on the SSL/TLS server device.  
z
The device has failed to accept an SSL/TLS connection on top of a TCP connection that has just  
been established. This could indicate that the peer from which TruePort is trying to accept a  
connection from is not configured for SSL/TLS. Verify that the peer has been configured for an  
SSL/TLS client connection.  
Certificate did not match configuration  
z
The message is displayed when Validate Peer Certificate has been enabled, but the configured  
Validation Criteria does not match the corresponding data in the certificate received from the  
peer. The data configured must match exactly to the data in the certificate. The data is also case  
sensitive.  
unknown protocol message when trying to make an SSL/TLS connection  
z
This will be displayed when both sides of the TCP connection are configured as SSL/TLS  
clients. Change one of the end points to act as an SSL/TLS server.  
z
One of the endpoints is not configured for SSL/TLS. Make sure both endpoints are configured  
for SSL/TLS, verify that one is a client and the other is a server.  
tlsv1 alert handshake failure or sslv3 alert handshake failure  
z
The remote site has an SSL/TLS error and is sending this message with an alert message. Look at  
the error messages on the remote end and fix the problem indicated.  
I/O Models  
An I/O Digital or Relay controlled motor is starting/stopping  
z
Digital and Relay channels have automatically resetting fuses, meaning that if the circuit gets  
overloaded and the fuse blows, it will automatically reset when the circuit cools down.  
An A4R2 model is starting/stopping  
z
The A4R2 model can run at 55 degrees Celsius ambient temperature when the input voltage is  
22VDC or below. If the input voltage exceeds 22VDC, the maximum ambient temperature will  
drop into the range of 45-50 degrees Celsius to run successfully.  
Troubleshooting 415  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPv6 Issues  
IPv6 Issues  
You are not seeing the IPv6 address value when you attempt to connect to the IOLAN.  
Windows Vista and Server 2008 operating systems have IPv6 support already enabled, however, you  
will have to install IPv6 support for Windows XP.  
To install IPv6 support in Windows XP, do the following:  
1. In Control Panel, double-click the Network Connections icon.  
2. Double-click the Local Area Connection entry.  
3. In the Local Area Connection Status window, click the Properties button on the General tab.  
4. In the Local Area Connections window, click the Install button on the General tab.  
5. In the Select Network Component Type window, select Protocol and click the Add button.  
6. In the Select Network Protocol window, select Microsoft TCP/IP version 6 and click the OK  
button.  
416  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Contacting Technical Support  
Contacting Technical Support  
Making a Technical Support Query  
Who To Contact  
Note:  
Perle offers free technical support to Perle Authorized Distributors and Registered Perle  
Resellers.  
If you bought your product from a registered Perle supplier, you must contact their Technical Support  
department; they are qualified to deal with your problem.  
Have Your Product Information Ready  
When you make a technical support enquiry please have the following information ready:  
Item  
Write Details Here  
Product Name  
Problem Description  
Your Name  
Company Name and  
Address  
Country  
Phone Number  
Fax Number  
Email Address  
Making a support query via the Perle web page  
If you have an internet connection, please send details of your problem to Technical Support using  
the email links provided on the Perle web site in the Support/Services area.  
Click here to access our website at the following URL:  
http://www.perle.com  
Troubleshooting 417  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Contacting Technical Support  
Repair Procedure  
Before sending the IOLAN for repair, you must contact your Perle supplier. If, however, you bought  
your product directly from Perle you can contact directly.  
Customers who are in Europe, Africa or Middle East can submit repair details via a website form.  
This form is on the Perle website, www.perle.com, in the Support/Services area.  
Click here to access our web site at the following URL:  
http://www.perle.com/support_services/rma_form.asp  
Feedback on this Manual  
If you have any comments or suggestions for improving this manual please email Perle using the  
following address:  
Email: [email protected]  
Please include the title, part number and date of the manual (you can find these on the title page at  
the front of this manual).  
418  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
This chapter provides definitions for Device Server terms.  
BOOTP (BOOTstrap An Internet protocol that enables a diskless workstation to discover its own IP address, the IP  
Protocol)  
address of a BOOTP server on the network, and a file to be loaded into memory to boot the  
machine. This enables the workstation to boot without requiring a hard or floppy disk drive.  
Callback  
A security feature where the Device Server calls back the User at a predetermined number  
defined in the User’s account.  
CHAP (Challenge  
Handshake  
Standard authentication protocol for PPP connections. It provides a higher level of security than  
PAP and should be used whenever possible. see PAP  
Authentication  
Protocol)  
Community (SNMP) An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong  
to. It helps define where information is sent.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host A TCP/IP protocol that provides static and dynamic address allocation and management.  
Configuration  
Protocol)  
Direct Connection  
Connections that bypass the Device Server enabling the user to log straight into a specific host.  
A direct connection is recommended where a user logging in to the Device Server is not  
required.  
Ethernet  
A high-speed (10Mbps,100Mbps) cable technology that connects devices to a LAN, using one  
or more sets of communication protocols.  
Fixed Callback  
A method where there is a specific number defined to callback a user.  
Local Authentication Uses the user ID and password stored within the Device Server User database.  
LPD  
Line Printer Daemon. A printer protocol that uses TCP/IP to establish connections between  
printers and workstations on a network. The technology was developed originally for BSD  
UNIX and has since become the de facto cross-platform printing protocol.  
Modem Initialization A series of commands sent to the modem by a communications program at start up. These  
String  
commands tell a modem how to set itself up in order to communicate easily with another  
modem.  
MOTD  
Multicast  
Message of the day. This is defined by a file whose contents display when users log into the  
Device Server.  
The broadcasting of messages to a specified group of workstations on a LAN, WAN, or internet.  
NAK (Negative  
Acknowledgment)  
A communication control character sent by the receiving destination indicating that the last  
message was not received correctly.  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
419  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAP (Password  
Authentication  
Protocol)  
Standard authentication protocol for PPP connections. see CHAP  
RADIUS (Remote  
Authentication Dial In  
Users Services)  
An open standard network security server that communicates with the PAP protocol.  
Reverse Connection  
Connections that originate from a host that go directly to a serial device through the Device  
Server.  
RIP (Routing  
A protocol that allows gateways and hosts to exchange information about various routes to  
Information Protocol) different networks.  
Roaming Callback  
RPC  
A method where the client supplies the number for callback when they dial in.  
Remote Procedure Call. A type of protocol that allows a program on one computer to execute a  
program on a server computer.  
Silent Connection  
Silent connections are the same as direct connections except that they are permanently  
established. The host login prompt is displayed on the screen. Logging out redisplays this  
prompt. Silent connections, unlike direct connections, however, make permanent use of pseudo  
tty resources and therefore consume host resources even when not in use.  
SNMP (Simple  
Network Management  
Protocol)  
A protocol for managing network devices.  
Subnet/Prefix Bits  
Identifies the device’s IP address, which portion constitutes the network address and which  
portion constitutes the host address.  
420  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
female 364  
male 363  
power in pin  
A
admin  
default password 75  
lost password 331  
analog  
calibrating 323  
API  
I/O commands 285, 392  
TruePort 284  
ARP-Ping, setting an IP address 78  
female 365  
male 364  
DB9 male pinouts 369, 370  
DC power requirements 33  
Decoder utility 393  
default admin password 75  
definitions 419  
Device Server models 27  
DeviceManager  
authentication, general 213  
overview 54  
setting an IP address 75  
DHCP  
B
parameters 64  
binary configuration file 90  
setting an IP address 77  
direct connect  
BOOTP  
parameters 64  
setting an IP address 76  
setting an IP address 77  
E
C
EasyPort Web 85  
cabling, EIA-232 371  
email notification events 119, 299  
calibrating  
analog 323  
temperature 324  
certificates  
F
LDAP CA list 242  
SSH, OpenSSH 242  
SSL 242  
factory default configuration  
custom 322  
original 323  
CLI  
factory defaults, resetting to 330  
IOLAN+ interface 60  
configuration files  
formats 90  
connecting to the Device Server  
console mode 41  
serial mode 41  
H
host-based printing 339  
setting IP address 52  
console mode 41  
custom factory default configuration 322  
I
installing  
IOLAN modem card 395  
rack mount 42  
interface, IOLAN+ 67  
I/O  
D
DB25  
Modbus 278  
pinouts  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
421  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index J  
UDP 274  
N
NFS  
I/O SNMP traps 289  
IOLAN+ interface 67  
CLI 60  
Menu 61  
IOLAN+, supported models 67  
IPsec 232  
Decoder utility 393  
port buffering 194  
NIS parameters 222  
IPv6, setting an IP address 78  
O
online help, using 26  
OpenSSH 242  
J
jumpers  
line termination 377  
power out 377  
setting 377  
P
parameters  
BOOTP/DHCP 64  
LDAP 219  
modems 199  
K
keys  
NIS 222  
port buffering 195  
RADIUS 216  
SecurID 221  
HTTPS 242  
SSH 242  
SSH server 223  
TACACS+ 220  
password  
L
L2TP/IPsec 237  
language  
admin default 75  
IOLAN+ admin 67  
lost 331  
translating 328  
upgrading firmware 328  
LDAP  
PCI slot 395  
pin, power in  
DB25 female 365  
DB25 male 364  
serial RJ45 366  
pinouts  
parameters 219  
line termination, setting jumper 377  
LPD printing 338  
DB25 female 364  
DB25 male 363  
DB9 male 369, 370  
RJ45 ethernet 370  
RJ45 MDC serial 369  
RJ45 SCS48C serial 367  
RJ45 serial 366, 368  
port buffering 194  
Decoder utility  
M
medical unit  
description 27, 39  
installing firmware 73  
power supply 33  
powering up 43  
Menu  
conventions 62  
IOLAN+ 67  
Decoder utility 195  
local 194  
parameters 195  
remote 195  
Menu IOLAN+ interface 61  
MIB 65  
Modbus  
configuration overview 333  
gateway settings 334  
I/O access 278  
line settings 335  
TruePort 283  
power in pin  
DB25 female 365  
DB25 male 364  
serial RJ45 366  
power out, setting jumper 377  
printers 338  
mode  
console 41  
printing  
serial 41  
host-based 339  
LPD 338  
RCP 339  
models, Device Server 27  
modem card 395  
modem parameters 199  
product repair 418  
422  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R Index  
creating 329  
downloading 329  
text configuration file 90  
TruePort  
API 284  
Modbus 283  
TruePort utility 130, 391  
R
rack mount  
description 38, 40  
installing 42  
RADIUS  
parameters 216  
supported RADIUS parameters 351  
RCP printing 339  
resetting to factory defaults 330  
RIP  
U
UDP  
overview 103  
configuring 142  
UDP, I/O 274  
user sessions 209  
utility  
RJ45  
ethernet pinouts 370  
MDC serial pinouts 369  
SCS48C serial pinouts 367  
serial pinouts 366, 368  
RJ45 serial power in pin 366  
Decoder 393  
TruePort 130, 391  
V
S
virtual modem 164  
vmodem  
overview 164  
VNP  
SecurID parameters 221  
serial mode 41  
services  
line  
IPsec 232  
printer 338  
signal I/O 169  
UDP 142  
VPN 231  
exceptions 238  
L2TP/IPsec 237  
vmodem 164  
sessions 209  
setting an IP address  
ARP-Ping 78  
BOOTP/DHCP 77  
DeviceManager 75  
direct connect 76  
IPv6 78  
W
WebManager  
overview 57  
signal I/O  
general 169  
SNMP  
I/O traps 289  
support MIBs 65  
using 65  
SSH server parameters 223  
SSL certificate 242  
supported models  
IOLAN+ 67  
T
TACACS+ parameters 220  
technical support  
contacting 417  
online 417  
product information 417  
product repair 418  
via the internet 417  
temperature  
calibrating 324  
terminal definitions  
IOLAN SDS/SCS/STS/MDC User’s Guide, Version 4.0  
423  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pelco DVR DX9000 User Manual
Philips Camcorder CAM150 User Manual
Philips Car Stereo System HQ8010 User Manual
Philips Cell Phone CT9A9UBLK User Manual
Philips Headphones SHM3300 37 User Manual
Philips Mouse SPM2702 User Manual
Pioneer Car Stereo System DEH P3110 User Manual
Pioneer DVD Player 655A User Manual
Porter Cable Saw 7724 User Manual
Precor Elliptical Trainer EFX521s User Manual